DH Instruments PG7102 Operation and Maintenance Manual

PG7000™ PISTON GAUGES
PG7102™, PG7202™,
PG7302™, PG7601™
(Ver. 3.0 and Higher)
Operation and Maintenance Manual
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
High-pressure liquids and gases are potentially hazardous. Energy stored in these liquids and gases
can be released unexpectedly and with extreme force. High-pressure systems should be assembled and
operated only by personnel who have been instructed in proper safety practices.
© 1998 - 2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company All rights reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of DH Instruments 4765
East Beautiful Lane Phoenix Arizona 85044-5318 USA.
DH Instruments makes sincere efforts to ensure the accuracy and quality of its published materials; however, no warranty,
expressed or implied, is provided. DH Instruments disclaims any responsibility or liability for any direct or indirect damages
resulting from the use of the information in this manual or products described in it. Mention of any product or brand does not
constitute an endorsement by DH Instruments of that product or brand. This manual was originally composed in English and was
subsequently translated into other languages. The fidelity of the translation cannot be guaranteed. In case of conflict between the
English version and other language versions, the English version predominates.
DH Instruments, DH, DHI, PG7000, PG7102, PG7202, PG7302, PG7601, CalTool and COMPASS are trademarks, registered and
otherwise, of DH Instruments, a Fluke Company.
Swagelok is a registered trademark of the Swagelok Company.
Krytox is a registered trademark of the Dupont de Nemours Company.
Products described in this manual are manufactured under international patents and one or more of the following U.S.
patents: 6,701,791, 5,142,483, 5,257,640, 5,331,838, 5,445,035. Other U.S. and international patents pending.
Document No. 3152117
090615
Printed in the USA
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................... I
TABLES .................................................................................. V
FIGURES................................................................................ VI
ABOUT THIS MANUAL ............................................................ VII
1.
INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 1
1.1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW............................................................................................................................1
1.2
SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................................................................2
1.2.1
1.2.1.1
1.2.1.2
1.2.2
1.2.2.1
1.2.2.2
1.2.2.3
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.4.1
1.2.4.2
1.2.4.3
1.3
TERMINAL AND PLATFORM FRONT AND REAR PANELS ...............................................................11
1.3.1
1.3.1.1
1.3.1.2
1.3.2
2.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................2
EMBEDDED FEATURES...........................................................................................................................3
AMBIENT AND INSTRUMENT CONDITION MEASUREMENTS..............................................................4
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES....................................................................................................................5
PC-7100/7600 ............................................................................................................................................5
PC-7200 .....................................................................................................................................................6
PC-7300 .....................................................................................................................................................7
MASS SETS...................................................................................................................................................8
PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS ....................................................................................................................8
PC-7100/7600 ............................................................................................................................................8
PC-7200 .....................................................................................................................................................9
PC-7300 ...................................................................................................................................................10
TERMINAL FRONT AND REAR PANELS ..................................................................................................11
PG TERMINAL FRONT PANEL...............................................................................................................11
PG TERMINAL REAR PANEL .................................................................................................................12
PLATFORM REAR PANELS .......................................................................................................................12
INSTALLATION ................................................................ 13
2.1
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION...........................................................................................................13
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
2.1.1.2
2.1.1.3
2.1.1.4
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
2.1.2.2
2.1.2.3
REMOVING FROM PACKAGING................................................................................................................13
PLATFORM..............................................................................................................................................13
MASS SET ...............................................................................................................................................13
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE(S) ...........................................................................................................14
AUTOMATED MASS HANDLER .............................................................................................................14
INSPECTING CONTENTS...........................................................................................................................14
PLATFORM..............................................................................................................................................14
MASS SET ...............................................................................................................................................19
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE(S) ...........................................................................................................21
2.2
SITE REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................................................................22
2.3
SETUP....................................................................................................................................................23
2.3.1
2.3.1.1
2.3.1.2
2.3.1.3
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
PREPARING FOR OPERATION .................................................................................................................23
SETTING UP THE PLATFORM ...............................................................................................................23
SYSTEM PRESSURE INTERCONNECTIONS .......................................................................................24
SETTING UP A MASS SET .....................................................................................................................24
INSTALLING A PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE INTO THE PLATFORM....................................................25
SWITCHING A PG7202 BETWEEN GAS OPERATION AND OIL OPERATION .......................................27
POWER UP AND VERIFICATION .........................................................................................................28
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
POWER UP ..................................................................................................................................................28
CHECK THAT ON-BOARD PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE AND MASS SET INFORMATION ARE
CORRECT....................................................................................................................................................29
SET LOCAL GRAVITY VALUE ...................................................................................................................29
SETUP PRESSURE EQUATION VARIABLE INPUT SOURCES .....................................................29
Page I
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.8.1
2.4.9
2.4.10
2.4.11
2.5
3.
CHECK PROPER OPERATION OF AMBIENT CONDITION MEASUREMENTS ......................................29
APPLY PRESSURE TO THE PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE ....................................................................30
CHECK PROPER BEHAVIOR OF MOTORIZED PISTON ROTATION ......................................................30
CHECK PROPER OPERATION OF PISTON BEHAVIOR MEASUREMENTS...........................................31
VERIFY VACUUM REFERENCE (PG7601 ONLY) .................................................................................31
CHECK AUTOMATED PRESSURE GENERATION (IF PRESENT) ....................................................32
CHECK/SET SECURITY LEVEL .................................................................................................................32
ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE BEFORE MAKING PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS ................32
SHORT TERM STORAGE .....................................................................................................................33
GENERAL OPERATION ..................................................... 35
3.1
FUNDAMENTAL OPERATING PRINCIPLES........................................................................................35
3.1.1
GAS OPERATED, LIQUID LUBRICATED PISTON-CYLINDER OPERATING PRINCIPLE
(PG7202) ....................................................................................................................................................36
3.2
KEYPAD LAYOUT AND PROTOCOL ...................................................................................................37
3.3
SOUNDS ................................................................................................................................................38
3.4
PRESSURE READY/NOT READY INDICATION...................................................................................38
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
PISTON POSITION READY/NOT READY ..................................................................................................39
PISTON ROTATION READY/NOT READY.................................................................................................39
VACUUM REFERENCE READY/NOT READY (PG7601 ONLY) .....................................................40
3.5
PISTON POSITION ................................................................................................................................41
3.6
MASS LOADING PROTOCOL...............................................................................................................42
3.7
MAIN RUN SCREEN ..............................................................................................................................45
3.8
GENERAL FUNCTION/MENU FLOW CHART ......................................................................................46
3.9
DIRECT FUNCTION KEYS ....................................................................................................................47
3.9.1
DIRECT FUNCTION KEYS SUMMARY ......................................................................................................47
3.9.2
[P-C] .............................................................................................................................................................48
3.9.3
[UNIT]...........................................................................................................................................................49
3.9.3.1
CUSTOMIZING PRESSURE UNITS AVAILABLE UNDER THE UNIT FUNCTION ................................50
3.9.4
[MODE] ........................................................................................................................................................52
3.9.4.1
DIFFERENTIAL MEASUREMENT MODE (PG7601 ONLY) ........................................................53
3.9.4.2
HIGH LINE DIFFERENTIAL MEASUREMENT MODE (PG7102, PG7302 AND PG7202 ONLY)...........60
3.9.5
[SYSTEM] ....................................................................................................................................................72
3.9.5.1
FIRST SYSTEM RUN SCREEN ..............................................................................................................73
3.9.5.2
SECOND SYSTEM RUN SCREEN .........................................................................................................73
3.9.6
[AMBIENT] ...................................................................................................................................................74
3.9.7
[HEAD] .........................................................................................................................................................75
3.9.8
[ROTATE].....................................................................................................................................................77
3.9.8.1
<2PRE-DECEL>.......................................................................................................................................79
3.9.9
[GEN] (OPTIONAL)......................................................................................................................................79
3.9.9.1
<2TARGET>.............................................................................................................................................81
3.9.9.2
<3RAISE> ................................................................................................................................................82
3.9.9.3
<4UL>.......................................................................................................................................................82
3.9.9.4
<5TOL> ....................................................................................................................................................82
3.9.9.5
<6REFLOAT>...........................................................................................................................................83
3.9.9.6
<7VOL> ....................................................................................................................................................83
3.9.10
[RES]............................................................................................................................................................84
3.9.11
[ENTER/SET P] FROM RUN SCREEN .......................................................................................................85
3.9.11.1
[ENTER/SET P] IN PRESSURE TO MASS MODE .................................................................................86
3.9.11.2
[ENTER/SET P] IN MASS TO PRESSURE MODE .................................................................................88
3 . 9 . 1 1 . 3 C O M M A N D S F O R Z E R O P R E S S U R E , E N D I N G A T E S T .....................................................89
3.9.12
[P OR M] ......................................................................................................................................................89
3.9.13
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.11
[
] AND [
], [←]....................................................................................................................................90
[SETUP] MENU......................................................................................................................................91
<1SELECT> .................................................................................................................................................93
<2VIEW> ......................................................................................................................................................93
<3EDIT> .......................................................................................................................................................94
[SPECIAL] MENU ..................................................................................................................................96
3.11.1
<1PC/MS> ....................................................................................................................................................97
3.11.1.1
CREATE PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE.................................................................................................99
3.11.1.2
EDIT PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE .....................................................................................................101
3.11.1.3
VIEW PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE ....................................................................................................102
3.11.1.4
DELETE PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE ...............................................................................................102
3.11.1.5
SELECT THE ACTIVE PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE .........................................................................102
3.11.1.6
ADD MASS SET.....................................................................................................................................103
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page II
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.11.1.7
3.11.1.8
3.11.1.9
3.11.1.10
3.11.1.11
3.11.1.12
3.11.1.13
3.11.1.14
3.11.1.15
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.11.3.1
3.11.3.2
3.11.3.3
3.11.3.4
3.11.4
3.11.4.1
3.11.4.2
3.11.4.3
3.11.4.4
3.11.4.5
3.11.5
3.11.5.1
3.11.5.2
3.11.5.3
3.11.5.4
3.11.5.5
3.11.6
3.11.7
3.11.8
3.11.8.1
3.11.8.2
3.11.8.3
3.11.8.4
3.11.9
3.11.9.1
3.11.9.2
3.11.9.3
3.11.9.4
3.11.9.5
3.11.9.6
4.
EDIT MASS SET ....................................................................................................................................107
VIEW MASS SET ...................................................................................................................................107
DELETE MASS SET ..............................................................................................................................108
SELECT MASS SET ..............................................................................................................................108
ADD MASS LOADING BELL..................................................................................................................109
EDIT MASS LOADING BELL .................................................................................................................110
VIEW MASS LOADING BELL ................................................................................................................110
DELETE MASS LOADING BELL ...........................................................................................................110
SELECT MASS LOADING BELL ...........................................................................................................111
<2PRESU> .................................................................................................................................................111
<3HEAD> ...................................................................................................................................................111
<3HEAD>, <1FLUID>.............................................................................................................................112
<3HEAD>, <2UNIT>...............................................................................................................................112
<3HEAD>, <3ATM> ...............................................................................................................................113
<3HEAD>, <4PISTON>..........................................................................................................................113
<4PREFS> .................................................................................................................................................114
<4PREFS>, <1SCRSVR> ......................................................................................................................114
<4PREFS>, <2SOUND> ........................................................................................................................114
<4PREFS>, <3TIME> ............................................................................................................................115
<4PREFS>, <4ID> .................................................................................................................................115
<4PREFS>, <5LEVEL>..........................................................................................................................116
<5REMOTE> ..............................................................................................................................................118
COM1, COM2 AND COM3 (RS232) ......................................................................................................119
IEEE-488 ................................................................................................................................................119
RS232 SELF TEST ................................................................................................................................120
EXTERNAL BAROMETER (RPM) COMMUNICATIONS (COM2).........................................................120
EXTERNAL VACUUM GAUGE COMMUNICATIONS (COM2) (PG7601 ONLY) ..................................122
<6GL> ........................................................................................................................................................124
<7CAL> ......................................................................................................................................................125
<8AMH> .....................................................................................................................................................125
<2CONTROL>, <1UP/DOWN> ..............................................................................................................126
<2CONTROL>, <2DISCREET> .............................................................................................................126
<2CONTROL>, <3LOADALL> ...............................................................................................................127
<2CONTROL>, <4UNLOADALL> ..........................................................................................................127
<9RESET> .................................................................................................................................................127
<9RESET>, <1SETS> ...........................................................................................................................128
<9RESET>, <2UNITS> ..........................................................................................................................128
<9RESET>, <3COM>.............................................................................................................................129
<9RESET>, <4CAL> ..............................................................................................................................129
<9RESET>, <5SETUPS> ......................................................................................................................130
<9RESET>, <6ALL> ..............................................................................................................................130
REMOTE OPERATION ......................................................131
4.1
OVERVIEW ..........................................................................................................................................131
4.2
INTERFACING .....................................................................................................................................131
4.2.1
4.2.1.1
4.2.1.2
4.2.2
4.3
COMMANDS ........................................................................................................................................133
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
4.3.4
4.3.4.1
4.3.4.2
4.4
COMMAND SYNTAX .................................................................................................................................133
COMMAND SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................134
ERROR MESSAGES .................................................................................................................................136
AMH ERRORS .......................................................................................................................................137
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS.....................................................................................................................137
IEEE STD. 488.2 COMMON AND STATUS COMMANDS .....................................................137
PG7000 COMMANDS............................................................................................................................139
STATUS SYSTEM................................................................................................................................166
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.1.2
4.5
RS232 INTERFACE ...................................................................................................................................131
COM1 .....................................................................................................................................................132
COM2 AND COM3 .................................................................................................................................132
IEEE-488 (GPIB) ........................................................................................................................................133
STATUS REPORTING SYSTEM ...............................................................................................................166
STATUS BYTE REGISTER ...................................................................................................................166
STANDARD EVENT REGISTER ...........................................................................................................167
HIGH LINE DIFFERENTIAL MODE PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES....................................................168
4.5.1
4.5.2
RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE FOR A HOST PROGRAM TO REMOTELY SET A NEW HIGH LINE
PRESSURE AND ENABLE HIGH LINE DIFFERENTIAL MODE..............................................................168
RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE FOR A HOST PROGRAM TO REMOTELY ENABLE HIGH LINE
DIFFERENTIAL MODE USING THE LAST LINE PRESSURE SETTING.................................................171
Page III
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5.
MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION ...........173
5.1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................173
5.2
PLATFORM..........................................................................................................................................174
5.2.1
5.2.1.1
5.2.1.2
5.2.1.3
5.2.1.4
5.2.1.5
5.2.1.6
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.3
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES .......................................................................................................... 182
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.2.1
5.3.2.2
5.3.2.3
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
5.3.6.1
5.4
CLEANING .................................................................................................................................................198
RECALIBRATION ......................................................................................................................................198
UPDATING MASS SET FILES...............................................................................................................198
5.5
RELOADING EMBEDDED SOFTWARE INTO PG7000 FLASH MEMORY ........................................199
5.6
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY OF PG7000 .............................................................................199
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
PLATFORM................................................................................................................................................199
TERMINAL .................................................................................................................................................199
AMH AUTOMATED MASS HANDLER REMOVAL ...................................................................................199
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................201
6.1
7.
DISASSEMBLY, CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE .................................................................................182
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY .......................................................................................................183
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY OF GAS OPERATED, GAS LUBRICATED
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES (PC-7100/7600) .......................................................................183
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY OF GAS OPERATED, LIQUID LUBRICATED
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES (PC-7200) ..........................................................................................187
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY OF OIL OPERATED, OIL LUBRICATED
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES (PC-7300) ..........................................................................................189
FILLING OR EMPTYING GAS OPERATED, LIQUID LUBRICATED PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE
RESERVOIR WITH LIQUID .......................................................................................................................191
CLEANING PISTON-CYLINDERS.............................................................................................................192
LUBRICATING PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES ......................................................................................194
RECALIBRATION ......................................................................................................................................198
UPDATING PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE FILES................................................................................198
MASS SETS .........................................................................................................................................198
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
6.
CALIBRATION/ADJUSTMENT OF ON-BOARD MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS ....................................174
PRINCIPLES ..........................................................................................................................................174
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR ..................................................................................................174
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR ...................................................................................................175
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR ...........................................................................................................176
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR .....................................................176
REFERENCE VACUUM GAUGE (PG7601 ONLY) ...............................................................................178
PISTON POSITION DETECTION ADJUSTMENT.....................................................................................179
EMPTYING OIL RUN-OFF TRAY (PG7202 AND PG7302 ONLY) .................................................180
PURGE MOUNTING POST LIQUID RUN OFF (PG7202 ONLY) ..............................................180
DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT ..................................................................................................................181
OVERVIEW ..........................................................................................................................................201
APPENDIX ......................................................................205
7.1
CONVERSION OF NUMERICAL VALUES..........................................................................................205
7.1.1
7.2
PRESSURE................................................................................................................................................205
DEFINED PRESSURE CALCULATIONS ............................................................................................205
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.3.1
7.2.3.2
PG7102, PG7202 AND PG7302 ................................................................................................................207
PG7601 ......................................................................................................................................................208
FLUID HEADS ...........................................................................................................................................209
FLUID HEAD COMPONENTS ...............................................................................................................209
OVERALL FLUID HEAD CORRECTION ...............................................................................................210
7.3
GLOSSARY..........................................................................................................................................211
7.4
WARRANTY STATEMENT .................................................................................................................. 213
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page IV
TABLES AND FIGURES
TABLES
Table 1. PG7102 Parts List........................................................................................................................ 15
Table 2. PG7202 Parts List........................................................................................................................ 16
Table 3. PG7302 Parts List........................................................................................................................ 17
Table 4. PG7601 Parts List........................................................................................................................ 18
Table 5. Manual Mass Set Parts List (excluding 80 and 100 kg) .............................................................. 19
Table 6. Manual Mass Set Parts List (80 and 100 kg)............................................................................... 19
Table 7. AMH-38 Mass Set Parts List........................................................................................................ 19
Table 8. AMH-100 Mass Set Parts List...................................................................................................... 19
Table 9. Mass Set Compositions ............................................................................................................... 20
Table 10. Mass Set Compatibility .............................................................................................................. 20
Table 11. PC-7100/7600 Piston-Cylinder Modules Parts List ................................................................... 21
Table 12. PC-7200 Piston-Cylinder Modules Parts List ............................................................................ 21
Table 13. PC-7300 Piston-Cylinder Modules Parts List ........................................................................... 22
Table 14. Summary of PG7000 Direct Function Key Operations .............................................................. 47
Table 15. Pressure Units of Measure Available......................................................................................... 51
Table 16. Valve Settings for Setting Differential Mode Static Pressure..................................................... 56
Table 17. Valve Settings to Apply PG7000 Pressure to the RPM for Differential Mode Offsetting........... 57
Table 18. Valve Settings for Operating in Differential Mode...................................................................... 59
Table 19. SETUP File Choices, Factory Preferred Choice and Normal Value.......................................... 92
Table 20. Security Levels - Functions NOT Executed Per Function/Level.............................................. 117
Table 21. COM1, COM2 and COM3 Available Settings .......................................................................... 119
Table 22. COM1 DB-9F Pin Designation................................................................................................. 132
Table 23. COM2 and COM3 DB-9M Pin Designation ............................................................................. 132
Table 24. Command Summary ................................................................................................................ 134
Table 25. Error Messages........................................................................................................................ 136
Table 26. Status Byte Register ................................................................................................................ 166
Table 27. Standard Event Register.......................................................................................................... 167
Table 28. Mounting Post Wire Colors, Description and Location ............................................................ 178
Table 29. PG7000 Troubleshooting Checklist ......................................................................................... 201
Table 30. Pressure Unit of Measure Conversions ................................................................................... 205
Table 31. PG7000 Defined Pressure Calculation Variables.................................................................... 206
Table 32. DHI Authorized Service Providers ........................................................................................... 213
Page V
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FI G U R E S
Figure 1. PG Terminal Front Panel ............................................................................................................ 11
Figure 2. PG Terminal Rear Panel............................................................................................................. 12
Figure 3. PG Platform Rear Panel ............................................................................................................. 12
Figure 4. Piston-Cylinder Module Installation ............................................................................................ 26
Figure 5. Piston Gauge Operating Principle .............................................................................................. 35
Figure 6. Gas Operated, Liquid Lubricated Piston-Cylinder (PC-7200) Operating Principle ................... 37
Figure 7. PG7000 Keypad Layout.............................................................................................................. 37
Figure 8. Piston Stroke and Zones ............................................................................................................ 41
Figure 9. Run Screen Flow Chart .............................................................................................................. 46
Figure 10. Differential Mode Controller Schematic .................................................................................... 55
Figure 11. High Line Differential Mode Schematic .................................................................................... 63
Figure 12. Status Byte Register ............................................................................................................... 166
Figure 13. PG7202 Mounting Post Drain................................................................................................. 181
Figure 14. 10 and 20 kPa/kg Gas Piston-Cylinder Module (Expanded View) ......................................... 184
Figure 15. 10 kPa/kg Piston Insertion Tool.............................................................................................. 185
Figure 16. Gas Piston-Cylinder Module Sleeve Nut Tool ........................................................................ 185
Figure 17. 50, 100 and 200 kPa/kg Gas Piston-Cylinder Modules (Expanded View) ............................. 186
Figure 18. Gas Operated, Liquid Lubricated Piston-Cylinder Module (Expanded View) ....................... 188
Figure 19. Oil Piston-Cylinder Module (Expanded View) ........................................................................ 190
Figure 20. Filling Gas Operated, Liquid Lubricated Piston-Cylinder Module Reservoir (PC-7200) ....... 192
Figure 21. Gas Operated, Gas Lubricated Piston-Cylinder Module Lubrication Chart ............................ 195
Figure 22. Gas Operated, Liquid Lubricated Piston-Cylinder Module Lubrication Chart ........................ 196
Figure 23. Oil Operated Piston-Cylinder Module Lubrication Chart ........................................................ 197
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page VI
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual provides the user with the information necessary to operate various PG7000 Piston Gauges.
It also includes a great deal of additional information provided to help you optimize PG7000 use and take
full advantage of its many features and functions.
This manual covers four PG7000 models: PG7102, PG7202, PG7302 and PG7601. The four models
have many features and characteristics in common as well as individual differences. When discussing
features that are common to all four models, they are referred to collectively as PG7000. When providing
information pertaining to a specific model, that model is referred to by its specific model number.
Before using the manual, take a moment to familiarize yourself with the Table of Contents structure.
All first time PG7000 users should read Sections 1 and 2. Section 3 provides a comprehensive
description of general PG7000 operating principles. Section 4 covers remote communication with an
external computer. Section 5 provides maintenance and calibration information. Section 6 is a quick
troubleshooting guide. Use the information in Section 6 to troubleshoot unexpected PG7000 behavior
based on the symptoms of that behavior.
Certain words and expressions have specific meaning as they pertain to PG7000s. The Glossary
(see Section 7) is useful as a quick reference for the definition of specific words and expressions as they
are used in this manual.
FOR THOSE OF YOU WHO “DON’T READ MANUALS”, GO DIRECTLY TO SECTION 2.3 TO SET UP
YOUR PG7000. THEN GO TO SECTION 2.4. THIS WILL GET YOU RUNNING QUICKLY WITH MINIMAL RISK OF
CAUSING DAMAGE TO YOURSELF OR YOUR PG7000. THEN… WHEN YOU HAVE QUESTIONS OR START TO
WONDER ABOUT ALL THE GREAT FEATURES YOU MIGHT BE MISSING, GET INTO THE MANUAL!
Manual Conventions
(CAUTION) is used throughout the manual to identify user warnings and cautions.
(NOTE) is used throughout the manual to identify operating and applications advice and
additional explanations.
[ ] indicates direct function keys (e.g., [RANGE]).
< > indicates PG7000 screen displays (e.g., <1yes>)
Page VII
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NO T E S
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page VIII
1. INTRODUCTION
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
PG7000 Piston Gauges are reference level pressure standards that operate on the piston
gauge principle. Pressure is defined by balancing it against the force exerted by a known mass
accelerated by gravity on the effective area of a piston-cylinder.
A PG7000 piston gauge consists of the PG7000 Platform, one or several piston-cylinder modules, a mass
set. An automated mass handling system is available. A PG7000 system normally also includes the
means to generate and adjust pressures and to interconnect the system components and a device being
calibrated or tested. The pressure generation component can be manual or automated. COMPASS® for
Pressure software may also be included to assist in executing test sequences, acquiring test data and
producing test reports.
There are four PG7000 Platforms: PG7102, PG7202, PG7302 and PG7601. These have a common
PG7000 presentation and features. They are distinguished by their normal operating medium (oil and/or
gas) and the capability to define pressures relative to a vacuum reference.
•
PG7102
- Gas operated with gas lubricated piston-cylinder modules (PC-7100/7600 modules)
- Maximum pressure is 11 MPa (1 600 psi)
- Does not support definition of pressure against a vacuum reference
•
PG7202
-
•
PG7302
- Oil operated (PC-7300 modules)
- Maximum pressure is 500 MPa (72 500 psi)
•
PG7601
- Gas operated, gas lubricated piston-cylinder modules (PC-7100/7600 modules)
- Maximum pressure is 7 MPa (1 000 psi)
- Supports definition of pressure against a vacuum reference
Gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder modules (PC-7200 modules)
Oil operated piston-cylinder modules (PC-7300 modules)
Maximum pressure is 110 MPa (16 000 psi) when operated with a PC-7200 module
Maximum pressure is 200 MPa (30 000 psi) when operated with a PC-7300 module
Does not support definition of pressure against a vacuum reference
PG7000 platforms, piston-cylinder modules, mass sets and mass handling systems are designed to
maximize metrological performance and ease of operation. They include many features that enhance the
fundamental precision and stability of pressure measurements as well as simplifying use and reducing
operator influence on the measurements. Extensive monitoring and controlling capability and advanced
local and remote user interfaces are integrated into PG7000 Platforms.
Operator interaction with PG7000 and its extensive capabilities and peripherals is accomplished through
a single display and keypad on the PG Terminal or from a computer via a single standard RS232 or
IEEE-488 interface.
Page 1
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.2
SPECIFICATIONS
1.2.1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Power Requirements
85 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 22 VA max. consumption.
Operating Temperature Range
15 to 35 °C
Operating Humidity Range
5 to 95% R.H., non-condensing
Weight
Instrument platform with no mass loaded.
PG7102
PG7202
PG7302
PG7601
PG Terminal
13 kg (29 lb)
13 kg (29 lb)
13 kg (29 lb)
17 kg (37 lb)
1.4 kg (3 lb)
Dimensions
Instrument Platform
36 cm H x 40 cm W x 35 cm D (14.5 in. x 15.8 in. x 13.8 in.)
(Height: Top of mounting post with piston-cylinder module installed
for PG7102/PG7202/PG7302; top of bell jar for PG7601.)
PG Terminal
12 cm H x 15 cm W x 20 cm D (4.7 in. H x 5.9 in. W x 7.9 in. D)
Microprocessors
Instrument Platform
PG Terminal
Motorola 68302
Hitachi 64180
Communication Ports
RS232
IEEE-488
COM1: Host computer
COM2: External barometer or vacuum gauge (PG7601) and pass
through communications
COM3: Automated pressure generator/controller
Host computer
Overall Pressure Ranges
Actual range depends on piston-cylinder
and mass set selection
PG7102
Gauge:
Absolute:
Differential:
5 kPa to 11 MPa (0.7 to 1 600 psi)
105 kPa to 11 MPa (15 to 1 600 psi)
DP + static pressure < 11 MPa (1 600 psi)
PG7202
Gauge (gas): 100 kPa to 110 MPa (15 to 16 000 psi)
Absolute (gas): 200 kPa to 110 MPa (30 to 16 000 psi)
Gauge (oil): (PG7302 module): 1 to 200 MPa (150 to 30 000 psi)
Absolute (oil): (PG7302 module) 1.1 to 200 MPa (165 to 30 000 psi)
Differential:
DP + static pressure < 110 MPa (16 000 psi)
PC-7200 can be operated in oil up to 200 MPa (30 000 psi)
when used with PC-7300 oil operated piston-cylinders.
PG7302
Gauge:
Absolute:
20 kPa to 500 MPa (3 to 75 000 psi)
120 kPa to 500 MPa (20 to 75 000 psi)
PG7601
Gauge:
Absolute:
Differential:
4 kPa to 7 MPa (0.6 to 1 000 psi)
7 kPa to 7 MPa (0.7 to 1 000 psi)
- 90 to 350 kPa (-13 to 50 psi) at
15 to 200 kPaa (2 to 30 psia) static pressure
PG7102
Gas:
air, helium, nitrogen
PG7202
Gas:
Oil:
any non-corrosive
Di2-EthylHexyl Sebacate (synthetic oil)
PG7302
Oil:
Di2-EthylHexyl Sebacate (synthetic oil)
PG7601
Gas:
air, helium, nitrogen
Operating Media
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 2
1. INTRODUCTION
Maximum Mass Load
PG7102
100 kg, while not exceeding 11 MPa (1 600 psi)
PG7202
100 kg, while not exceeding 110 MPa (16 000 psi) when operated
with PC-7200 piston-cylinder modules or 200 MPa (30 000 psi) when
operated with PC-7300 piston-cylinder modules
PG7302
100 kg
PG7601
38 kg
Pressure Connections
PG7102
Test port:
DH200
PG7202
Test port:
Drain port:
DH500
DH500
PG7302
Test port:
DH500
PG7601
Test port:
Bell Jar Vent Port:
DH200
DH200
Vacuum Reference
Pump Down Port:
KF25 (KF40 available on optional AMH
automated mass handler)
External Vacuum Port: Optional KF25 on bell jar (KF40 available
on optional AMH automated mass handler)
1/4
DH200 and DH500 are gland and collar type fittings for
in. (6.35 mm) coned and left hand threaded tubes.
DH200
is
equivalent
to
AE
SF250C,
HIP
LF4,
etc.
DH500 is equivalent to AE F250C, HIP HF4, etc.
Available, must be specified.
CE Conformance
1.2.1.1
EMBEDDED FEATURES
•
Local control with 2 x 20 vacuum fluorescent display and 4 x 4 function
driven keypad.
•
Real time (1 second update rate) display and measurement of ambient
(pressure, temperature, humidity) and instrument (piston-cylinder
temperature, piston position, piston drop rate, piston rotation rate, piston
rotation decay rate, reference vacuum) conditions.
•
Real time (1 second update rate) mass-to-pressure and pressure-to-mass
calculations taking into consideration all environmental and operational
variables.
•
Full gas and liquid fluid head corrections including DUT head correction and
piston position head correction.
•
Adjustable mass loading resolution (0.01 g to 0.1 kg).
•
Audible prompts of instrument status (piston movement, Ready/Not Ready indication)
with override capability.
•
Integrated automated mass handling option (AMH-38 or AMH-100).
•
Interfacing and automatic exploitation of external barometer via RS232.
•
Interfacing and automatic exploitation of any external vacuum gauge via
RS232 (PG7601 only).
•
Automated differential mode to define low differential pressures at various
static pressures between vacuum and two atmospheres.
•
Automated high line differential mode to define differential pressure at high
line pressure.
Page 3
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
•
Storage and one step activation of metrological data on up to 18 piston-cylinder
modules, (3) mass sets and (3) mass loading bells.
•
Continuous pressure Ready/Not Ready indication based on measured
conditions.
•
Motorized, intelligent piston drive system based measured rotation rate with
operator alert and manual override.
•
Integrated automated pressure control with standard DHI pressure
controllers.
•
Full RS232 and IEEE-488 communications with multi-level commands to set
and read all instrument functions.
1.2.1.2
AMBIENT AND INSTRUMENT CONDITION
MEASUREMENTS
Ambient
Temperature
o
Piston Cylinder Module
o
0 to 40 C
0 to 40 C
Resolution
0.1
0.01
Measurement Uncertainty
±1
± 0.1
Range
Barometric Pressure
with Internal Sensor
Range
Resolution
Measurement Uncertainty
70 to 110 kPa
10 Pa
± 140 Pa
Barometric pressure can also be read automatically with any
RS232 device such as a DHI RPM.
Relative Humidity
Range
Resolution
Measurement Uncertainty
5 to 95 % RH
1 % RH
± 10 % RH
Piston Position
Range
Resolution
Measurement Uncertainty
Piston Rotation
(Rate and deceleration)
Range
Resolution
± 4.5 mm
0.1 mm
± 0.2 mm
2 to 99 rpm
1 rpm
Vacuum
(PG7601 only)
Range
Resolution
Measurement Uncertainty
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
0 to 20 Pa
0.01 Pa
± 0.1 Pa or 10 % of reading, whichever is greater
Page 4
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2.2
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES
All piston-cylinders are integrated modules including mounting hardware delivered in individual
shipping and storage bullet cases.
1.2.2.1
PC-7100/7600
Gas operated, gas lubricated piston-cylinder characteristics. Used in PG7102
and PG7601 platforms.
PC-7100/7600-10, TC
PC-7100/7600-10-L
Operation
Gas operated, gas lubricated
Piston Material
Tungsten carbide
Cylinder Material
Tungsten carbide
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
35 mm
1 000 mm
2
Simple free deformation
PC-7100/7600-20
Operation
Gas operated, gas lubricated
Piston Material
Tungsten carbide
Cylinder Material
Tungsten carbide
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
25 mm
500 mm
2
Simple free deformation
PC-7100/7600-50
Operation
Gas operated, gas lubricated
Piston Material
Tungsten carbide
Cylinder Material
Tungsten carbide
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting system
16 mm
2
200 mm
Negative free deformation
PC-7100/7600-100
Operation
Gas operated, gas lubricated
Piston Material
Tungsten carbide
Cylinder Material
Tungsten carbide
Nominal Diameter
11 mm
Nominal Area
98 mm
Mounting System
2
Negative free deformation
PC-7100/7600-200
Operation
Gas operated, gas lubricated
Piston Material
Tungsten carbide
Cylinder Material
Tungsten carbide
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
8 mm
50 mm
2
Negative free deformation
Page 5
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.2.2.2
PC-7200
Gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder module characteristics. Used in
PG7202 platform.
Though not recommended for day-to-day operation, PC-7200 modules can
also be filled completely with oil and operated with oil as the test medium
(see Section 2.3.3).
PC-7200-100
Operation
Lubricating Liquid
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Gas operated, liquid lubricated
®
Synturion 6 (Krytox optional)
Tungsten carbide
11.2 mm
2
98.1 mm
Negative free deformation
PC-7200-200
Operation
Lubricating Liquid
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Gas operated, liquid lubricated
®
Synturion 6 (Krytox optional)
Tungsten carbide
7.9 mm
2
49.0 mm
Negative free deformation
PC-7200-500
Operation
Lubricating Liquid
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Gas operated, liquid lubricated
®
Di-2-ethylhexyl Sebacate (Krytox optional)
Tungsten carbide
5.0 mm
2
19.6 mm
Negative free deformation
PC-7200-1
Operation
Lubricating Liquid
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Gas operated, liquid lubricated
®
Di-2-ethylhexyl Sebacate (Krytox optional)
Tungsten carbide
3.5 mm
2
9.8 mm
Negative free deformation
PC-7200-2
Operation
Lubricating Liquid
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 6
Gas operated, liquid lubricated
®
Di-2-ethylhexyl Sebacate (Krytox optional)
Tungsten carbide
2.5 mm
2
4.9 mm
Negative free deformation
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2.2.3
PC-7300
Oil operated, oil lubricated piston-cylinder module characteristics. Used in
PG7302 and PG7202 platforms (1 MPa/kg and higher only in PG7202).
PC-7300 modules PC-7300-1, -2 and -5 may also be used in a PG7202
platform.
PC-7300-100
Operation
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Oil operated, oil lubricated
Tungsten carbide
11.2 mm
2
98.1 mm
Simple free deformation
PC-7300-200
Operation
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Oil operated, oil lubricated
Tungsten carbide
7.9 mm
2
49.0 mm
Simple free deformation
PC-7300-500
Operation
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Oil operated, oil lubricated
Tungsten carbide
5.0 mm
2
19.6 mm
Simple free deformation
Operation
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Oil operated, oil lubricated
Tungsten carbide
3.5 mm
2
9.8 mm
Simple free deformation
Operation
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Oil operated, oil lubricated
Tungsten carbide
2.5 mm
2
4.9 mm
Simple free deformation
Operation
Piston and Cylinder Material
Nominal Diameter
Nominal Area
Mounting System
Oil operated, oil lubricated
Tungsten carbide
1.6 mm
2
2.0 mm
Simple free deformation
PC-7300-1
PC-7300-2
PC-7300-5
Page 7
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.2.3
MASS SETS
All masses are delivered in molded, reusable, transit cases with custom inserts.
Masses > 50g
Material
Finish
Adjustment Tolerance
Uncertainty of Measured Values
Masses < 50g
304L non-magnetic stainless steel
Electropolished
± 20 ppm of nominal value (manual mass sets, AMH
automated mass handler mass sets do not have fixed
adjustment tolerances)
± 5 ppm or 1 mg, whichever is greater
± 1 mg
Masses designated “tare” are delivered without reported measured values and are intended
only for use on the “tare” PG7000 in high line differential pressure measurement mode.
1.2.4
PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS
1.2.4.1
PC-7100/7600
For uncertainty in piston-cylinder effective area and typical measurement
uncertainty in pressure defined by the piston gauge, see the piston-cylinder
calibration report and current revision of DHI Technical Note 7920TN01.
PC-7100/7600-10
PC-7100/7600-10-L
1
0.02 Pa + 0.5 ppm
2
± 2 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (35 kg)
0.2 mm/min
PC-7100/7600-20
1
0.04 Pa + 0.5 ppm
2
± 2 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (35 kg)
0.3 mm/min
PC-7100/7600-50
1
0.1 Pa + 0.5 ppm
2
± 2 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (35 kg)
0.5 mm/min
PC-7100/7600-100
1
0.2 Pa + 0.5 ppm
2
± 3 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (35 kg)
0.7 mm/min
PC-7100/7600-200
1
0.4 Pa + 0.5 ppm
2
± 3 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (35 kg)
1.0 mm/min
1
Sensitivity: The smallest variation in input detectable in output.
2
Reproducibility: Combined long term stability of piston-cylinder effective area and masses.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 8
1. INTRODUCTION
Piston-cylinder modules designated “tare” are delivered without reported
values and are intended only for use on the “tare” PG7000 in high line differential
pressure measurement mode.
1.2.4.2
PC-7200
For uncertainty in piston-cylinder effective area and typical measurement
uncertainty in pressure defined by the piston gauge, see the piston-cylinder
calibration report and current revision of DHI Technical Note 7920TN01.
PC-7200-100
1
2 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.10 mm/min
PC-7200-200
1
4 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.15 mm/min
PC-7200-500
1
10 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.20 mm/min
PC-7200-1
1
20 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.25 mm/min
PC-7200-2
1
40 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.50 mm/min
1
Sensitivity: The smallest variation in input detectable in output.
2
Reproducibility: Combined long term stability of piston-cylinder effective area and masses.
Page 9
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.2.4.3
PC-7300
For uncertainty in piston-cylinder effective area and typical measurement
uncertainty in pressure defined by the piston gauge, see the piston-cylinder
calibration report and current revision of DHI Technical Note 7920TN01.
PC-7300-100
1
2 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.02 mm/min
PC-7300-200
1
4 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.04 mm/min
PC-7300-500
1
10 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.10 mm/min
PC-7300-1
1
20 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.20 mm/min
PC-7300-2
1
40 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
0.40 mm/min
PC-7300-5
1
100 Pa + 1 ppm
2
± 5 ppm
Sensitivity
Reproducibility
Typical Drop Rate (50 kg)
1.00 mm/min
1
Sensitivity: The smallest variation in input detectable in output.
2
Reproducibility: Combined long term stability of piston-cylinder effective area and masses.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 10
1. INTRODUCTION
1.3
TERMINAL AND PLATFORM FRONT AND REAR PANELS
1.3.1
TERMINAL FRONT AND REAR PANELS
1.3.1.1
PG TERMINAL FRONT PANEL
The front panel assembly provides a 2 x 20 vacuum fluorescent display and a
4 x 4 membrane keypad for local user interface. The terminal front panel assembly
is the same for all PG7000 models.
1. Fluorescent display
2. Keypad
Figure 1. PG Terminal Front Panel
Page 11
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.3.1.2
PG TERMINAL REAR PANEL
The rear panel assembly provides the communications connection to the
PG7000 Platform and the power connection module. The terminal rear panel
assembly is the same for all PG7000 models.
1. Power switch
2. Fuse
3. Power receptacle
4. Connector for cable to PG7000 (25-pin)
5. Cooling fan
Figure 2. PG Terminal Rear Panel
1.3.2
PLATFORM REAR PANELS
The PG7000 Platform rear panels provide the connection to the PG Terminal, remote
communication connections and pressure connection ports. The rear panels of all PG7000
models are identical except for the pressure connections (see Figure 3, # 7).
1. COM2 (RS232) - External
Barometer, External Vacuum
Gauge (PG7601 only) and Pass
Through Communications
2. COM3 (RS232) - Automated
Pressure Generation/Control
Component
3. COM1 (RS232) - Remote Host
Communications
4. Temperature - Humidity Probe
5. IEEE-488 - Remote Host
Communications
6. AMH Connection
7. Pressure Ports:
PG7102 - TEST port: DH200
PG7202 - TEST and DRAIN
ports: DH500
PG7302 - TEST port: DH500
PG7601 - TEST and VACUUM vent
ports: DH200
Vacuum pull down port on front
left side: KF25
8. PG7000 Terminal Port
Figure 3. PG Platform Rear Panel
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 12
2. INSTALLATION
2.
INSTALLATION
2.1
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
2.1.1
REMOVING FROM PACKAGING
A typical PG7000 system includes the PG7000 Platform (see Section 2.1.1.1), a mass set, (see
Section 2.1.1.2), one or more piston-cylinder modules (see Section 2.1.1.3) and other
accessories such as an AMH automated mass handler and/or pressure generation and control
components (see the accessory Operation and Maintenance Manual or Instruction Sheet).
2.1.1.1
PLATFORM
The mass loading bell is a metrological element that is part of the mass set.
Like all of the masses, it is preferable not to handle it with bare hands. Protective
gloves are provided in the accessory kit of each PG7000 Platform.
The PG7000 Platform is shipped in a reusable, molded shipping and storage case.
Open the PG7000 shipping and storage case (it is the large, 66 cm x 53 cm
x 47 cm case).
Remove the PG Terminal and accessories from upper packing insert.
Inspect and inventory the accessories (see Section 2.1.2).
Remove the upper packing insert.
Carefully lift the PG7000 Platform from its position in the lower packing
insert. Note the orientation so that the same orientation will be used when
PG7000 is repacked.
Reinstall the upper packing insert into the shipping and storage case and
store in a safe place.
2.1.1.2
MASS SET
The stability over time of PG7000 pressure measurements is a function of the
stability of the masses loaded on the piston. Precautions should be taken in
handling the masses to minimize influences that may change their mass. This
includes always wearing protective gloves when handling the masses to avoid
contaminating them with body oils and perspiration. Protective gloves are provided
in the accessory kits of PG7000 Platforms.
The mass set accessories are shipped in a separate corrugated container.
Open the corrugated container and inspect and inventory the accessories.
The PG7000 masses are shipped in reusable, molded shipping and
storage cases. The PG7000 masses should be removed from their shipping
cases and inventoried when actually setting up the PG7000 system.
Page 13
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.1.1.3
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE(S)
The piston-cylinder modules are shipped in Acetal bullet cases that are packed in
corrugated containers with custom foam inserts.
Open the corrugated containers and remove the piston-cylinder modules
and accessories.
The bullet cases screw open by turning the lid counterclockwise.
When reinstalling an oil (PC-7300) or liquid lubricated (PC-7200) piston-cylinder
module in its bullet case, be sure to empty out any liquid that may have collected in
the hole in the bottom of the case. Excess liquid will not compress, making it
difficult to fully close the case and could result in damaging it.
2.1.1.4
AUTOMATED MASS HANDLER
See the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual.
2.1.2
INSPECTING CONTENTS
Check that all items are present and have NO visible signs of damage. A parts list of items
supplied is provided in Section 2.1.2.1 for PG7000, Section 2.1.2.2 for mass sets, and
Section 2.1.2.3 for piston-cylinder modules.
2.1.2.1
PLATFORM
Each PG7000 Platform is delivered complete with accessories as listed by part
number in Tables 1 through 4.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 14
2. INSTALLATION
Table 1. PG7102 Parts List
DESCRIPTION
Platform
PG7102
PG7102
P/N 3069572
P/N 3072317
NON-CE
CE
3117734
3117752
Manual Mass Bell
3071537
Terminal
3069735
PG Terminal to Platform Cable
Non-CE (DB25M - DB25F,
≈ 1.8 meters)
3068724
CE (DB25M - DB25F,
≈ 1.5 meters)
3072235
Power Cable
3133781 (Black)
3153005 (Gray)
TH Probe Assembly
3446036
Accessory Kit
3117741
Cable, Null Modem
3077370
NIP, SS, DH200, 2.75 in.
3068377
ADPT, SS, DH200 F x 1/8 in. NPT F
3068547
O-ring, Buna 2-242 (2 ea.)
3135041
Storage Cover, 7600 Type
3135594
Allen Wrench, 2.5 mm
3136044
Allen Wrench, 3 mm
3135703
Allen Wrench, 5 mm
3136098
Spanner Wrench (Metrological)
3068940
Krytox® GPL205/6 0.5 oz.
2493420
Gift Kit with Gloves
3123777
ADPT, DH200 M x 1/8 in. swage
3069062
Documentation
Calibration Report (PG Platform)
Calibration Report (Mass Bell)
Technical Data
PG7000 Operation &
Maintenance Manual
Documentation CD
3152121
3152121
3152139
3152117
3139043
Page 15
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2. PG7202 Parts List
DESCRIPTION
Platform
PG7202
PG7202
#3070404
#3072395
NON-CE
CE
3119996
3120027
Manual Mass Bell
3071537
Terminal
3069735
PG Terminal to Platform Cable
Non-CE (DB25M - DB25F,
≈ 1.8 meters)
3068724
CE (DB25M - DB25F,
≈ 1.5 meters)
3072235
Power Cable
3133781 (Black)
3153005 (Gray)
TH Probe Assembly
3446036
Accessory Kit
3120011
Cable, Null Modem
3077370
DH500 M x 1/8 in. NPT F
3142684
O-ring, Buna 2-242 (2 ea.)
3135041
Storage Cover, 7600 Type
3135594
Allen Wrench, 2.5 mm
3136044
Allen Wrench, 3 mm
3135703
Allen Wrench, 5 mm
3136098
Wrench, 5/8 in.
3139417
Collar, SS, DH500
3068607
Krytox® GPL205/6 0.5 oz.
2493420
Gift Kit with Gloves
3123777
Documentation
Calibration Report (PG)
Calibration Report (Mass Bell)
Technical Data
PG7000 Operation &
Maintenance Manual
Documentation CD
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
3152121
3152121
3152139
3152117
3139043
Page 16
2. INSTALLATION
Table 3. PG7302 Parts List
DESCRIPTION
Platform
PG7302
PG7302
P/N 3069747
P/N 3072339
NON-CE
CE
3118073
3118086
Manual Mass Bell
3071537
Terminal
3069735
PG Terminal to Platform Cable
Non-CE (DB25M - DB25F,
≈ 1.8 meters)
3068724
CE (DB25M - DB25F,
≈ 1.5 meters)
3072235
Power Cable
3133781 (Black)
3153005 (Gray)
TH Probe Assembly
3446036
Accessory Kit
3120011
Cable, Null Modem
3077370
DH500 M x 1/8 in. NPT F
3142684
O-ring, Buna 2-242 (2 ea.)
3135041
Storage Cover, 7600 Type
3135594
Allen Wrench, 2.5 mm
3136044
Allen Wrench, 3 mm
3135703
Allen Wrench, 5 mm
3136098
Wrench, 5/8 in.
3139417
Collar, SS, DH500
3068607
Krytox® GPL205/6 0.5 oz.
2493420
Gift Kit with Gloves
3123777
Documentation
Calibration Report (PG)
Calibration Report (Mass Bell)
Technical Data
PG7000 Operation &
Maintenance Manual
Documentation CD
3152121
3152121
3152139
3152117
3139043
Page 17
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 4. PG7601 Parts List
DESCRIPTION
Platform
PG7601
PG7601
P/N 3069028
P/N 3072258
NON-CE
CE
3117525
3117540
Manual Mass Bell
3071603
Bell Jar and Seal
3068933 and 3068634
Terminal
3069735
PG Terminal to Platform Cable
Non-CE (DB25M - DB25F,
≈ 1.8 meters)
3068724
CE (DB25M - DB25F,
≈ 1.5 meters)
3072235
Power Cable
3133781 (Black)
3153005 (Gray)
TH Probe Assembly
3446036
Accessory Kit
3117533
Cable, Null Modem
3077370
NIP, SS, DH200, 2.75 in.
3068377
ADPT, SS, DH200 F x 1/8 in. NPT F
3068547
O-ring, Buna 2-242 (2 ea.)
3135041
Storage Cover, 7600 Type
3135594
Allen Wrench, 2.5 mm
3136044
Allen Wrench, 3 mm
3135703
Allen Wrench, 5 mm
3136098
Spanner Wrench (Metrological)
3068940
Krytox® GPL205/6 .5 oz.
2493420
Gift Kit with Gloves
3123777
ADPT, DH200 M x 1/8 in. swage
3069062
Valve, Vacuum Relief
3124573
Documentation
Calibration Report (PG)
Calibration Report (Mass Bell)
Technical Data
PG7000 Operation &
Maintenance Manual
Documentation CD
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
3152121
3152121
3152139
3152117
3139043
Page 18
2. INSTALLATION
2.1.2.2
MASS SET
PG7000 mass sets are composed of different combinations of individual masses
and accessories depending on the specific mass set ordered (see Tables 5 - 9).
Table 5. Manual Mass Set Parts List (excluding 80 and 100 kg)
DESCRIPTION
PART NO.
Mass Set
Refer to Table 9
Reusable Molded Transit Case with Foam Inserts
3068969
3068991
35 kg set
1 ea.
1 ea.
40 kg set
1 ea.
1 ea.
45 kg set
1 ea.
1 ea.
55 kg set
1 ea.
2 ea.
Mass Set Tray and Spindle
3147461 and 3148764
Dust Covers
3138017 and 3138130
Calibration Report
3152121
Table 6. Manual Mass Set Parts List (80 and 100 kg)
DESCRIPTION
PART NO.
Mass Set
Refer to Table 9
Reusable Molded Transit Case with Foam Inserts
3068969
3068984
80 kg set
1 ea.
2 ea.
100 kg set
1 ea.
3 ea.
Mass Set Tray and Spindle
3147461 and 3148764
Dust Covers
3138017 and 3138127
Calibration Report
3152121
Table 7. AMH-38 Mass Set Parts List
DESCRIPTION
PART NO.
Mass Set
Refer to Table 9
Reusable Molded Transit Case with Foam Inserts
3123990
3069004
13 kg set (MS-AMH-13)
1 ea.
1 ea.
25 kg set (MS-AMH-25)
1 ea.
1 ea.
39 kg set (MS-AMH-38)
1 ea.
1 ea.
Calibration Report
3152121
Table 8. AMH-100 Mass Set Parts List
DESCRIPTION
Mass Set
PART NO.
Refer to Table 9
Reusable Molded Transit Case with Foam Inserts
3123990
3068984
40 kg set (MS-AMH-40)
1 ea.
1 ea.
60 kg set (MS-AMH-60)
1 ea.
2 ea.
80 kg set (MS-AMH-80)
1 ea.
2 ea.
100 kg set (MS-AMH-100)
1 ea.
3 ea.
Calibration Report
3152121
Page 19
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 9. Mass Set Compositions
DESIGNATION
PART #
NOMINAL
TOTAL
MASS (kg)
MASS SET COMPOSITION
10
kg
5
kg
2
kg
1
kg
0.5
kg
0.2
kg
0.1
kg
MAKE-UP
MASS
(kg)
MS-7001-35
3069850
35
-
5
2
1
1
2
1
1 (4.5)
-
MS-7002-35
3069861
35
-
5
2
1
1
2
1
1 (4)
-
MS-7002-40
3070021
40
-
6
2
1
1
2
1
1 (4)
-
MS-7002-45
3069980
45
-
7
2
1
1
2
1
1 (4)
-
MS-7002-55
3069877
55
-
9
2
1
1
2
1
1 (4)
-
MS-7002-80
3070000
80
6
1
2
1
1
2
1
1 (9)
-
MS-7002-100
3070017
100
8
1
2
1
1
2
1
1 (9)
-
DESIGNATION
PART #
NOMINAL
TOTAL
MASS (kg)
MASS SET COMPOSITION
10
kg
6.4
kg
6.2
kg
3.2
kg
1.6
kg
0.8
kg
0.4
kg
0.2
kg
0.1
kg
BELL, SHAFT,
BINARY MASS
CARRIER
(3 PARTS)
MS-AMH-13
3071491
13
-
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MS-AMH-25
3071484
25
-
-
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MS-AMH-38
3071433
38
-
-
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MS-AMH-40
3071528
40
3
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MS-AMH-60
3071519
60
5
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MS-AMH-80
3071504
80
7
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MS-AMH-100
3071440
100
9
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
All mass sets also include a trim mass set of 50 g to 0.01 g (total 100 g)
Table 10. Mass Set Compatibility
DESIGNATOR
NOMINAL
TOTAL MASS (kg)
MS-7001-35
35
MS-7002-35
35
•
•
•
MS-7002-40
40
•
•
•
MS-7002-45
45
•
•
•
MS-7002-55
55
•
•
•
MS-7002-80
80
•1
•1
•
MS-7002-100
100
•1
•1
•
MS-AMH-13
13
•
MS-AMH-25
25
•
MS-AMH-38
38
MS-AMH-40
40
•
•
•
MS-AMH-60
60
•1
•1
•
MS-AMH-80
80
•1
•1
•
MS-AMH-100
100
•1
•1
•
1
PG7102
PG7202
PG7302
PG7601
•
•
These mass sets, on certain piston-cylinder sizes, can cause the maximum working pressure of the PG Platform to be
exceeded. Do not exceed the following maximum working pressures:
PG7201: 11 MPa (1 600 psi)
PG7202: When using PC-7200 piston-cylinder modules: 110 MPa (16 000 psi)
When using PC-7300 piston-cylinder modules: 200 MPa (30 000 psi)
PG7302:500 MPa (72 500 psi)
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 20
2. INSTALLATION
The mass loading bell and piston make up part of the total mass load. The
mass loading bell for loading manual mass sets is delivered with the PG7000
platform. The mass loading bell for AMH mass sets is delivered with the mass set.
Piston-cylinder modules are purchased and delivered separately.
2.1.2.3
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE(S)
Table 11. PC-7100/7600 Piston-Cylinder Modules Parts List
10 kPa
10 kPa
20 kPa
50 kPa
100 kPa
200 kPa
PC-7100/
7600-10-L
PC-7100/
7600-10 TC
PC-7100/
7600-20
PC-7100/
7600-50
PC-7100/
7600-100
PC-7100/
7600-200
3171975
3070095
3071581
3070109
3071615
3070111
Piston-Cylinder
Module
3125106
3122937
3122116
3124088
3122234
3124194
Hermetic Acetal
Bullet Case
3070203
3070203
3070203
3070203
3070203
3070203
Accessory Kit
3125242
3122928
3122229
3124345
3124345
3124345
3134867
3134867
3134867
3134880
3134880
3134880
3136458
3136458
3136458
3136458
3136458
3136458
3071793
3071841
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3152121
3152121
3152121
3152121
3152121
3152121
Piston-Cylinder Kit
O-rings
Insertion Tool
Calibration Report
Table 12. PC-7200 Piston-Cylinder Modules Parts List
100 kPa
200 kPa
500 kPa
1 MPa
2 MPa
PC-7200-100
PC-7200-200
PC-7200-500
PC-7200-1
PC-7200-2
3070419
3070428
3070437
3070443
3070455
Piston-Cylinder Module
3120245
3120250
3120292
3120303
3120326
Hermetic Acetal
Bullet Case
3071852
3071852
3071852
3071852
3071852
Piston-Cylinder Kit
Accessory Kit
O-rings
Anti-Extrusion Ring
Syringe
Syringe tips
Synturion 6 fluid
Sebacate fluid
Calibration Report
3120277
3120277
3120315
3120315
3120315
(2) 3134158
(2) 3134158
(2) 3134158
(2) 3134158
(2) 3134158
2721018
2721018
2721018
2721018
2721018
2644003
2644003
2644003
2644003
2644003
N/A
N/A
3148417
3148417
3148417
3139439
3139439
3139439
3139439
3139439
(3) 3139421
(3) 3139421
(3) 3139421
(3) 3139421
(3) 3139421
3120289
3120289
-
-
-
-
-
3120590
3120590
3120590
3152121
3152121
3152121
3152121
3152121
Page 21
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 13. PC-7300 Piston-Cylinder Modules Parts List
Piston-Cylinder Kit
200 kPa
500 kPa
1 MPa
2 MPa
5 MPa
PC-7300-200
PC-7300-500
PC-7300-1
PC-7300-2
PC-7300-5
3070039
3070042
3070056
3070063
3070074
3070088
Piston-Cylinder
Module
3118918
3118976
3119032
3119116
3119178
3119229
Hermetic Acetal
Bullet Case
3071865
3071865
3071865
3071865
3071865
3071865
Accessory Kit
3119102
3119102
3119102
3119366
3119366
3119366
2527053
2527053
2527053
1785497
1785497
1785497
3134022
3134022
3134022
(5) 927863
(5) 927863
(5) 927863
3152121
3152121
3152121
3152121
3152121
3152121
O-rings
Calibration
Reports
2.2
100 kPa
PC-7300-100
SITE REQUIREMENTS
The exact PG7000 system installation is affected by the elements other than the PG7000 Platform that
make up the PG7000 system.
When selecting and preparing a site to set up the PG7000 system, the following should be considered:
•
Ambient conditions: To achieve optimum metrological performance, ambient conditions should be
controlled and maintained within the following:
♦
Temperature: 19 to 23 °C, minimize rate of change of temperature.
♦
Relative Humidity: 10 to 60 %RH (non-condensing).
♦
Ambient Pressure: Minimize external influences that will cause barometric instability.
♦
Air Currents: Do not install the PG7000 Platform under a source of vertical air currents such as an
overhead air conditioning duct. These can blow on the mass load and add unquantified forces.
♦
Vibration: Minimize local vibration. Excessive vibration will reduce the stability of the pressures
defined by PG7000 (vibration affects the floating piston). Excessive high frequency vibration, for
example from a vacuum pump on the same table as the PG7000, may affect piston sensitivity.
•
Bench stability: Up to 100 kg may be loaded and unloaded onto the PG7000 Platform. The bench
on which the PG7000 sits should not deflect significantly under the mass load changes. This can be
verified by setting the PG7000 Platform on the bench, leveling it, loading and unloading the complete
mass set while observing whether the level setting changes.
•
Location of other components: Plan the space required and a convenient layout for the complete
PG7000 system including the PG Terminal, mass set, pressure generation/control component(s), test
instrument connection and computer (if present). If using a DHI PPC, MPC, GPC or OPG to
generate/control pressure, see its Operation and Maintenance Manual for information on installing it.
If a DHI interconnections kit is being used to interconnect the components, see its instruction sheet.
•
Electrical and pressure supplies: Plan the supply of electrical power to the PG Terminal and to the
pressure generation/control component(s), if needed. If using a DHI PPC, MPC, GPC or OPG to
generate/control pressure, see its Operation and Maintenance Manual for information on the
pressures source(s) it needs and how to connect them. Gas supplied to a PC-7100/7600
piston-cylinder module must be clean and dry (instrument grade minimum, high purity preferred) to
avoid contaminating the piston-cylinder gap.
•
Reference vacuum supply (PG7601 only): Plan for the vacuum connection to the platform or the
optional AMH automated mass handler and the location of the reference vacuum pump.
•
Bell jar placement (PG7601 only): Plan a location for the bell jar when it is removed from the
platform to load and unload masses. A small shelf is often used for this purpose.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 22
2. INSTALLATION
•
AMH automated mass handler (optional) placement: If an AMH is being used, plan electrical and
pneumatic connections to it as well as a location to place it when it is removed from the platform (see
the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual).
2.3
SETUP
2.3.1
PREPARING FOR OPERATION
Before setting up the PG7000 system, see Section 2.2 for information on site
requirements.
To prepare PG7000 for check out and operation:
Set up the PG7000 Platform (see Section 2.3.1.1).
If an optional AMH-100 mass set is being used, set it up with its mass set (see the AMH38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual).
Make the system pressure interconnections (see Section 2.3.1.2).
If a manual mass set is being used, set up the manual mass set (see Section 2.3.1.3).
2.3.1.1
SETTING UP THE PLATFORM
To set up the PG7000 Platform proceed as follows:
Place the PG7000 Platform on the site table in the desired orientation.
Though the rear panel is usually in the back, any orientation can be used.
Place the PG7000 Terminal at the desired location.
Connect the PG7000 Terminal to the PG7000 Platform using the 25-pin
cable supplied.
Connect the PG7000 Temperature - Humidity Probe per Figure 3.
Connect electrical power (85 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz) to the PG7000 Terminal
using the power cable supplied. Any grounded power cable with a standard
IEC320-313 connection may be used.
(PG7601 Only) - Install the vacuum vent valve kit on the vacuum vent port
on the rear of the PG7000 Platform. Refer to the instruction sheet provided
with the vent valve assembly.
Connect the reference vacuum source and shutoff valve to the reference
vacuum port. Take measures to assure that vacuum oil cannot return to the
PG7601. If an optional AMH-38 automated mass handler is being used, the
reference vacuum may be connected to the larger KF40 vacuum connection
on the AMH-38 vacuum chamber.
If an external barometer and/or vacuum gauge is/are being used, establish
communications between the barometer/vacuum gauge and the PG7000
Platform by connecting the external device RS232 port to the PG7000
Platform Com2 port and setting up PG7000 to read and use an external
barometer and/or vacuum gauge (see Section 3.11.5.4, 3.11.5.5). Set the
external barometer head height (see Section 3.11.3.3).
If an automated pressure generation/control component is being used,
establish
communications
between
the
automated
pressure
generation/control component and the PG7000 Platform by connecting the
Page 23
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
generation/control component RS232 port to the PG7000 Platform COM3 port
and setting up PG7000 to use an automated pressure generation/control
component (see Section 3.9.9).
If an AMH automated mass handling system is being used, set up the AMH
mass set and the AMH mass handler following the instructions in the AMH38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Level the platform using the PG7000 Platform’s two leveling feet and the
level mounted on the front of the platform. (Or on the optional AMH mass
handling system.)
2.3.1.2
SYSTEM PRESSURE INTERCONNECTIONS
Interconnect the PG7000 Platform, pressure generation/control components and
a test connection.
The pressure connection on the PG7000 TEST port is:
•
PG7102/PG7601: DH200 (DH200 is equivalent to AE SF250C,HIP LF4,
etc.). Adapters to convert the DH200 connection to 1/8 in. NPT female and
1/8 in. swage are provided with PG7102 and PG7601 Platform accessories.
•
PG7202: DH500 (DH500 is equivalent to AE F250C, HIP HF4, etc.).
Connect the gas test medium pressure control/generation component to the
TEST port. If the PG7202 is to be operated in oil, connect the oil pressure
control/generation component to the DRAIN port (the gas or oil component is
disconnected when not in use, see Section 2.3.3).
•
PG7302: DH500 (DH500 is equivalent to AE F250C, HIP HF4, etc.).
If using a standard interconnections kit such as PK-7600-PPC/MPC P/N
3069508, PK-7600-PPC/MPC-DIF P/N 3070127 or PK-7100-MPCD-DIF P/N
3070226, see the instruction sheet provided with the kit for installation
instructions. If an OPG1 or GPC1 generator/controller is being used, pressure
interconnecting hardware is included with it. See its Operation and Maintenance
Manual for connection instructions.
2.3.1.3
SETTING UP A MASS SET
If installing an MS-AMH-xxx mass set for use with an AMH automated mass
handling system, see the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual.
To install a PG7000 manual mass set, place the mass loading tray (provided with
the mass set accessories) at the desired location then install the individual
masses on the mass loading tray. See the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and
Maintenance Manual for instructions on installation of an AMH mass set for
automated mass handling.
It is VERY IMPORTANT that the individual masses be installed on the mass
loading tray in proper sequence. This will ensure that PG7000 mass loading
instructions are executed properly (carefully follow the instructions provided in
Section 2.3.1.3, Installing Masses on the Mass Loading Tray).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 24
2. INSTALLATION
Installing Masses on the Mass Loading Tray (Manual Mass Set)
PG7000 masses are shipped in reusable, molded shipping and storage cases.
One of the cases contains a 4.0, 4.5 or 5 kg mass and the masses of 2 kg and
under, the other case(s) contain(s) the main masses of 10 or 5 kg each. Each mass
is packed in a sealed plastic bag and then placed in a protective shipping insert.
The stability over time of PG7000 pressure measurements is a function of the
stability of the masses loaded on the piston. Precautions should be taken in
handling the masses to minimize influences that may change their mass. This
includes always wearing protective gloves when handling the masses to avoid
contaminating them with body oils and perspiration. Protective gloves are provided
in the accessory kits of PG7000 Platforms.
To install the masses on the mass loading tray, proceed as follows:
Open the shipping cases.
Install the main masses: The main masses (a series of 10 kg masses if the
mass set is > 55 kg, a series of 5 kg masses if the mass set is < 60 kg)
are installed horizontally aligned on the mass loading spindle.
The main masses are sequentially numbered starting with he number 1.
The main mass with the highest sequential number is installed first at the
bottom of the stack (i.e., the first mass loaded on the tray). The rest of the
main masses should be stacked upwards in descending order ending with
main mass sequential number 1. Be careful NOT to confuse the makeup
mass (refer to next item) with main mass 1.
Install the make up mass: The make up mass is a single mass
sequentially numbered 1. It has the same diameter as the main masses. It
is a 9 kg mass if the main masses are 10 kg. It is 4 or 4.5 kg if the main
masses are 5 kg.
The make up mass is placed on top of the main mass stack. It is always the
top of the stack.
Install the fractionary masses: The fractionary masses are all the masses
of lower value than the main masses and makeup mass. These are masses
of 5 kg and under for mass sets with 10 kg main masses. They are masses
of 2 kg and under for mass sets with 5 kg main masses. Fractionary masses
of 1 to 5 kg are discs with a central hole. Fractionary masses of 100 to 500 g
are solid, small diameter pucks. Fractionary masses of 50 g and under are
grams masses packed and stored in their own separate storage case.
Fractionary mass discs and pucks are installed vertically in the corresponding slots
in the mass loading tray. Use a consistent setup for the sequence number
when there are two masses (e.g., always load sequential number 1 in the front).
2.3.2
INSTALLING A PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE INTO THE
PLATFORM
To operate the PG7000 Platform, a piston-cylinder module must be installed in its mounting
post. To install a piston-cylinder module in the PG7000 Platform, proceed as follows:
Remove the PG7000 Platform mounting post plug. Unscrew the ORANGE plastic
mounting post plug that is installed in the PG7000 Platform mounting post.
Rotate counterclockwise to remove.
Page 25
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Remove the piston-cylinder module from its bullet case. Select a piston-cylinder
module. Open the piston-cylinder module bullet case by rotating its lid counterclockwise.
Remove the piston-cylinder module from the bullet case base by unthreading it from the
case. Hold the piston-cylinder module body by the knurled area and rotate it
counterclockwise.
PC-7200 gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder modules are delivered with their
lubricating liquid reservoir drained. The reservoir must be filled prior to using the piston-cylinder module.
If installing a PC-7200 gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder module, see Section 5.3.3
for instructions on how to fill the module’s liquid lubrication reservoir prior to installation, then
continue the procedure from this point.
When reinstalling an oil or liquid lubricated gas piston-cylinder module in its bullet case, be
sure to empty out any liquid that may have collected in the hole in the bottom of the case. The
liquid will not compress, making it difficult to fully close the case and could result in damaging it.
Place the piston-cylinder module in the PG7000 Platform mounting post. Place
the piston-cylinder module (thread down) into the PG7000 Platform mounting post
(see Figure 4 below).
If installing the piston-cylinder module into a PG7302 or a PG7202 to be operated with oil,
first use the oil generation control component to fill the counter bore in the mounting post with
oil until it just starts to overflow.
Purge the air from under the piston-cylinder module (PC-7300 modules only in
PG7302 or PG7202). Rotate the piston-cylinder module clockwise until all threads are
engaged and there is no gap between the piston-cylinder module and the mounting post.
Back the piston-cylinder module off slightly by rotating it counterclockwise 3/4 turn.
Slowly supply additional oil to the mounting post from the pressure generation/control
component. Watch the oil run off tube on the bottom right of the platform. As soon as oil
appears or can be seen flowing, stop the oil supply.
Screw
the
piston-cylinder
module into the PG7000
Platform
mounting
post.
Rotate
the
piston-cylinder
module clockwise until all
threads are engaged and there is
NO gap between the pistoncylinder module and the PG7000
mounting post. Slight resistance
will be encountered in the
second half of travel as the
piston-cylinder module O-rings
seat in the mounting post.
Figure 4. Piston-Cylinder Module Installation
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 26
2. INSTALLATION
Low torque manual rotation is all that should be required to fully seat the piston-cylinder
module into the PG7000 mounting post. Never force the piston-cylinder module into the
mounting post.
Always maintain PG7202 and PG7302 piston- cylinder modules vertical with the piston cap
up. Do not invert the assembly, as this might allow liquid to run up into the piston head and into
the adjustment mass and cap. Liquid contamination of the piston head and cap changes the mass of
the piston assembly and could lead to out of tolerance pressure definitions at low mass loads. If
liquid contaminates the adjustment mass and cap, disassemble the module and clean it (see
Sections 5.3.1, 5.3.4, 5.3.2.2).
2.3.3
SWITCHING A PG7202 BETWEEN GAS OPERATION AND
OIL OPERATION
PG7202 can be operated with gas as the pressurized medium using PC-7200 gas operated,
liquid lubricated modules or with oil as the pressurized medium using oil operated PC-7300
modules.
PC-7200 gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder modules can be operated in gas oil
filled with oil and operated in oil. Oil operation of PC-7202 modules is not recommended for
routine operation. It can be useful in very specific crossfloating circumstances, particularly when
establishing a calibration link between independent gas operated and oil operated piston gauges.
When switching PC-7200 module between oil and gas and oil operation, see Section 5.3.3 for
information on emptying excess oil from the module.
Switching a PG7202 from gas to oil operation
Only the high pressure PC-7300 oil modules may be used in the PG7202 platform
(PC-7300-1, -2, -5)
Disconnect the gas generation/control system from the TEST port. Disconnect the
tube at the DH500 TEST port connection on the back of the PG7202. Loosely install a
DH500 plug in the TEST port.
Connect the oil generation/control system to the DRAIN port. Connect a tube from
the oil generation/control system to the PG7202 DRAIN port and tighten it (torque DH500
glands to 15 Nm (12 ft.lb)).
Fill the PG7202 mounting post with oil. Hand tighten the DH500 plug in the TEST
port. Use the oil generation/control component to fill the PG7202 mounting post with oil.
Fill to the edge of the second step in the mounting post. Place a paper towel under the
TEST port plug and loosen the DH500 plug allowing oil to run out until it is at the level of
the first step in the mounting post and there is no air in the run off oil. If there is still air in
the run off, repeat the operation. After filling the mounting post, tighten the DH500 plug
(torque DH500 glands to 15 Nm (12 ft.lb)).
Install a PC-7300 oil operated piston-cylinder module in the PG7202 platform.
Install the module and purge the air from underneath it (see Section2.3.2).
Operate with oil as the test medium. The PG7202 can now be operated with oil as the
test medium.
Page 27
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The maximum working pressure of the PG7202 platform when used in oil with a
PC-7300 module is 200 MPa (30 000 psi).
The maximum pressure when using a
PC-7200 module is 110 MPa (16 000 psi). Do not exceed this limit.
Switching a PG7202 from oil to gas operation
Remove the piston-cylinder module. Disinstall the PC-7300 oil operated piston-cylinder
module for the PG7202 platform.
Disconnect the oil generation/control system from the DRAIN port. Place a paper
towel under the DRAIN port and disconnect the tube to the oil generation/control system.
Let all the oil run out of the PG7202 platform.
Remove the DH500 plug from the TEST port. Place a paper towel under the TEST
port and remove the DH500 plug. Let all the oil run out of the PG7202 platform..
Install a PC-7200 gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder module in the
PG7202 platform. Install the piston-cylinder module (see Section 2.3.2).
Connect the gas generation/control system to the TEST port. Connect a tube from
the oil generation/control system to the PG7202 TEST port and tighten it (torque DH500
glands to 15 Nm (12 ft.lb)).
Prepurge the oil from the PG7202 mounting post. Hold a paper towel lightly over the
DRAIN port opening. Leaving the drain port open, use the gas generation/control
component to flow enough gas through the mounting post to just lift the piston.
Purge the PG7202 mounting post. Purge the PG7202 mouting post using the standard
purging procedure (see Section 5.2.4) and finish by tightening the plug in the DRAIN port.
Operate with gas as the test medium. The PG7202 can now be operated with gas as
the test medium.
The maximum working pressure of the PG7202 platform when used with a PC-7200 module
is 110 MPa (16 000 psi). Do not exceed this limit.
2.4
POWER UP AND VERIFICATION
2.4.1
POWER UP
Turn the PG7000 power ON by pressing the power ON/OFF switch on the rear panel of the
PG Terminal. Observe the PG terminal display as the terminal connects with the PG7000
Platform, tests, initializes and goes to the main run screen (see Section 3.7).
If <….Searching…..> displays for more than 5 seconds, the communications between the
PG7000 and the PG Terminal are failing. Check that the PG7000 to PG Terminal cable is
properly installed.
If PG7000 fails to reach the main run screen, service may be required. Record the sequence
of operations and displays observed and contact a DHI Authorized Service Provider
(see Table 32).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 28
2. INSTALLATION
2.4.2
CHECK THAT ON-BOARD PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE
AND MASS SET INFORMATION ARE CORRECT
PG7000 uses stored piston-cylinder and mass set metrological information to calculate the
reference pressures it defines (see Section 3.1). For the pressure values to be correct, the
stored metrological information on the piston-cylinder, mass set and mass loading bell must
be correct. Before using PG7000 for accurate pressure definition, the validity of the stored
information should be verified. This consists of comparing the piston-cylinder, mass set and
mass loading bell information stored in PG7000 to the information in the current piston-cylinder
and mass set calibration reports.
To verify the PG7000 piston-cylinder, mass set and mass loading bell information, use the
piston-cylinder and mass set viewing capabilities accessed by pressing [SPECIAL],
<1PC/MS> (see Section 3.11.1). Compare all the information contained in the PG7000
piston-cylinder, mass set and mass loading bell files to the information on the current
piston-cylinder, mass set and mass loading bell calibration reports.
2.4.3
SET LOCAL GRAVITY VALUE
PG7000 uses the value of local acceleration due to gravity (gl) in its calculation of the
reference pressure it defines (see Section 3.1). The correct value of local acceleration due to
gravity at the site of PG7000 use must be entered. This is accomplished by pressing
[SPECIAL], <6gl> (see Section 3.11.6) and editing the value of local gravity.
2.4.4
SETUP PRESSURE EQUATION VARIABLE INPUT SOURCES
PG7000 uses many variables in calculating defined pressures. The sources of the variables
are determined by the current SETUP file. SETUP files are viewed, created, edited and
selected using the SETUP function accessed by pressing [SETUP] (see Section 3.10).
A factory SETUP file is available and already selected on a new PG7000, but the operator
may desire to customize it. The factory setup file assumes that PG7000’s internal
measurement values will be used whenever possible.
2.4.5
CHECK PROPER OPERATION OF AMBIENT CONDITION
MEASUREMENTS
PG7000 automatically measures ambient conditions and uses these conditions in its
pressure calculations.
To verify that the ambient condition measurements are operating properly proceed as follows:
•
Display current ambient condition readings: Press [AMBIENT]. The ambient
conditions run screen is displayed (see Section 3.9.6).
•
Verify proper ambient condition readings: Compare the ambient condition values
displayed to the actual values of ambient conditions. Refer to the ambient condition
measurement specifications when evaluating the ambient readings (see Section 1.2.1.2).
The unit of measure in which ambient pressure is displayed is the same as the unit selected
by pressing [UNIT] (see Section 3.9.3). Units of measure in which other ambient condition values
are expressed cannot be changed.
PG7000 allows the source of ambient condition values used in reference pressure
calculations to be specified. The source may be PG7000’s on-board measurements, default values
or operator entered values. See Section 3.10 for information on specifying the source of ambient
condition values used by PG7000 in reference pressure calculations.
Page 29
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.4.6
APPLY PRESSURE TO THE PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE
This section assumes that the PG7000 system has already been set up, including pressure
interconnection (see Section 2.3).
Before applying pressure to the PG7000 system, be sure that all pressure vessels and
connections are rated for the pressure levels that will be applied and that all connections have
been properly tightened.
Continuing with the PG7000 set up and check out requires applying pressure to the pistoncylinder module and floating the piston.
Proceed as follows:
Turn OFF automated piston rotation (if present) and automated pressure
generation (if present). This will prevent the automated rotation and pressure
generation features (if present) from interfering during verification of these features (see
Sections 3.9.8 and 3.9.9 for information on automated piston rotation and
pressure generation).
Load mass on the piston. Install the mass loading bell on the piston. Then load the
make up mass (9, 4.5 or 4 kg depending on the mass set) (see Section 2.3.1.3).
If the
PG7000 platform is equipped with AMH automated mass handling, press [ENTER] and
enter a low value of pressure or mass to cause mass to be loaded onto the piston.
Float the piston. Use the pressure generation/control component of the PG7000
system to apply pressure under the piston through the PG7000 Platform TEST port. The
piston will float at a pressure approximately equal to the piston mass to pressure
conversion factor multiplied by the mass load in kg. The piston-cylinder conversion factor
is marked on the top of the piston cap and is in either kPa or MPa per kilogram [kPa/kg or
MPa/kg].
If the piston cannot be floated because it immediately sinks down from a float position,
there is a leak in the pressure system. Identify and eliminate leaks until the piston, once floated,
falls at a rate less than the nominal fall rate given in the specifications of the piston-cylinder
module being used (see Section 1.2.2).
2.4.7
CHECK PROPER BEHAVIOR OF MOTORIZED PISTON
ROTATION
The motorized rotation feature can be set to engage and disengage automatically as needed to
maintain the floating piston rotating within a set rotation rate range when floating, and to stop
rotation before mass manipulation to set a different pressure occurs (see Section 3.9.8). Motorized
piston rotation can also be activated manually by pressing [ ]. Stopping piston rotation can be
activated by pressing and holding [ ] and then pressing [←] (see Section 3.9.13).
Turn automated rotation OFF by pressing [ROTATE] and selecting <1off>. Load at least the
mass bell on the piston, float the piston and press [ ]. When the piston is floating, the
motorized rotation system should engage and cause the mass bell and piston to begin
rotating. Within 5 to 30 seconds, depending on the mass load, the rotation rate should reach
80 rpm for PG7601 or about 50 rpm for PG7102 or PG7302. Current rotation rate can be
observed by pressing [SYSTEM] (see Section 3.9.5).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 30
2. INSTALLATION
2.4.8
CHECK PROPER OPERATION OF PISTON BEHAVIOR
MEASUREMENTS
Float the piston and rotate it (see Sections 2.4.6 and 2.4.7).
Press [SYSTEM] once to reach the first SYSTEM run screen. Verify that the piston position,
piston fall/rise rate, piston rotation rate and piston rotation decay rate are indicating correctly
(see Section 3.9.5). The piston position reading system may be calibrated using an on-board
procedure if necessary (see Section 5.2.2). Calibration of piston position is recommended
when installing a new PG7000 and regularly after installation.
Press [SYSTEM] again to reach the second SYSTEM run screen. Verify that the piston-cylinder
temperature and temperature rate of change are indicating correctly (see Section 3.9.5).
If checking a PG7601 Platform, verify that the vacuum reference measurement is operating
correctly (see Section 2.4.8.1).
2.4.8.1
VERIFY VACUUM REFERENCE (PG7601 ONLY)
PG7601 includes provisions for establishing and measuring a vacuum reference.
To verify the vacuum reference capability:
Install a piston-cylinder module (see Section 2.3.2).
Install the bell jar on the PG7601 Platform (the bell jar aligns on the PG7601
vacuum plate and seals itself). If using AMH-38 automated mass handling,
install the AMH-38 mass handler (see the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and
Maintenance Manual).
Apply a vacuum through the reference vacuum port (KF25 port on front left
side of platform or KF40 if using the optional AMH-38 automated mass
handler).
Press [SYSTEM] twice to observe the value of vacuum read by the
PG7601’s built-in vacuum gauge.
If a vacuum pump of adequate capacity has been correctly connected to the
reference vacuum port, the vacuum read by the PG7601 built-in vacuum gauge
should go to 4 Pascal [Pa] or lower in less than five minutes on the first pump
down and two to three minutes on immediately subsequent pump downs.
If this performance is NOT achieved:
•
The vacuum pump may be inadequate.
•
The connection of the vacuum pump to the PG7601 platform of AMH-38 may
have leaks or excessive restrictions.
•
The PG7601 built-in vacuum gauge or external vacuum gauge may be
incorrect.
•
There may be a leak in the PG7601.
Page 31
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.4.9
CHECK AUTOMATED PRESSURE GENERATION (IF PRESENT)
Before applying pressure to the PG7000 system, be sure that all pressure vessels and
connections are rated for the pressure levels that will be applied and that all connections have
been properly tightened.
To check automated pressure generation/control:
Verify that the automated pressure generation/control component is properly connected
to the system (see Section 2.3.1.2).
When operation has returned to the main run screen, turn ON automated pressure generation
control, if available, by pressing [GEN] and selecting <1on> (see Section 3.9.9).
Press [P OR M], <1pressure> to select pressure entry mode (see Section 3.9.12). Press
[ENTER] and enter a pressure value to be generated and follow the mass loading
instruction (see Section 3.6).
Verify the pressure generation/control component properly generates pressure and floats
the PG7000 piston.
2.4.10
CHECK/SET SECURITY LEVEL
PG7000 has a security system based on User Levels. By default, the security system is set
to low and NO password is required to change the security level. See Section 3.11.4.5 for
information on the security system. As part of the PG7000 startup, set your desired security
level and a password.
PG7000 is delivered with the security level set to low to avoid inadvertent altering of
critical internal settings but with access to changing security levels unrestricted. It is
recommended that the low security level be maintained at all times and password protection be
implemented if control over setting of security levels is desired.
2.4.11
ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE BEFORE MAKING
PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS
Before using PG7000 to make accurate pressure measurements, consider the following:
•
Select/activate the correct piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass loading bell
(see Sections 3.9.2, 3.11.1.10, 3.11.1.15).
•
If using an automated pressure generation/control component with automated pressure
generation, set the pressure controller’s upper limit (UL) (see Section 3.9.9.3).
•
Enter the correct value of local gravity at the site of use (see Section 3.11.6).
•
Consider head corrections (see Sections 3.9.7 and 3.11.3).
•
Level the PG7000 Platform properly (see Section 2.3.1.1).
•
Select the correct pressure unit of measure and measurement mode (see Sections 3.9.3
and 3.9.5).
•
Verify that the settings for the sources of variables to be used by PG7000 in its
calculations of reference pressures are those desired (see Section 3.10).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 32
2. INSTALLATION
2.5
•
Verify that the piston-cylinder module is correctly cleaned and operating properly
(see Section 5.3).
•
PG7202 only: Ensure that the piston-cylinder module liquid reservoir is filled (see Section 5.3.3).
•
Verify that there are NO leaks in the pressure system.
SHORT TERM STORAGE
The following is recommended for short term storage of PG7000.
Remove all masses from the PG7000 Platform (manual mass set only).
Vent all circuits to atmosphere.
Turn OFF power using the power switch on the rear of the PG7000 Terminal.
Cover the PG7000 Platform and mass set with the dust covers included in the platform and mass set
accessories (not used with AMH mass handling system).
Page 33
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NO T E S
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 34
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.
GENERAL OPERATION
3.1
FUNDAMENTAL OPERATING PRINCIPLES
PG7000s operate on the principle of the piston gauge in which pressure is defined by balancing it against
a known force on a known area (see Figure 5). The known area is defined by a vertically mounted piston
rotating in a cylinder and the known force is applied to the piston by loading it with known mass subjected
to acceleration due to gravity. When the force applied by the pressure and the force applied by the mass
accelerated by gravity are in equilibrium, the piston floats and the pressure under the piston remains constant.
The pressure can be calculated following the equation in Figure 5 (see also, Section 7.2). Generally, the
pressurized fluid under the piston also lubricates the gap between the piston and the cylinder. PG7202 uses
a unique gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder (see Section 3.1.1).
Figure 5. Piston Gauge Operating Principle
The PG7000 Platform is designed to mount a variety of piston-cylinder sizes, allow pressure to be applied
under the piston and allow masses to be loaded on top of the piston. There are different PG7000 models
depending upon whether the pressure medium is oil or gas and whether a vacuum reference is needed.
The measurement uncertainty in the pressure defined by the piston gauge depends on the uncertainty in
the effective area of the piston-cylinder and the force applied by the mass accelerated by gravity.
PG7000 stores the calibrated values of the piston-cylinders and masses it uses in on-board files (see
Section 3.11.1). To determine the effective area of the piston-cylinder and the force applied by the
masses under actual operating conditions, a number of influences on these values must be quantified
and taken into consideration. For this reason, PG7000 includes extensive features to monitor the
behavior and conditions of the piston-cylinder as well as ambient conditions that affect pressure definition
(see Sections 3.9.5 and 3.9.6). PG7000 uses the piston-cylinder, mass and ambient condition information
to calculate the pressure defined by a given mass load or the mass load needed to define a given
pressure (see Section 7.2). The source of each value used by PG7000 in its calculations can be selected
by the user between PG7000’s internal measurements, default values or user entered values. These
sources are defined in SETUP files (see Section 3.10).
Page 35
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Once PG7000 has been set up, it is used in day-to-day operation either to define pressures applied to a
device or system under test or to measure a stable pressure. To interface with the PG Terminal, the operator:
Selects the appropriate piston-cylinder to cover the pressure range (see Section 3.11.1.5).
Selects the desired pressure unit of measure (see Section 3.9.3).
Selects the desired pressure measurement mode (gauge, absolute, differential) (see Section 3.9.4).
Sets the head difference between the PG7000 and the device under test (see Section 3.9.7).
Selects mass to pressure or pressure to mass operating mode (see Section 3.9.12).
Enters a pressure to define or a current mass load to calculate (see Section 3.9.11.1 and 3.9.11.2).
Loads masses by hand or with optional AMH automated mass handler, floats piston and defines
pressure.
3.1.1
GAS OPERATED, LIQUID LUBRICATED PISTON-CYLINDER
OPERATING PRINCIPLE (PG7202)
PG7202 provides very high pressure gas pressure operation using a unique gas operated,
liquid lubricated piston-cylinder system.
The principle of operation of the gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder is simple but
very effective (see Figure 6). The measured gas pressure, Pg, is applied to the bottom of the
piston and to the top of a liquid reservoir located around the cylinder. The reservoir is
connected to the gap between the piston and the cylinder through lateral holes near the
bottom of the cylinder, allowing liquid from the reservoir to enter the gap. The pressure of the
liquid in the gap, Pl, is equal to the gas pressure Pg, plus the liquid head, h. Therefore, the
liquid pressure in the gap is always higher than the gas pressure by the amount of the liquid
head regardless of the gas pressure value. Since h is small and the space between the
piston and cylinder is typically < 1 micron, the bleed of liquid from the bottom of the cylinder
towards the gas pressure is extremely small. The mounting post of the 7202 piston gauge is
configured so this minute amount of liquid drops directly into a sump that is deadened (see
Section 5.2.4, 3.1.1) and not in the flow path of test gas into and out of the system. Though
molecules of the liquid may migrate through the gas, no significant contamination of the test
system occurs. Because the liquid reservoir is contained in the piston-cylinder module,
piston-cylinders can be removed and installed in the PG7202 piston gauge platform with no
loss of liquid from the reservoir. All PC-7200 piston-cylinder modules can be delivered using
Krytox, a fluorinated synthetic fluid, to lubricate the piston-cylinder in applications where the
system must remain perfectly free of hydrocarbons (e.g. when calibrating instrumentation for
oxygen service).
PC-7200 gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder modules are delivered with
their lubricating liquid reservoir drained. The reservoir must be filled prior to using the pistoncylinder module and then regularly when used (see Section 5.3.3)
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 36
3. GENERAL OPERATION
Figure 6. Gas Operated, Liquid Lubricated
Piston-Cylinder (PC-7200) Operating Principle
3.2
KEYPAD LAYOUT AND PROTOCOL
PG7000 has a 4 x 4 keypad for local operator access to direct functions, function menus and for data entry.
1.
The Function/Data keys allow very commonly used
functions to be accessed directly from the main run screen by
a single keystroke. The name of the function is on the bottom
half of the key (see Section 3.9.1). These keys enter
numerical values when editing.
2.
The Editing and Execution keys are for execution,
suspending execution, backing up in menus and editing
entries.
3.
The Menu/Data keys provide access to function menus from
the main run screen. The menu name is on the bottom half of
the key. The SETUP menu is for more frequently used
functions. The SPECIAL menu is for functions that are NOT
generally used as a part of day to day operation. These keys
enter numerical values when editing.
Figure 7. PG7000 Keypad Layout
Key press confirmation is provided by both tactile and audible feedback. A single beep confirms a valid entry.
A descending two note tone signals an invalid entry. The audible valid entry feedback can be suppressed or
modified by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting <5prefs>, <2sound> (see Section 3.11.4.2).
Pressing the [ENTER/SET P] key generally causes execution or forward movement in the menu tree.
[ENTER/SET P] is also used to enter a command to set a pressure.
Page 37
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pressing the [ESCAPE] key generally allows movement back in the menu tree and/or causes execution
to cease or suspend without changes being implemented. Pressing [ESCAPE] repeatedly eventually
returns to the main run screen. From the main run screen, pressing [ESCAPE] allows momentary
viewing of the PG7000 identification screen.
Pressing the [+/-] key changes a numerical sign when editing. It also toggles through multiple screens
when available.
Pressing the [←] and [→] keys when editing allows reverse and forward cursor movement when editing
data entry. These keys are also used to scroll through choices.
Menu selections can be made by pressing the number of the selection directly or by pressing [←] and
[→] to place the cursor on the number of the desired selection and pressing [ENTER].
Some screens go beyond the two lines provided by the display. This is indicated by a flashing arrow in
the second line of the display. Press [←] and [→] to move the cursor to access the lines that are NOT visible
or directly enter the number of the hidden menu choice if you know it.
3.3
SOUNDS
The PG Terminal is equipped with a variable frequency tone device to provide audible feedback
and alarms. Some sounds can be modified and all sounds can be suppressed (see Section 3.11.4.2).
Sounds are used for the following indications:
Valid key press
Invalid key press
Piston left end of stroke high
or low
3.4
Brief high frequency beep.
Three rapid, low frequency beeps.
Three rapid valid key press beeps. Piston was at low stop or high stop and
just entered spring zone (see Section 3.5).
PRESSURE READY/NOT READY INDICATION
The three characters on the top line, far left, of the main run screen provide a pressure Ready/Not Ready
indication. This indication is intended to give the user a clear and objective indication of when PG7000
conditions are such that the value of pressure it is defining is valid and in tolerance. There are three
Ready/Not Ready indication characters to indicate the status of the three main Ready/Not Ready criteria.
The Ready/Not Ready indication characters are shown on the first line, top left hand side, of the main run screen.
1. Piston position and vertical movement.
2. Piston rotation.
3. Reference vacuum (PG7601 in absolute by
vacuum measurement mode only).
*** 100.4755 kPa g h
+ 0.1 mm 10.00564 kg
For each Ready/Not Ready indication character, <*> indicates a Ready condition. Therefore, <***> or <** >
indicates that all conditions necessary for an in tolerance pressure definition are present. Any indication
other than <*> indicates Not Ready.
See Sections 3.4.1, 3.4.2 and 3.4.3 for details on each of the three Ready/Not Ready indicating characters.
The criteria used to distinguish between Ready and Not Ready conditions can be customized by the user
(see Sections 3.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.4.3).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 38
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.4.1
PISTON POSITION READY/NOT READY
The piston position Ready/Not Ready character indicates Ready or Not Ready based on the
position of the piston in its vertical stroke (see Section 3.5) and an automated measure
generation status (see Section 3.9.9). This ensures that pressure definitions will be made
with the piston not more than a certain distance from mid-float position and that measurements
will not be made while the action of an automated pressure controller may influence the
pressure.
The piston position Ready/Not Ready character is the first character from the left on the top
line of the main run screen.
The piston position Ready/Not Ready criterion is determined by the current SETUP file and
can be customized by the user (see Section 3.10).
Piston position Ready/Not Ready character indications include:
<*>
Piston position Ready (within the position limits specified in the current SETUP file)
(see Section 3.5).
<↓>
Piston position Not Ready, low (below the position limits specified in the current
SETUP file, see Section 3.10). The <↓> flashes if the piston is not at the bottom stop
position to alert the user that this indicator is Not Ready.
<↑>
Piston position Not Ready, high (above the position limits specified in the current
SETUP file) (see Section 3.10). The <↑> flashes if the piston is not at the top stop
position to alert the user that this indicator is Not Ready.
<?>
Piston position not known (current specified mass load is less than the load of the piston
+ bell). The bell must be installed for PG7000 piston position measurement to operate
correctly so piston position values shown are not valid when the bell is not installed.
<T>
Tare PG7000 is Not Ready (PG7102 and PG7202 only). Indicates that piston
position or rotation rate is Not Ready on the tare PG7000 in high line differential
mode (see Section 3.9.4.2).
Piston position always indicates Not Ready if automated pressure generation is adjusting
pressure, regardless of actual piston position.
In PG7102 and PG7202 high line differential pressure mode (see Section 3.9.4.2), the
piston position Ready/Not Ready indicator applies to the pistons of both the tare and the
reference PG7000. For Ready to be indicated, both pistons must be within the ready limits for
piston position.
3.4.2
PISTON ROTATION READY/NOT READY
The piston rotation Ready/Not Ready character indicates Ready or Not Ready based on the
rotation rate of the piston.
The piston rotation Ready/Not Ready character is the second character from the left on the
top line of the main run screen.
The piston rotation rate Ready/Not Ready criterion is specific to the currently active
piston-cylinder module and can be edited by the user (see Sections 3.11.1.1).
Page 39
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Piston rotation rate Ready/Not Ready character indications include:
<*>
Rotation rate Ready: Rotation rate is within the rotation rate limits specified in the
current piston-cylinder module file) (see Section 3.11.1.1).
<<>
Rotation rate Not Ready, low: Rotation rate is less than the lower rotation rate limit
specified in the current piston-cylinder module file (see Section 3.11.1.1)
or motorized rotation system is currently engaged. Note that the low rotation limit is
automatically reduced when the mass loaded on the piston is less than 3 kg. The
<<> flashes if the piston is floating to alert the user that this indicator is Not Ready.
<?>
Rotation rate not known: Current specified mass load is less than the load of the
(piston + bell). The bell must be installed for PG7000 piston rotation rate measurement
to operate correctly so piston rotation rate cannot be measured when the bell is not
installed.
At mass loads less then 3 kg the low rotation limit is automatically reduced to an
operational minimum to maximize free rotation time.
In PG7102 and PG7202 high line differential pressure mode (see Section 3.9.4.2), the
piston rotation rate Ready/Not Ready indicator applies to the pistons of both the tare and the
reference PG7000. For Ready to be indicated, both pistons must be within the ready limits for
piston rotation rate.
3.4.3
VACUUM REFERENCE READY/NOT READY (PG7601 ONLY)
The vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready character is only used with PG7601, as it is the
only PG7000 model with vacuum reference capability. It is only active when operating in
absolute by vacuum mode (see Section 3.9.4).
The vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready character indicates Ready or Not Ready based on
the value of reference vacuum when making measurements in absolute by vacuum mode.
This ensures that definitions of absolute pressure with a vacuum reference will be made with
the vacuum under the PG7601 bell jar lower than a specified value. When the vacuum is not
low enough, vacuum measurement errors may be excessive.
The vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready character is the third character from the left on the
top line of the main run screen.
The vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready criterion is determined by the current SETUP file
and can be customized by the user (see Section 3.10). The vacuum reference criterion is
a fixed value that can be customized by the user when the vacuum reference selection in the
SETUP file is internal. If the selection in the SETUP file is NOT internal, the vacuum reference
Ready/Not Ready character always indicates Ready and the value cannot be customized.
Vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready character indications include:
<>
(Blank) Vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready is not in use. This is not a PG7601;
or if PG7601, current measurement mode is not absolute by vacuum.
<*>
Vacuum reference Ready. Vacuum value is below limit specified in the current
SETUP file if source is internal OR source is default or user and the vacuum value is
not a measured value (see Section 3.10).
< > > Vacuum reference Not Ready. Current SETUP file source for vacuum is internal
and vacuum value is above the limit specified (see Section 3.10). The <>> flashes if
the piston is floating to alert the user that this indicator is Not Ready.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 40
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.5
PISTON POSITION
When operating a PG7000 piston gauge, reference pressure values are defined by loading known mass
values on the piston and adjusting the pressure to float the piston. Piston position is measured and
displayed real time on the MAIN run screen (see Section 3.7) and in the first SYSTEM run screen (see
Section 3.9.5). Piston position is used as a criterion for the Ready/Not Ready indication as valid
measurements can only be made when the piston is in the correct position (see Section 3.4.1).
The full piston stroke is ± 4.5 mm from the midstroke position. The stroke is divided into different
positions and zones as illustrated in Figure 8. These zones are:
•
High and low stops: The piston is at the minimum or maximum end of stroke. The pressure
applied to the piston is higher (at high stop) or lower (at low stop) than that corresponding to the
mass loaded on the piston. The high and low stop positions are fixed.
•
High and low spring zones: The combination of pressure and the force of the high or low stop
springs have caused the piston to leave the stop. The pressure applied to the piston is within the
equivalent of 2 kg of the pressure corresponding to the mass loaded on the piston. The high and low
spring zones indicate the piston is about to float. The spring zone positions are fixed.
•
High and low measurement zones: The piston is within the zone in which a Ready measurement
can be made (see Section 3.4.1). The pressure applied to the piston is the pressure corresponding
to the mass loaded on the piston. The default value of the high and low measurement zones is
± 2.5 mm around midstroke position. This value can be adjusted in the SETUP file (see Section 3.10).
•
Midstroke: The piston is at the middle of its stroke. The bottom of the piston (or its equivalent
for hollow pistons) is at the reference level marked on the mounting post (see Section 3.9.7).
There is equal stroke available to the high and low stops.
The piston position monitoring system is driven by the internal ring in the base of the mass loading bell.
When the bell is not installed, piston position cannot be measured. If the current mass load is less than the
mass of the piston + bell, PG7000 will display < ---- > where piston position is normally displayed. If the
current mass load is greater than the mass of the piston + bell but the bell is not actually installed, the piston
position indication is not valid.
Figure 8. Piston Stroke and Zones
Page 41
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.6
MASS LOADING PROTOCOL
PURPOSE
To provide the operator with mass loading instructions and allow mass entry in convenient nominal values
which PG7000 can accurately convert to measured mass values to determine the actual mass load.
PRINCIPLE
All PG7000 manual mass set masses of 0.1 kg and above, including those in the mass set, the mass
loading bell and the piston assembly, are adjusted so that their true mass is within ± 20 ppm of their
nominal value. The nominal value is marked on each mass. Each mass’s actual individual value is
measured more accurately than ± 20 ppm and reported in the mass set, mass loading bell or pistoncylinder module calibration report. These measured actual values are used by PG7000 in all of its
defined pressure calculations. The nominal mass values, and the sequential numbers of the nominal
masses when there are several of the same value, are used by PG7000 to describe the mass to load or
the mass that is loaded. Following a few simple mass loading rules allows PG7000 to accurately
transform actual mass values into nominal mass values and vice-versa so that mass loading
instructions to the operator and the operator mass entries can be made in simple nominal mass
instructions while representing actual individual mass values.
Since the nominal mass values written on the masses and the actual values of the individual masses
are different, in pressure to mass mode (see Section 3.9.12) the actual mass value loaded on the piston
will be different from the mass loading instruction. In the same manner, in mass to pressure mode
the nominal value of the mass load that the operator enters is different from the actual mass loaded
on the piston. The mass value shown in the MAIN run screen (see Section 3.7) is always the
actual mass value. The mass loading instruction given in pressure to mass mode and the mass value
entered by the operator in mass to pressure mode is always the nominal mass value. If PG7000 mass
loading protocol is followed, the conversion from nominal mass to actual mass occurs correctly allowing
very simple nominal mass loading and accounting for the operator while using very accurate measured
mass values for metrological calculations.
OPERATION
To avoid wear to masses and to the piston-cylinder module end of stroke stops, the piston should not
be rotating when masses are loaded or unloaded. Before loading masses, stop piston rotation by hand or
using the motorized rotation system (see Section 3.9.13).
PG7000 instructions to the operator of mass to load, and operator entries of the mass that is loaded, are
always expressed in terms of nominal mass within 0.1 kg and in terms of grams for values under 0.1 kg.
This protocol is also followed when using the AMH automated mass handler.
In pressure to mass mode, the instruction of the mass to load to
achieve the requested pressure is formatted:
Load nominal mass:
In mass to pressure mode, the entry of the mass currently loaded
on the piston is formatted:
Nominal mass load:
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 42
kkk.k kg and gg.gg g
kkk.k kg and gg.gg g
3. GENERAL OPERATION
kkk.k and gg.gg must be expressed and loaded following the mass loading rules below:
Mass Loading Rules
See Sections 2.3.1.3, Installing Masses On The Mass Loading Tray and 3.6. for PG7000 mass set principles
and protocol information. Refer to display examples immediately above to identify kkk.k and gg.gg.
See EXAMPLES: Mass Loading below for mass loading examples.
PG7000 mass loading entries and instructions are always formatted:
kkk.k kg and nn.nn g
•
The mass set being used must be selected as the active mass set (see Section 3.11.1.10) and must
be properly set up prior to use (see Section 3.11.1.6).
•
kkk.k is made up of the piston, the mass loading bell and mass set masses of 0.1 kg and greater.
When using an AMH mass set, the binary mass carrier and mass lifting shaft are also included.
•
kkk.k always includes the mass loading bell and then the makeup mass, if possible.
•
kkk.k is made up of the largest masses possible rather than a combination of smaller masses.
EXAMPLE: To load 5 kg on a PG7601:
USE the piston (0.2 kg) + the mass loading bell (0.3 kg) + the 4.5 kg makeup mass.
DO NOT USE the piston + the mass loading bell + 2 kg #1 + 2 kg #2 + 0.5 kg #1.
When several masses of the same nominal value are included in kkk.k, they are loaded in numerical
sequence, low to high.
EXAMPLE: When loading three 5 kg masses:
USE 5 kg mass #1, #2 and #3.
DO NOT USE 5 kg mass #4, #3, #1.
This rule will be followed automatically if masses are installed and used as described in Section 3.6.
•
gg.gg is made up of mass from the gram trim mass set (masses of 50 g to 0.01 g). These masses
can be loaded in any order.
When PG7000 provides mass loading instructions and calculates the true mass of the mass currently
loaded, it assumes that the mass set in use has been set up correctly (see Section 2.3.1.3).
For PG7000 mass loading protocol to operate properly, the mass set in use must be EXACTLY the mass set
that has been defined by the add and/or edit mass function (see Section 3.11.1.6).
Page 43
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
In PG7102 and PG7202 High Line Differential mode (see Section 3.9.4.2), there are two types of mass
loading instructions: line pressure setting and differential pressure setting. Both follow conventional PG7000
mass loading protocol. The line pressure mass instructions are always given with 0.1 kg resolution. This is to
preserve the smaller masses for setting the differential pressure. The differential pressure mass loading
instructions follow conventional mass loading protocol using the masses that remain after the line pressure
has been set. It may be necessary to adjust the line pressure value to assure that adequate masses remain to
set the desired differential pressure. For example, if the line pressure requires loading 10.6 kg, the 0.5 and 0.1 kg
masses will be used to set the line pressure and will not be available if they are needed to set the differential
pressure. If this situation occurs, consider adjusting the line pressure so that it is set using a whole number
of kilograms, in this example 10.0 or 11.0 kg.
EXAMPLES: Manual Mass Loading
•
Mass loading instruction using a PG7601 and a
35 kg mass set:
• Mass loading instruction using PG7302 and an
80 kg mass set:
12.3 kg and 32.33 g
77.6 kg and 10.45 g
Load:
Load:
piston (0.2 kg)
piston (0.2 kg)
bell (0.3 kg)
bell (0.8 kg)
4.5 kg #1 (makeup mass)
9 kg #1 (makeup mass)
5 kg #1
10 kg #1 through #6
2 kg #1
5 kg #1
0.2 kg #1
2 kg #1
0.1 kg #1
0.5 kg #1
32.33 g from trim mass set
0.1 kg #1
10.45 g from trim mass set
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 44
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.7
MAIN RUN SCREEN
The PG7000 main run screen is its home display that is reached upon powering up and from which other
functions and menus are accessed. It is the top level of all menu structures.
The main run screen is where PG7000 is left in normal operation. It displays the pressure defined by
PG7000, Ready/Not Ready condition and a variety of other information.
The screen described below is called the MAIN run screen. The SYSTEM and AMBIENT screens
(see Sections 3.9.5 and 3.9.6) are also run screens in the sense that all the other functions may be accessed
directly from them and pressure or mass entries may be made from them. See Section 3.8 for a description
of PG7000’s main menu/function structure.
3.
<unit>: Current pressure unit of measure (see Section
3.9.3).
4.
Current measurement mode. <a> for absolute, <g>
for gauge, <d> for differential or high line differential
(see Section 3.9.4).
5.
Automated pressure generation status. <G> if automated
pressure generation is ON.
The <G> flashes if
automated pressure generation is ON and active, blank
if automated pressure generation is not ON (see
Section 3.9.9).
6.
DUT head correction status. <h> if a head correction is
currently being applied, blank if head height is zero (see
Section 3.9.7).
7.
<NN.NNNNN kg>: Current mass load in actual mass
(assuming mass loading instructions have been
followed and/or mass loading entries are correct (see
Section 3.6).
8.
<± N.N mm>: Current piston position in millimeters
from midstroke position. Positive values are above
midstroke, negative values below. Indicates < ---- >
if piston position not available or out of range (see
Section 3.5).
prvPRESSURE1 unit aGh
+N.N mm
1.
NN.NNNNN kg
<prv>: Three Ready/Not Ready indication characters
(from left to right: piston position, piston rotation,
vacuum reference) (see Section 3.4). Each character
indicates as follows:
<p>: Piston Position Ready/Not Ready. <*> when
Ready, <↑> when Not Ready due to piston above
measuring zone, <↓> when Not Ready due to piston
below measuring zone, <?> if piston position not
available or out of range. Flashes if condition is Not
Ready and piston is floating (see Section 3.4.1).
Indicates Not Ready when automated pressure
generation is adjusting pressure.
<r>: Piston Rotation Ready/Not Ready. <*> when
Ready, <<> when Not Ready due to piston rotation rate
too low or motorized rotation engaged, <?> if piston
position not available or out of range. Flashes if condition
is Not Ready and piston is floating. (see Section 3.4.2).
When a number is too large to display in the
allocated screen space, PG7000 displays <********>
or <OVERFLOW>.
<v>:
Vacuum Reference Ready/Not Ready
(PG7601 only). <*> when Ready, <v> if Not Ready due
to vacuum not below ready limit. Flashes if condition is
Not Ready and piston is floating (see Section 3.4.3).
2.
PG7000 has a screen saver function that causes
the display to dim if NO key is pressed for 10 minutes.
Pressing a key restores full power to the display.
The screen saver activation time can be changed or screen
saving can be completely disabled (see Section 3.4.5.1).
<PRESSURE1>: Numerical value and sign of the
pressure defined by PG7000 with current mass loaded
on current piston when all Ready/Not Ready indication
characters indicate Ready.
Page 45
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.8
GENERAL FUNCTION/MENU FLOW CHART
Local operator interface with PG7000 is provided by PG Terminal keypad and display. Normal PG7000
operation is organized around run screens from which functions and menus are accessed. The run
screens include:
• MAIN run screen: Displays Ready/Not Ready, defined pressure, piston position and mass load.
• (2) SYSTEM run screens:
(PG7601 only).
Display piston position, rotation, temperature and reference vacuum
• AMBIENT run screen: Displays ambient pressure temperature, relative humidity and local gravity.
The flow chart below outlines the operating protocol of the run screens and associated key presses.
POWER
UP
INTRO SCREEN
or
RESET
≈ 5 SEC
DELAY
ESC
MAIN RUN SCREEN
ESC
SYSTEM
AMBIENT
SYSTEM 1
RUN SCREEN
AMBIENT
RUN SCREEN
+/-
ESC
ESC
or SYSTEM
SYSTEM 2
RUN SCREEN
TO PREVIOUS
RUN SCREEN
OTHER FUNCTION KEYS
RES
P-C
UNIT
MODE
SYSTEM
AMBIENT
ESC
ENT
SPECIAL
SETUP
HEAD
Figure 9. Run Screen Flow Chart
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 46
ROTATE
GEN
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.9
DIRECT FUNCTION KEYS
3.9.1
DIRECT FUNCTION KEYS SUMMARY
Local operator interface with PG7000 is provided by PG Terminal keypad and display.
To minimize the use of multi-layered menu structures, the keypad’s numerical keys also
provide direct access to the most commonly used functions. The function accessed is
labeled on the bottom half of the each key. Direct function keys are active whenever PG7000
is in a run screen (MAIN, SYSTEM or AMBIENT). Table 14 summarizes the operation of the
direct function keys. Section 3.8 provides a flow chart of PG Terminal general operation.
See corresponding manual Sections to 3.9.1 to 3.11.9.
It may be useful to keep a copy of Table 14 near the PG7000, especially when first becoming
acquainted with its operation.
Table 14. Summary of PG7000 Direct Function Key Operations
DIRECT FUNCTION KEYS ARE ACTIVE FROM ANY RUN SCREEN
(main, ambient, system).
See corresponding manual sections for full detail.
Menu of less frequently used internal
functions and settings including resets,
user preferences, internal calibration
and remote interface setup.
Set the resolution of PG7000 mass
loading commands (0.01 g to 0.1 kg).
Edit and select files that determine the
sources of the values for the variables
PG7000 uses in calculations of reference
pressures.
Access SYSTEM run screens (2) which
display current measurements of piston
behavior, piston-cylinder temperature
and reference vacuum if present.
Toggles between the two screens.
Select pressure to mass or mass to
pressure operation.
Access AMBIENT run screen which
displays current values of barometric
pressure, ambient temperature, ambient
humidity and local gravity as specified in
the active SETUP file.
Activate motorized control manually.
Activates when pressed, deactivates
when released.
Adjust height of DUT fluid head
correction. Set to zero to defeat head
correction.
From a run screen: Access mass or
pressure
setting
commands.
From other screens:
Select menu
choice, enter value, confirm selection.
Select active piston-cylinder module
(range).
Turn automatic activation of motorized
rotation ON/OFF.
Set unit of measure in which pressures
are defined. Choice of units available
from this key can be customized.
Turn
automated
pressure
generation/control
ON/OFF,
adjust
control parameters, set upper limit for
automated pressure control. Has no
effect if an automated pressure
generation/control component is not part
of the PG7000 system.
Set pressure measurement
(gauge, absolute, differential).
Page 47
mode
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.9.2
[P-C]
PURPOSE
To view and/or change the active piston-cylinder module.
piston-cylinder module is equivalent to changing the range.
In most cases, changing the
[P-C] is for selecting the active piston-cylinder module only. Piston-cylinder modules can be
added and deleted and their characteristics can be edited by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting
<1PC/MS> (see Section 3.11.1).
The active mass set and mass loading bell are selected by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting
<1PC/MS> (see Section 3.11.1).
PRINCIPLE
To make valid pressure and mass load calculations, PG7000 must know the exact
characteristics of the piston-cylinder module that is currently in use. See Section 7.2 for
detailed information on PG7000 pressure and mass calculations.
Most PG7000s are used with more than one piston-cylinder module. Detailed characteristics
on up to 18 piston-cylinder modules are stored in files. These files can be added, deleted,
viewed and edited by pressing [SPECIAL], 1pc/ms (see Section 3.11.1).
The P-C function provides rapid access, from any run screen, to viewing the piston-cylinder
modules available and selecting one to be active.
OPERATION
Pressing [P-C] activates the piston-cylinder module viewing and selecting function. Pressing
the [P-C] key again or [+/-] while in the P-C function steps through displays of available
piston-cylinder modules.
When [P-C] is first pressed, a summary of the characteristics of the active piston-cylinder
module is displayed, for example:
1.
Nominal pressure to mass conversion coefficient of the pistoncylinder module that is currently selected (active). This value is
calculated from the effective area of the piston-cylinder and is
in kPa (if < 1 MPa) or MPa. Upgraded Type 5000 pistoncylinders may be displayed in psi.
2.
Serial number of the active piston-cylinder module.
3.
Current pressure unit of measure.
4.
Nominal pressure in current pressure units resulting from
loading all the mass of the active mass set.
5.
Nominal pressure in current pressure units resulting from
loading the piston and mass bell only.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 48
Active 10 kPa/kg 247
0.7 to 50 psi
3. GENERAL OPERATION
Pressing [P-C] again or [+/-] causes the screen to step through the other available pistoncylinder modules in the sequence that they were added.
1.
Nominal pressure to mass conversion coefficient of the pistoncylinder module. This value is calculated from the effective area
of the piston-cylinder and is always in kPa (if < MPa) or MPa.
2.
Serial number of the piston-cylinder module.
3.
Current pressure unit of measure.
Select 200kPa/kg 382
4.
Nominal maximum pressure using the piston-cylinder module.
Pressure, in current pressure units, resulting from loading all
the mass of the active mass set.
14 to 1000 psi
5.
Nominal minimum pressure using the piston-cylinder module.
Pressure, in current pressure units, resulting from loading the
piston and mass bell only.
Pressing [ENTER] while in the P-C function causes PG7000 to select the currently displayed
piston-cylinder module as the active piston-cylinder module.
Pressing [ESCAPE] while in the P-C function returns to the main run screen without
changing piston-cylinder modules.
The pressure unit of measure in which the range offered by the piston-cylinder module using
the active mass set is displayed can be changed by pressing [UNIT] (see Section 3.9.3).
When the current pressure unit of measure is an altitude unit, piston-cylinder module range
is expressed in kPa if the altitude unit is meters (m) or psi if the altitude unit is feet (ft).
3.9.3
[UNIT]
PURPOSE
To specify the unit of measure in which defined pressures are expressed.
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 supports a wide variety of pressure units of measure. Internally, PG7000 always
operates in Pascal [Pa] (the SI unit of pressure). Values of pressure are represented in other
units by the application of conversion factors to convert from Pascal. See Section 7.1.1 for
Unit of Measure Conversions.
The pressure unit of measure selection (e.g., psi, kPa, etc.) is separate from the pressure
measurement mode selection (gauge, absolute or differential). See Section 3.9.4 for
information on changing the measurement mode.
OPERATION
To change the pressure unit of measure, press the
[UNIT] function key from any run screen. The
display is (default units depend on model):
1kPa 2Mpa 3Pa
4bar 5psi 6kcm2
The cursor is on the number corresponding to the active unit. To change the pressure unit, select
the desired unit. The display returns to the previous run screen with the selected unit active.
Page 49
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
If the pressure unit selected is inWa, the reference
temperature for water density must be specified. When
inWa is selected as the unit, the next display is:
Select inWa ref temp
4°C
20°C
20°F
Select the desired reference temperature for water density using the [←] or [→] key to move
the cursor. Pressing [ENTER] returns to the main run screen with inWa based on water density
at the selected reference temperature as the active pressure unit. The current inWa
reference temperature can be viewed by observing the position of the cursor in the reference
temperature screen.
See Section 7.1 for tables of the pressure unit of measure conversion factors used by
PG7000.
The UNIT function provides rapid access to a choice of up to six units. The choice of units
can be customized from a wider selection by the user (see Section 3.9.3.1). The default units of the
UNIT function depend on the PG7000 model. The default units are:
PG7102 and PG7601: 1kPa 2MPa 3Pa 4bar 5psi 6kcm2
PG7202 and PG7302: 1MPa 2kPa 3bar 4psi 5kcm2
To restore the default UNIT function settings, use the Unit Reset (see Section 3.11.9.2).
Certain internal and/or metrological functions (e.g., vacuum reference pressure) are always
represented in Pascal [Pa], regardless of the active pressure unit of measure.
When the current pressure unit of measure is an altitude unit, atmospheric pressure in the
AMBIENT run screen is expressed in kPa if the altitude unit is meters (m) or psi if the altitude
unit is feet (ft).
3.9.3.1
CUSTOMIZING PRESSURE UNITS AVAILABLE
UNDER THE UNIT FUNCTION
PURPOSE
To customize the selection of pressure units that are available for selection from
the [UNIT] function key.
PRINCIPLE
The UNIT function provides a choice of different pressure units of measure
depending on the PG7000 model. The units that are available by default are
those indicated in the Note in Section 3.9.3. However, PG7000 supports many
other pressure units of measure. Other units can be made available for selection
and units can be deleted by customizing the UNIT function. This allows PG7000
to offer a very wide selection of units while simplifying day to day operation.
The typical user will customize the [UNIT] function key to support the six most
commonly used units.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 50
3. GENERAL OPERATION
OPERATION
To customize the [UNIT] function key, from the main run screen press [SETUP]
and select <2PresU>. The display is:
1.
The UNIT number in the [UNIT] menu that is
to be changed.
Set up user unit #6
Enter the number of the unit position that
you would like to change. The display
becomes:
Unit #6
1SI 2other
3altitude 4user
Select the desired pressure unit category. SI units include units based on SI
such as mmHg. Select the desired unit from the unit list (see Table 15).
Table 15. Pressure Units of Measure Available
<1SI>
<1Pa>
<2Kpa>
<3MPa>
<4mbar>
<5bar>
<6mmHg>
<7mmWa>
<2Other>
<1psi>
<2psf>
<3inHg>
<4inWa>
<5kcm2>
<6Torr>
<7mTor>
<8none>
<3altitude>*
<4User>**
<1m>
<2ft>
<1user>
* <3altitude>: PG7601 in absolute by vacuum mode only. Not available in
PG7102, PG7202 and PG7302.
** <4user>: User defined unit. As there are no altitude units on PG7102,
PG7202 and PG7302, user is <3user>.
The UNIT function display is not required to display six units. To delete the
current unit from the UNIT screen and show no unit, select <2other>, <6none>
for that unit number.
If <4user> was selected, the user unit must be defined. The display is:
Define user unit:
1.
Entry field.
1.000000 Units/Pa
Enter the number of user units per Pascal [Pa] in the entry field. Pressing [ENTER]
defines the user unit and returns to the <Set up unit #> screen.
See Section 7.1.1 for the pressure unit of measure conversion factors used
by PG7000.
The user defined unit can be assigned a user defined label using the UDU
remote command (see Section 4.3.4.2).
Page 51
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.9.4
[MODE]
PURPOSE
To specify the measurement mode (gauge, absolute, differential) in which PG7000 defines
reference pressures.
Pressure measurement mode and unit of measure are not the same thing.
See Section 3.9.3 for information on the pressure unit of measure.
PRINCIPLE
Pressure defined relative to absolute zero or vacuum is generally referred to as absolute
pressure.
Pressure defined relative to atmospheric pressure is generally referred to as gauge pressure,
with pressure below atmosphere called negative gauge pressure.
Pressure defined relative to another pressure that may be, but is not necessarily atmospheric
pressure, is generally referred to as differential pressure.
PG7000s (depending on the model) can define absolute, gauge, negative gauge and
differential pressures. These are referred to as measurement modes.
The specific PG7000 measurement modes are as follows:
•
gauge:
Defines gauge pressure by leaving the PG7000 mass load open to
atmosphere. This measurement mode is supported by all PG7000 models. It does not
allow negative gauge pressures. The minimum gauge pressure is the pressure resulting
from loading the combined mass of the piston and the bell on piston-cylinder effective
area.
•
absolute by adding atmospheric pressure (absolute by ATM): Defines absolute
pressure by defining a pressure in the same manner as in gauge mode and adding the
value of atmospheric pressure measured by a barometer. This measurement mode is
supported by all PG7000 models. The barometer can be PG7000’s on-board sensor or
a remote RS232 barometer. The uncertainty on the value of atmospheric pressure
measured by the barometer must be considered but this value can become relatively
small as pressure goes up. For example, if using a ± 0.01 % barometer, the added uncertainty
at 1 MPa (150 psi) is 10 ppm.
This mode is more convenient and less costly than absolute by vacuum since no
vacuum reference needs to be established. However, it does not allow absolute
pressures under atmosphere and the minimum absolute pressure is atmospheric pressure
plus the pressure resulting from loading the combined mass of the piston and the bell on
the piston-cylinder effective area.
•
absolute by vacuum (absolute by vac) (PG7601 only): Defines absolute pressure by
measuring relative to an evacuated bell jar. This mode is time consuming as the vacuum
under the bell jar must be made and broken to adjust the mass load for each pressure to
be set. This mode is required for setting absolute pressures under atmospheric pressure
and for lowest uncertainty under about 1 MPa (150 psi).
•
differential (dif) (PG7601 only): Defines differential pressures at an absolute static
pressure between vacuum and two atmospheres by defining an absolute pressure
relative to an evacuated bell jar and subtracting static pressure monitored by a digital
pressure indicator. An offsetting technique ensures that only the digital indicator’s
resolution and very short term repeatability influence the measurement results.
Allows positive and negative differential pressure (including gauge pressures) with one
common hardware setup. Covers pressures very near and at zero without limitations
due to piston-cylinder size and mass loads (see Section 3.9.4.1).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 52
3. GENERAL OPERATION
•
high line differential (HLdif) (PG7102 and PG7202 only): Defines differential
pressures and at gauge static pressure between the lowest gauge pressure supported by
the piston-cylinder and the maximum gauge pressure supported by the piston-cylinder.
Requires the use of a PG7202 or PG7102 as the “reference” and a second gas operated
PG7000 as the “tare”. Differential pressures are defined by setting a common line
pressure on both PG7000s and then adding the differential pressure to the reference
PG7000 (see Section 3.9.4.2).
OPERATION
To change the pressure measurement mode, press [MODE] from any run screen. The resulting
display depends on the PG7000 Model:
The cursor is on the number corresponding to the current measurement mode.
Measurement mode:
Measurement mode:
1gauge 2abs 3HLdif
1g 2avac 3aatm 4dif
PG7102, PG7202, PG7302 [MODE] Screen
PG7601 [MODE] Screen
For PG7102, PG7202 and PG7302, selecting <2abs> accesses absolute by ATM mode
(see PRINCIPLE above).
For PG7102, PG7202 and PG7302 selecting <3HLdif> accesses high line differential mode
(see PRINCIPLE above and Section 3.9.4.2).
For PG7601, selecting <2avac> accesses absolute by vacuum mode. Selecting <3aatm>
accesses absolute by ATM mode.
Selecting <4dif> accesses differential mode
(see PRINCIPLE above and Section 3.9.4.1).
Making a measurement mode selection returns to the previous run screen with the selected
mode active.
When using an AMH automated mass handler, be sure to apply drive vacuum to the AMH
when switching operation to absolute by vacuum mode (see the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and
Maintenance Manual).
3.9.4.1
DIFFERENTIAL MEASUREMENT MODE (PG7601 ONLY)
PURPOSE
To define gauge pressures near and under atmospheric pressure that cannot be
covered in conventional gauge mode; to define pressures at a static pressure
near atmospheric pressure but other than atmospheric pressure.
Differential mode operation is only supported by PG7601. Differential mode
operation requires that the PG7601 SETUP AtmP selection be for an external
barometer connected to COM2 (see Section 3.10, 3.11.5.4). Differential mode
operation also requires the PG7000 Differential Mode Interconnections Kit P/N
3070127, which includes the Differential Mode Controller.
Page 53
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRINCIPLE
Differential mode is designed to allow PG7601 to define pressures which piston
gauges have typically not covered or for which they have been difficult to use.
This includes positive and negative gauge pressures right around zero, for
example ± 2.5 kPa (10 in. H2O); as well as low differential pressures at low
absolute static pressures, for example 0 to 2.5 kPa (20 Torr) at 15 kPa absolute
(2.2 psia) static pressure.
The principal of differential mode is to define a differential pressure as the
difference between an absolute pressure relative to vacuum and a second
absolute pressure (the static pressure) measured by a precision Reference
Pressure Monitor (RPM). An offsetting procedure “tares” the RPM so that the
uncertainty contributed to the differential pressure by the RPM’s measurement is
a function of the RPM resolution and short term repeatability rather than its
absolute accuracy and long term stability.
For differential mode operation, the static pressure is set to the desired value as
measured by the RPM (atmospheric pressure for gauge pressure
measurements). Then RPM offset at the static pressure is determined by
applying the static pressure as defined by the PG7601 following:
RPMoffset = PGRPMstart - RPMindicate
Where:
PGRPMstart
=
Pressure applied by PG7601 to RPM
(nominally equal to RPMstart)
RPMindicate
=
RPM reading when PGRPMstart is applied
to RPM test port
Once the RPM offset has been determined, differential pressures are defined by
subtracting the static pressure measured by the RPM from an absolute pressure
defined by the PG7601 following:
PGdif = PGabs - RPMcurrent - RPMoffset
Where:
Pgdif
=
Differential pressure defined by PG7601
Pgabs
=
Absolute pressure defined by PG7601
RPMcurrent
=
Current RPM indication of static pressure
RPMoffset
=
Disagreement between PG7601 and RPM at
the operating static pressure
For differential mode operation, the PG7000 Differential Mode Interconnections
Kit should be used to provide the DUT high and low test connections and support
the RPM offsetting procedure (see Figure 9 and Section 3.9.4.1). A precision
Reference Pressure Monitor, such as a DHI RPM, must be selected for the AtmP
source in SETUP (see Section 3.10, 3.11.5.4).
PG7601 differential measurement mode manages the data acquisition and
handling to support differential mode operation without operator effort.
Differential mode operation requires setting the static pressure at which
differential measurements are to be made and regular determination of the RPM
offset. These functions are supported under [MODE], <4dif>.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 54
3. GENERAL OPERATION
1. PG/STATIC P
CONTROL Port
2. PG Port
3. TEST HIGH
Port (Quick
Connection)
4. TEST LOW
Port (Quick
Connection)
5. 1/8 in. NPT F or
4T Quick
Connector
6. STATIC P Port
7. STATIC P
SUPPLY Port
8. CONTROL
SELECTION
Valve
9. PG SHUTOFF
Valve
10. TEST BYPASS
Valve
11. Reference
Pressure
Monitor (RPM)
(Optional)
12. STATIC P
SELECTION
Valve
13. Static Pressure
Exhaust
(Internal)
Figure 10. Differential Mode Controller Schematic
DHI Technical Note 9940TN02 provides more detailed information on
differential mode principles and includes a complete uncertainty analysis. Consult
DHI or visit www.dhinstruments.com.
OPERATION
To select differential mode operation and access differential mode functions
press [MODE] and select <4dif>.
Differential mode operation includes:
•
Selecting differential mode, setting static pressure and finding the RPM offset
(see Section 3.9.4.1, Selecting Differential Mode, Setting Static Pressure,
Finding RPM Offset (<1run>).
•
Operating in differential
Differential Mode).
•
Viewing differential mode static pressure and RPM offset
Section 3.9.4.1, Viewing Static Pressure and RPM Offset (<2view>).
(see
•
Selecting Differential
Offset (<1run>)
RPM
mode
Mode,
Page 55
(see
Setting
Section
Static
3.9.4.1,
Pressure,
Operating
Finding
In
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
To operate in differential mode and/or execute the RPM offset determination
procedure, the AtmP selection under SETUP must be external (COM2) (see Section
3.10). If this is not the case, an error message will be displayed (<Dif mode requires
COM2 AtmP SETUP>) when attempting to activate differential mode.
To select differential mode operation and/or execute the RPM offset determination
procedure, press [MODE] and select <4dif>, <1run>. The display is:
1.
Current value of RPM offset. Always in Pascal
[Pa].
Offset:
9.03 Pa
New offset? 1no 2yes
Select <1no> to use the existing RPM offset and return the previous run screen
in differential mode (see Section 3.9.4.1, Operating in Differential Mode).
The RPM offset should be redetermined any time the static pressure value is
changed, as well as at the beginning of each calibration or test sequence. If the
difference in the value of the RPM offset in subsequent determinations is < 0.1 Pa,
then less frequent offset determinations may be considered.
Select <2yes> to proceed with a new determination of the RPM offset
(see Section 3.9.4.1, PRINCIPAL. The display is:
Set RPM P & [ENT]
1.
Current pressure reading of the RPM in the
current units of.
96.57785 kPa a
Table 16. Valve Settings for Setting Differential Mode Static Pressure
VALVE
Control Selection
VALVE SETTING
Static P
PG Shutoff
Closed
Test Bypass
Open
Static P Selection
Off
If static pressure is atmospheric
pressure VENT or OFF
With the Differential Mode Controller valves (see Figure 9) set as indicated
in Table 16 use the system’s pressure control component to set the desired static
pressure value as read by the RPM.
If the desired static pressure is atmospheric pressure (for example, for low gauge
and negative gauge differential pressures), set the STATIC P SELECTION valve
to VENT.
If a REFERENCE VOLUME is connected to the STATIC P port and the desired
static pressure is less than atmospheric pressure, consider setting the STATIC P
SELECTION VALVE to SUPPLY. This will connect the pressure setting vacuum
source directly to the reference volume and reduce pull down time.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 56
3. GENERAL OPERATION
Be sure the TEST BYPASS valve is in the OPEN position before adjusting the
static pressure. Failure to do so will cause differential pressure to be generated
across the HIGH and LOW TEST ports which may overpressure the DUT.
When the static pressure, as indicated
by the RPM, has been set to the desired
value, press [ENTER]. PG7000 reads
the RPM and calculates the mass to load
on PG7000 to set the pressure value
indicated by the RPM. The display is:
Load mass & vac:
9.2 kg & 32.47 g
When using an AMH automated mass handler, the mass value to set the value
indicated by the RPM is always loaded with resolution of 0.1 kg. This is to avoid
having to break the reference vacuum to load trim masses. The differential pressure
values are loaded with the resolution specified in [RES] (see Section 3.9.10).
This is the standard nominal mass loading in instruction display of pressure to mass
mode (see Section 3.9.11.1). The mass loading instruction is always given with 0.01
g resolution regardless of the current mass loading resolution setting (see Section
3.9.10). Load the mass value following PG7000 mass loading protocol (see Section
3.6). If an AMH-38 automated mass handler is being used, the mass is loaded
automatically and default mass loading reasolution of 0.1 kg is used.
Set the PG7000 Differential Mode Controller (see Figure 9) to apply the pressure
defined by the PG7000 to the RPM (see Table 17).
Table 17. Valve Settings to Apply PG7000 Pressure
to the RPM for Differential Mode Offsetting
VALVE
Control Selection
VALVE SETTING
PG
PG Shutoff
Open
Test Bypass
Open
Static P Selection
Off
If static pressure is atmospheric
pressure VENT or OFF
Once the valves have been properly set and the mass has been loaded, install
the bell jar and establish vacuum under the bell jar. Then press [ENTER].
The display is:
1.
Current pressure reading of the RPM in the
current units of measure.
2.
Standard main run screen piston position
indication (see Section 3.7).
3.
Current RPM offset (pressure applied by
PG7000 - RPM indication). Indicates
******* if the value is > 9999.99 Pa.
Pressure unit of measure is always
Pascal [Pa].
Page 57
<<* 99.9785 kPa a h
-3.5
Off: -7.89 Pa
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Float and rotate the PG7000 piston.
When the PG7000 is ready
(see Section 3.4), press [ENTER]. Wait about 6 seconds while the PG7000
takes and averages multiple readings. The display is:
1.
RPM offset currently in use.
Old offset: -7.72 Pa
2.
New RPM offset just measured.
New offset: -7.89 Pa
To record the new RPM offset and go to the previous run screen in differential
mode with the new RPM offset active, press [ENTER].
To return to the <New offset?> screen, press [ESCAPE].
See Section 3.9.4.1, Operating in Differential Mode, for information on differential
mode operation.
The value of the RPM offset typically should be inside of ± 20 Pa. An RPM
offset value outside of this range may indicate a poorly calibrated RPM or a problem
with the offset determination procedure.
The difference between the RPM offset at the beginning and at the end of a
test will be reflected as zero drift of the differential pressures defined during the
test. To quantify this value, perform the RPM offset procedure at the beginning and
at the end of a test and evaluate the difference between the starting and ending
RPM offset values.
Operating in Differential Mode
Differential mode is often used to calibrate DUTs with very low differential
pressure ranges. These can easily be over pressured and damaged by inadvertently
applying excessive pressure to one port. OPEN the MPC1-D BYPASS valve to zero the
differential across the DUT when there is a risk of overpressure.
From a practical standpoint, operating in differential mode is nearly identical to
operating in absolute by vacuum mode (see Section 3.9.11). Unless and AMH-38
automated mass handler is used, vacuum under the bell jar must be broken to make
mass load changes and reestablished to set a pressure.
Operation is in either pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode
(see Section 3.9.12).
To operate in differential mode, set the PG7000 Differential Mode Controller
(see Figure 9) to apply pressure defined by PG7000 to the high side of the DUT
(see Table 18).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 58
3. GENERAL OPERATION
Table 18. Valve Settings for Operating in Differential Mode
VALVE
Control Selection
VALVE SETTING
To adjust pressure under PG7000 piston: PG
To adjust static pressure: STATIC P
PG Shutoff
Piston is floating or near floating: OPEN
Any other time: CLOSED
Test Bypass
To make differential pressure measurements: CLOSED
Static P Selection
OFF
To set or check DUT zero: OPEN
If static pressure is atmospheric pressure: VENT or OFF
For the highest quality differential mode measurements, use consistent
conditions for static pressure and PG7000 vacuum reference pressure at each point.
Set the PG7000 Differential Mode Interconnections Kit CONTROL valve to STATIC P
to readjust the static pressure to the same value at each point if necessary. This
value should be the same as the value at which the RPM offset was determined.
Typical Differential Mode Operational Sequence
See Figure 9 for a schematic of the Differential Mode Controller and its valves.
Set RPM offset at desired static pressure (see Section 3.9.4.1, Selecting
Differential Mode, Setting Static Pressure, Finding RPM Offset (<1run>)).
Select pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode (see Section 3.9.12).
Put the Differential Mode Controller PG SHUTOFF valve in CLOSED position.
If desired, read DUT output at zero differential pressure with
TEST BYPASS valve open. Put TEST BYPASS valve in CLOSED position. If
desired, put CONTROL valve in STATIC P position and use system control
component to adjust static pressure to starting value.
Press [ENTER] and enter a pressure or mass value. Load mass as instructed
on PG7000.
Install bell jar on PG7000, shut the PG7000 vacuum vent valve, open vacuum
reference shutoff valve. Wait for vacuum under bell jar to reach Ready
condition. If using AMH-38 automated mass handler and mass loading
resolution of 0.1kg, mass can be changed without breaking vacuum.
Put CONTROL valve in PG position and use system control component to float
PG7000 piston. Slowly put PG SHUTOFF valve into OPEN position. Readjust
pressure to float the PG7000 piston if necessary.
If desired, put CONTROL valve in STATIC P position and use system control
component to adjust static pressure to starting value.
When PG7000 indicates Ready on all Ready/Not Ready indicators, take DUT
reading at differential pressure indicated on the top line of the PG7000 display.
Slowly put PG SHUTOFF valve in CLOSED position.
Shut vacuum reference shutoff valve, open vacuum vent valve. Wait for
pressure under bell jar to return to ambient. Remove bell jar. This step is not
necessary is using AMH-38 automated mass handler and mass loading
resolution of 0.1 kg.
Page 59
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Repeat Steps
through
for each desired differential pressure point.
Setting Zero Differential Pressure
See Figure 9 for a schematic of the Differential Mode Controller and its valves.
Zero differential pressure can be set by PG7000 or simply by setting the
Differential Mode Controller TEST BYPASS valve to the OPEN position which
connects the HIGH and LOW TEST ports together. The TEST BYPASS valve
OPEN position is a “true” zero. The zero differential pressure value set by
PG7000 has the same uncertainty as any other differential pressure point (see
Section 1.2.4.1). Comparing the DUT reading at zero set by TEST BYPASS in
the OPEN position and at zero set by PG7000 in differential mode like any other
differential pressure, can help quantify the quality of the current RPM
offset value. If the difference between the two zero readings is excessive, the
RPM offset value should be redetermined (see Section 3.9.4.1, Selecting
Differential Mode, Setting Static Pressure, Finding RPM Offset (<1run>)).
Also, consider correcting all the DUT readings by the difference in the zero
reading found in the two different conditions to correct for the defect in the
RPM offset.
Viewing Static Pressure and RPM Offset (<2view>)
To view the current RPM offset and the static pressure value at which the offset
was recorded, press [MODE] and select <4dif>, <2view>. This display is:
1.
RPM offset value that is currently active.
2.
PG7000 pressure at which RPM offset was
recorded.
Offset:
-6.33 Pa
@99.8755 kPa a
Press [ESCAPE] to return to the <Differential mode:> menu.
Press [ENTER] to return to the previous run screen.
3.9.4.2
HIGH LINE DIFFERENTIAL MEASUREMENT MODE
(PG7102, PG7302 AND PG7202 ONLY)
PURPOSE
To define differential pressures at elevated line pressures up to 11 MPa (1 600 psi)
with PG7102 or 110 MPa (16 000 psi) with PG7202 in gas and up to 500 MPa
(72 500 psi) in oil.
High line differential (HL dif) mode operation is only supported by PG7102,
PG7202 and PG7302. HL dif mode operation requires the use of a two identical
PG7102, PG7202 or PG7302s in tandem. Both PG7000s must have nominally
identical piston-cylinders and one of the PG7000s must have a “tare” pistoncylinder. The HL dif mode setup for pressure up to 110 MPa (1 600 psi) in gas
normally also includes an MPC1-D-1000 or MPC1-D-3000 manual pressure controller
and the PK-7100-MPCD-DIF Interconnections Kit P/N 3070226. The HL dif mode
setup for pressure greater than 110 MPa uses GPC1 (gas), OPG1 or MPG1 (oil) and
custom interconnecting hardware.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 60
3. GENERAL OPERATION
PRINCIPLE
DHI Technical Note 0080TN03 provides more detailed information on high line
differential mode principles including a complete uncertainty analysis. Consult DHI or
visit our website, www.dhinstruments.com to obtain a copy.
High line differential mode is designed to allow two PG7102, PG7202 or PG7302
piston gauges to be used together to define differential pressures relative to line
pressures significantly above atmospheric pressure. This capability is most often
used to test or calibrate differential pressure devices designed to operate at elevated
line pressures under their normal operating line pressure conditions.
The main challenge of defining differential pressures at elevated line pressures
comes from the very high ratio of line pressure to differential pressure. Relatively
small errors and instabilities in the line pressure are very large relative to the
differential pressure.
The principal of high line differential mode is to “crossfloat” two PG7000 piston
gauges so that they define a common line pressure. After the crossfloat is
completed, a BYPASS valve is closed isolating one PG7000 from the other. The
“tare” PG7000 maintains the line pressure. Mass is added to the “reference”
PG7000 to define differential pressures “on top of” the line pressure. The very high
precision of the PG7000 gas operated piston gauges allows them to set and
maintain a common line pressure with uncertainty much lower than the overall
measurement uncertainty on either piston gauge. The two PG7000s are
crossfloated at the line pressure prior to making differential measurement to
minimize the contribution of line pressure errors to differential pressure. The
crossfloating procedure consists of making mass adjustments on the tare
PG7000 so that both pistons, when connected together at the line pressure, fall
at their “natural” drop rate. PG7000’s embedded piston fall rate measurements
and calculations capabilities are used to assist the operator in performing the
crossfloat.
The PG7000 that is used only to maintain the line pressure on the low side of the
device under test (DUT) is designated the tare PG7000. The tare PG7000 is a
standard PG7000 but it is normally used with a tare piston-cylinder and a tare mass
set (a standard piston-cylinder and mass set may also be used). A tare pistoncylinder effective area is entered as the nominal effective area and its
characteristics include k(P), which must be entered in the piston-cylinder
definition file (see Section 3.11.1.1). A tare mass set has the same configuration
as a standard mass set but the exact values of the masses are not measured
and the mass set is set up using nominal values for each mass measured value
(see Section 3.11.1.6). The tare piston mass is adjusted to be slightly under the
nominal piston mass. This assures that the tare side will always be the light side
when crossfloated with the reference side. If a tare piston-cylinder and mass
set is not used on the tare PG7000, the tare side may not be the light side in a
crossfloat. In this case, the tare mass load on the reference side should be
increased slightly (generally < 1 g) to ensure that it is heavier, taking care not to
confuse the added tare mass with the subsequent differential mass load.
The PG7000 that is used to apply the added pressure to create the differential
pressures on the high side of the DUT is designated the reference PG7000.
The reference PG7000 is a standard PG7102, PG7202 or PG7302 with a
standard piston-cylinder and mass set. The reference must be a PG7102,
PG7202 or PG7302. The tare may be a PG7102, PG7202, PG7302 or a
PG7601.
Page 61
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The tare and reference PG7000s must have nominally identical piston-cylinders.
The two PG7000s operate together with the reference acting as “master” and
the tare as “slave”. For communications between the two to occur, COM2 of the
reference must be connected to COM1 of the tare with a valid RS232 cable and
proper settings must be made on both interfaces (see Section 3.11.5.1).
For high line differential mode operation up to 11 MPa (1 600 psi) in gas, an
MPC1-D and the PK-7100-MPCD-DIF Interconnections Kit P/N 401645 should
be used to provide the DUT high and low test connections and support line
pressure and differential pressure setting procedures (see Figure 10). For
operation at pressure greater than 11 MPa, GPC1 for gas, OPG1 or MPG1 for
oil, and custom interconnecting hardware are used in a functionally similar setup.
PG7000 high line differential measurement mode manages the data acquisition
and handling necessary to support differential mode operation. Differential mode
operation requires setting the line pressure including crossfloating the two
PG7000 piston gauges and then setting differential pressures at the line
pressure.
These two independent operations are supported under
[MODE], <3HLdif>, <1run>.
High line differential mode relies upon the very high sensitivity of PG7000 gas
operated piston-cylinders to set and stabilize low differential pressures relative to
very high line pressures. To meet the full performance potential of PG7000 high line
differential mode operation, external influences on the piston gauges must be
minimized. Air currents and vibrations are the most significant possible influences.
Do not operate near an active air conditioning or heating duct, avoid opening and
closing doors or any movement of personnel around the system. Consider putting
the PG7000s in an electrostatic free enclosure if the environment cannot be
adequately controlled.
See Section 7.2.1 for information on the exact calculations used by PG7000 to
obtain the differential pressures defined in high line differential mode.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 62
3. GENERAL OPERATION
1.
Tare PG7000 (PG7102, PG7202, PG7302, or
PG7601)
2.
Differential Device Under Test (DUT
3.
Reference PG7000 (PG7102, PG7202 or
PG7302)
4.
5.
MPC1-D or other Hi Variable Volume (Hi VV)
6.
MPC1-D or other VENT Valve
7.
MPC1-D or other HI/LO BYPASS Valve
8.
MPC1-D or other Lo Variable Volume (Lo VV)
MPC1-D or other INLET Valve
Figure 11. High Line Differential Mode Schematic
DHI Technical Note 0080TN03 provides more detailed information on high line
differential mode principles using PG7102 and PG7601 piston gauges and includes a
complete uncertainty analysis.
Consult DHI or visit our website,
www.dhinstruments.com to obtain a copy.
OPERATION
High line differential mode does not support operation with AMH automated
mass handler(s).
To select high line differential mode operation and access differential mode
functions press [MODE], <3HLdif> on the reference PG7000.
When operating in high line differential pressure mode, the reference PG7000
is “master” and the tare PG7000is “slave”. All operator interaction is with the PG
Terminal of the reference PG7000. The tare’s display is for information only. The
tare PG7000 keypad is inactive.
Page 63
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
High line differential mode operation includes:
•
Entering differential mode (see Section 3.9.4.2, Entering High Line
Differential Mode ([MODE], <3HLdif>, <1run>)).
•
Setting a line pressure (see Section 3.9.4.2, Setting a Line Pressure
([MODE], <3HLdif>, <1run>, <2yes>)).
•
Setting differential pressures at a high line pressure (see Section 3.9.4.2,
Setting Differential Pressures at a High Line Pressure).
•
Viewing current line pressure and natural fall rates for the line pressure (see
Section 3.9.4.2, Viewing Line Pressure, Starting Piston-Cylinder
Temperatures and Natural Piston Fall Rates ([MODE], <3HLdif>, <2view>).
Entering High Line Differential Mode ([MODE], <3HLdif>, <1run>)
To enter high line differential mode, press [MODE] ,<3HLdif>, <1run> on the
reference PG7000’s PG Terminal.
The reference PG7000 initializes high line differential mode. To successfully enter
high line differential mode the reference PG7000 must be able to communicate
with the tare PG7000, the piston-cylinders in both PG7000s must be nominally
identical and the piston-cylinder in the tare PG7000 must have a non-zero value
for k(P) in its piston-cylinder module file. When initializing high line differential
mode, the reference PG7000 tests for these conditions and provides error
messages as follows:
•
<Cannot find PG7000 on COM2>: COM2 of the reference PG7000 must be
connected to COM1 of the tare PG7000 using a valid RS232 cable and both
interfaces must be properly set so that communications between the two
PG7000s can occur (see Sections 3.11.5.1, 3.11.5.4). If the reference is
unable to communicate with the tare, this error message is displayed. If this
error message is observed, correct the communications problem and retry
(see Section 3.11.5.1).
•
<T & R PCs not a pair, cannot run HLdif>: The piston-cylinder modules in
the two PG7000s must be nominally identical (have the same nominal mass
to pressure conversion coefficient). If the reference PG7000 finds the two
piston-cylinder modules to be different, this error message is displayed.
If this error message is observed, correct the situation by changing pistoncylinder selection or adjusting one piston-cylinder’s definition (see Sections 3.9.2,
3.11.1.2).
•
<No T PC in T PG7000, cannot run HLdif>: The piston-cylinder module
selected in the tare PG7000 must have a non-zero value for k(P) in the
active piston-cylinder module file. If the k(P) value is zero, this error
message is displayed. If this error message is observed, correct the
situation by providing a non-zero value for k(P) in the piston-cylinder module
file of the tare piston-cylinder (see Section 3.11.1.2).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 64
3. GENERAL OPERATION
After high line differential mode is initialized, the display of the tare PG7000 is:
1.
Standard Ready/Not Ready indicators for the
tare PG7000.
2.
Last line pressure set in the pressure unit of
measure that was active when the line
pressure was set. The unit of measure
remains the same, even if the reference
PG7000’s unit of measure is changed, until a
new line pressure is set.
< 1000.70 psi
LP
- 3.7 30.3 kg + trim
3.
Label indicating that the mass load includes whatever trim masses were loaded on the tare
piston in the crossfloating process to reach equilibrium.
4.
Tare mass load for the last line pressure set.
5.
Current piston position of the tare PG7000.
While in high line differential pressure mode, the tare PG Terminal keypad
is inactive.
After high line differential mode is initialized, the display of the reference PG7000 is:
1.
Current (last set) value of line pressure in
current pressure unit of measure.
Line P:
1000 psi
New line P? 1no 2yes
Select <1no> to use the existing line pressure settings and return to the previous
run screen in high line differential measurement mode (see Section 3.9.4.2,
Setting Differential Pressures at a High Line Pressure).
Select <2yes> to set a new line pressure value or repeat the line pressure
setting procedure at the current line pressure value (see Section 3.9.4.2, Setting
a Line Pressure ([MODE], <3HLdif>, <1run>, <2yes>)).
The line pressure setting procedure must be executed each time the line
pressure is changed and should be executed at the beginning of each differential
pressure calibration sequence even if the line pressure is the same as the line
pressure previously used. Select <2yes> to go to the line setting procedure.
Setting a Line Pressure ([MODE], <3HLdif>, <1run>, <2yes>)
To meet the full performance potential of PG7000 high line differential mode
operation, external influences on the piston gauges must be reduced or eliminated.
Air currents and vibrations are the most significant possible influences. Do not
operate near an active air conditioning or heating duct, avoid opening and closing
doors or any movement of personnel around the system.
Leaks at any point in the test system are highly detrimental to measurement
results in high line differential mode. Thoroughly leak check the system before
operation and correct any leaks detected.
Page 65
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Setting a line pressure has two steps:
Setting the line pressure and determining the natural fall rates of the tare and
reference pistons.
Performing a crossfloat of the pistons to reach equilibrium and minimize
differential pressure zero offset.
To set a line pressure press [MODE], <3HLdif>, <1run>, <2yes> on the
reference PG7000’s PG Terminal. The display is:
Target line P:
1.
Edit field for entry of desired line pressure
value in current pressure unit of measure.
Defaults to last value used.
1000 psi
Values of line pressure are always entered and displayed in gauge mode
(i.e., relative to atmospheric pressure). Line pressure mass loading instructions are
always given with 0.1 kg resolution. The minimum line pressure is the pressure resulting
when the mass of the piston + mass bell is loaded.
Enter the desired line pressure value.
The next display indicates the mass to
load to set the line pressure.
Load nominal mass on
T & R: 33.3 kg
This display corresponds to the standard mass loading instruction display of
pressure to mass mode (see Section 3.9.11.1). The mass loading instruction is
always given with 0.1 kg resolution regardless of the current mass loading
resolution setting (see Section 3.9.10). Load the indicated mass on both the tare
and reference PG7000s following PG7000 mass loading protocol using main
and fractional masses only (do not use trim masses) (see Section 3.6). Press
[ENTER] when ready.
Line pressure mass instructions are always given with 0.1 kg resolution. This is
to preserve the smaller masses for setting the differential pressure. The differential
pressure mass loading instructions follow conventional PG7000 mass loading
protocol using the masses that remain after the line pressure has been set. It may
be necessary to select the line pressure value to assure that adequate masses
remain to set the desired differential pressure. For example, if the line pressure
requires loading 33.3 kg, a 0.2 and 0.1 kg mass will be used to set the line pressure
and will not be available if needed to set the desired differential pressure. If this
situation occurs, consider changing the line pressure so that it is set using a whole
number of kilograms, in this example 33 or 34 kg.
Open bypass, float T
The display is:
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Close bypass,[ENTER]
Page 66
3. GENERAL OPERATION
With the system’s BYPASS valve OPEN (see Figure 10), use the INLET and/or
VENT valve and the high side variable volume to adjust the pressure to float the
piston of the tare PG7000. This should cause the reference PG7000 piston to
be at its bottom stop. Once the tare piston is floating, close the system’s
BYPASS valve and press [ENTER]. The next display is:
1.
Tare piston position.
2.
Reference piston position.
+1.2 mm –3.6
Set
T & R to + 1.0&[ENT]
Use the high and/or low side variable volume to set both pistons to a position just
above + 1.0 mm. Ensure that both pistons are rotating. As both pistons fall
through the + 1.0 position, press [ENTER]. PG7000 pauses for 5 seconds and
then measures the natural fall rates of both pistons for 30 seconds.
1.
Indication of tare piston position.
2.
Indication of reference piston position.
3.
30 second count down.
T+1.0 mm R+1.0
Finding rates
29
Wait for the 30 second timer to count down while the measurements are made.
Be sure not to interfere with the free movement of the piston-cylinders during
the countdown. After the countdown completes, the results are displayed:
1.
Average fall rate of the taring piston.
2.
Average fall rate of the reference piston.
T-0.9 mm/min R-1.1
3.
Difference between the reference and taring
piston fall rates (R - T). This is the “natural fall
rate difference”.
∆-0.2 Save 1yes 2no
The “natural fall rate difference” is the difference between the fall rates of the
two pistons when they are floating naturally at the line pressure. When performing
the crossfloat between the pistons in the next step of line pressure setting, the
objective will be to adjust the mass of the tare piston until the “crossfloat fall rate
difference” measured with the system’s BYPASS valve open is equal to the “natural
fall rate difference” measured with the BYPASS closed.
Select <2no> to repeat the “natural fall
rate difference” measurement.
Select
<2yes> to accept the “natural fall rate
difference” value and continue to the
second step of line pressure setting which
is crossfloating the two piston-cylinders.
The display is:
Page 67
Open bypass and
[ENTER] to xfloat
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Open the BYPASS valve and press [ENTER] to proceed with the crossfloat. The
display is:
1.
Tare piston position.
2.
Reference piston position.
3.
Difference between the “natural fall rate
difference” and the “crossfloat fall rate
difference” in mm/min. This is the “equilibrium
fall rate”.
T-1.2 mm R+0.5
∆+1.2 B/P open,[ENT]
The “equilibrium fall rate” is the difference between the “natural fall rate
difference” and the “crossfloat fall rate difference”:
Equilibrium fall rate = (Rnat - Tnat) - (Rxfloat -Txfloat)
When the “equilibrium fall rate” is zero, the two piston-cylinders are at equilibrium at
the line pressure.
Crossfloat the two pistons to find equilibrium by making mass adjustments on the
tare piston. Finding equilibrium is an iterative process which is assisted by PG7000.
Pressing [ENTER] starts an automated fall rate measurement sequence that
measures the fall rates more precisely than the real time indication. Following a
30 second countdown or when one of the pistons has moved more than 1 mm,
PG7000 displays the measured “equilibrium fall rate” and suggests the mass
adjustment needed on the tare piston to achieve an “equilibrium fall rate” of zero.
This process can be repeated as many times as desired.
If a standard piston-cylinder and mass set (rather than a tare piston-cylinder
and mass set) is being used in the tare PG7000, the tare piston may be the heavy
one at the start of the crossfloat (see Section 3.9.4.2, PRINCIPLE).
In this case, rather than reduce mass on the tare PG7000, add a small amount of
mass to the reference PG7000 before starting the crossfloat so that the tare
piston will be the lighter one (generally < 1 g is needed). This will simplify the
crossfloating procedure and subsequent differential mass loading. Be sure not to
confuse the additional tare mass on the reference piston with the subsequent
differential mass loads.
Using trim masses (50 g and below) from the trim mass set, adjust the mass load
on the tare PG7000 to establish equilibrium (“equilibrium fall rate” near zero).
When the mass adjustments are complete, close the BYPASS valve and put
both pistons at a position just above 0.0 mm. Ensure that both pistons are
rotating. As the pistons fall through the 0.0 mm point, OPEN the BYPASS valve,
then press [ENTER]. After a 5 second delay for stabilization, PG7000 begins the
fall rate measurement. The display is:
1.
Indication of tare piston position.
2.
Indication of reference piston position.
3.
30 second count down.
4.
Average “equilibrium fall rate” since start of
the countdown.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 68
T +0.1 mm R +0.0
∆-12.2 Xfloating
30
3. GENERAL OPERATION
PG7000 is measuring the drop rate of the two pistons and calculating the
“equilibrium fall rate”. Be sure to not interfere with the free movement of the
piston-cylinders or to introduce any outside interference while the countdown
occurs. The fall rate measurement continues until either piston has moved 1 mm
or 30 seconds have elapsed. The measurement can also be concluded by
pressing [ENTER]. When the fall rate measurement has concluded, the results
are displayed:
1.
Average “equilibrium fall rate” measured in
last crossfloat.
2.
Suggested mass change (in grams) on the
tare (T) piston to achieve equilibrium based on
equilibrium fall rate just measured.
∆-10.3 +0.050 g on T
Repeat 1yes 2no
Evaluate the quality of the equilibrium. Check the value of the “equilibrium fall rate”.
Consider that the closer the rate is to zero, the better the equilibrium; consider that
the suggested mass change on the tare piston times the mass to pressure
conversion coefficient of the piston approximates the pressure value of the defect in
the equilibrium. Check the difference between the DUT output with the BYPASS
open and BYPASS closed to evaluate the zero error due to the equilibrium.
Select <1yes> to return to the crossfloat <B/P open, [ENTER]> screen.
If you are satisfied with the quality of the equilibrium, select <2no> to go to the
run screen in high line differential pressure mode and set differential pressures at
this line pressure (see Section 3.9.4.2, Setting Differential Pressures at a High
Line Pressure).
The value of the average “equilibrium fall rate” measured by the crossfloat
should typically be inside of ± 5 mm/min and/or the suggested mass adjustment
should be inside of 50 mg.
The device under test (DUT) can often be used to evaluate the quality of the
equilibrium between the two pistons and to correct for the zero error caused by the
defect in equilibrium. Observe the change in the DUT output when the system
BYPASS valve is opened and closed with the pistons floating. With the system
BYPASS valve open, by definition, the differential pressure applied to the DUT is zero.
The change in the DUT output observed when the BYPASS valve is closed with the
pistons floating is the zero error due to the defect in the crossfloat equilibrium.
Consider correcting all of the DUT readings by the value of this offset to correct for
the crossfloat zero error. When using the offset, keep in mind that, due to
differential evolution of the two PG7000 piston-cylinder temperatures, the
differential pressure at zero differential mass load may not be zero.
Setting Differential Pressures at a High Line Pressure
To meet the full performance potential of PG7000 high line differential mode
operation, external influences on the piston gauges must be reduced or eliminated. Air
currents and vibrations are the most significant possible influences. Do not operate
near an active air conditioning or heating duct, avoid opening and closing doors or
any movement of personnel around the system.
Page 69
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
It is not possible to operate in differential mode with leaks at any point in the
test system. Thoroughly leak check the system before operation and correct any
leaks detected.
High line differential mode is often used to calibrate DUTs whose differential
pressure range is very low relative to the line pressure. These DUTs can easily be over
pressured by inadvertently applying excessive pressure to one port. When operating
in high line differential pressure mode, OPEN the system BYPASS valve to zero the
differential across the DUT when there is any risk of overpressure.
Before operating in differential mode the line pressure must be set (see Section
3.9.4.2, Setting a Line Pressure ([MODE], <3HLdif>, <1run>, <2yes>)).
Once the line pressure is set, from a practical standpoint, operating in high line
differential mode is very similar to operating in gauge mode (see Section 3.9.11).
All operator interaction is with the PG Terminal of the reference PG7000. The PG
Terminal of the tare PG7000 is for display only. The tare PG7000 PG Terminal
keypad is locked out during high line differential mode operation.
Operation is in either pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode
(see Section 3.9.12).
To operate in differential mode the system BYPASS valve must be closed (see
Figure 10).
All mass loading and unloading to define differential pressures is made on the
reference PG7000. Mass loading and unloading instructions follow conventional
PG7000 mass loading protocol (see Section 3.6) but the differential mass loading
instructions are “on top of” the line pressure mass load. The mass load
corresponding to the line pressure on the tare and reference PG7000s must
remain exactly the same throughout the differential measurements.
While in high line differential mode, the piston position and piston rotation
Ready/Not Ready indicators on the reference PG7000 reflect the status of both
the tare and the reference PG7000s. For the indicator to indicate Ready, both
the tare and the reference PG7000s must meet their current Ready/Not Ready
criteria (see Section 3.4). A <T> in a Ready/Not Ready status indicator indicates
that the tare PG7000 is Not Ready.
When operating in high line differential mode, the measurement mode
indicating character directly to the right of the pressure unit of measure in the main
run screen is <d> (see Section 37).
Zero differential pressure (BYPASS valve closed) can be set by the system.
In some cases, the differential mass to load to set zero is not zero. This is normal
and can occur due to differential changes in the temperature of the tare and
reference piston-cylinders after the original line pressure crossfloat. A differential
piston-cylinder module temperature change while running in high line differential
mode affects the line pressure causing an offset to the differential pressure. The
offset to the differential pressure causes a non-zero differential mass load to be
needed to set zero differential pressure (see Section 7.2.1). Conversely, and for the
same reason, a differential mass load of zero may not result in a differential
pressure of zero.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 70
3. GENERAL OPERATION
Typical Sequence to Set Differential Pressures at a High Line Pressure
Set the desired line pressure (see Section 3.9.4.2, Setting a Line
Pressure ([MODE], <3HLdif>, <1run>, <2yes>)).
Select pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode (see Section 3.9.12).
If desired, read DUT output at zero differential pressure with BYPASS valve
OPEN. Then, put the BYPASS valve in CLOSED position. Float both
PG7000 pistons before operating the BYPASS valve. Read DUT output at
zero as defined by the PG7000s if desired (this value can be used as an
offset correction on subsequent DUT differential pressure outputs).
Press [ENTER] and enter a pressure or mass value. All mass loading and
unloading to define differential pressures is performed on the
reference PG7000. Follow normal PG7000 mass loading protocol (see
Section 3.6). Note, however, that the mass loading instructions are “on top
of” the mass already loaded to define the line pressure.
The mass corresponding to the line pressure must remain exactly the same
on both the tare and reference PG7000s throughout the differential
pressure measurements.
Float the tare and reference pistons. For best results put both pistons
slightly above the 0.0 point, for example +0.3 mm.
When the reference PG7000 indicates Ready on both Ready/Not Ready
indicators (see Section 3.4), take the D U T r e a d i n g a t t h e d i f f e r e n t i a l
p r e s s u r e i n d i c a t e d o n t h e t o p l i n e o f the reference display. For best
results log DUT readings and average them over time while the PG7000
pistons fall through the 0.0 mm point. Averaging for 10 to 30 seconds allows
the random pressure noise from piston rotation to be integrated and
eliminated.
Repeat Steps
through
for each desired differential pressure point.
If the last differential pressure is zero, consider reading the DUT output with
the BYPASS valve CLOSED. Then OPEN the BYPASS valve to set “true”
zero differential pressure.
Viewing Line Pressure, Starting Piston-Cylinder Temperatures and Natural
Piston Fall Rates ([MODE], <3HLdif>, <2view>)
To view the last line pressure setting, the starting piston-cylinder module
temperatures, the natural piston fall rates and the “natural fall rate difference”
recorded at that line pressure, press [MODE] and select <3HLdif>, <2view>.
The display is:
1.
Last line pressure value set (line pressure is
always in gauge mode).
2.
Temperature of the reference piston-cylinder
logged when the line pressure crossfloat was
completed.
3.
Line P: 1000 psi
Temperature of the tare piston-cylinder
T 21.24 ºC R 21.47
module logged when the line pressure
crossfloat was completed. The starting
temperatures are the temperatures logged at
the time the line pressure setting crossfloat
was completed. These temperatures are
used in calculating corrections to the differential pressure to take into account differential
temperature changes in the piston after completion of the crossfloat (see Section 7.2.1 for
differential pressure calculation information).
Page 71
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Press [ENTER] to continue to the next view screen or [ESCAPE] to go to the
previous screen. The next view screen is:
1.
Average fall rate of the tare piston recorded at the last
line pressure.
2.
Average fall rate of the reference piston recorded at
the last line pressure.
3.
Difference between the reference and tare piston
average fall rates (R - T). This is the “natural fall rate
difference”.
T-0.91 mm/min R-1.10
∆ -0.2 Save 1yes 2no
The “natural fall rate difference” is the difference between the fall rates of the
two pistons when they are floating naturally at the line pressure. The “natural fall
rate” can change slightly as operating conditions change so the “natural fall rate”
determination and piston crossfloat procedure should be performed at the beginning
of each sequence of differential pressure definitions.
To return to the <HLDif mode:> menu, press [ESCAPE].
To return to the previous run screen, press [ENTER].
3.9.5
[SYSTEM]
PURPOSE
To access the two SYSTEM run screens which display current values of PG7000 piston
behavior, piston-cylinder temperature and vacuum reference (PG7601 only) measurements.
OPERATION
To access the SYSTEM run screens, press [SYSTEM] from any other run screen. There are
two SYSTEM run screens. Pressing [SYSTEM] or [±] when in a SYSTEM screen toggles
between the first and second SYSTEM screens.
See Sections 3.9.5.1 and 3.9.5.2 for detailed information on the contents of the first and
second SYSTEM run screens.
The SYSTEM screens are run screens. This means that other functions can be accessed
from the SYSTEM screens and the active SYSTEM screen will be returned to when leaving
functions. The MAIN screen and AMBIENT screen are also run screens (see Section 3.8).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 72
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.9.5.1
FIRST SYSTEM RUN SCREEN
OPERATION
The first SYSTEM run screen provides real time display of piston rotation rate,
decay in piston rotation rate, piston position and piston fall rate.
To access the first SYSTEM run screen, press [SYSTEM] from any other
run screen.
The first SYSTEM run screen displays:
1.
<nnn rpm>:
Numerical value of current
piston rate of rotation. The unit of measure is
rotations per minute [rpm] and cannot be
changed.
Flashes when Not Ready and
piston is floating (see Section 3.4.2).
Indicates < ---- > when information is
unavailable or out of range.
nnn rpm
±nn/min
±n.nn mm
±n.nn/min
2.
<±nn/min>: Numerical value of current decay
in piston rotation rate (deceleration). The unit
of measure is rotations per minute [rpm/min]
and cannot be changed. < ---- > when
information is unavailable or out of range.
3.
<±n.nn/min>: Sign and numerical value of current piston vertical rate of displacement. A
negative value indicates piston falling. A positive value indicates piston rising. The unit of measure
is millimeters per minute [mm/min] and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- > when
information is unavailable or out of range.
4.
<±n.nn mm>: Sign and numerical value of current position of the piston within the piston
stroke (see Section 3.5). The unit of measure is millimeters [mm] away from mid-stroke
position and cannot be changed. Indicates <HSTOP> when the piston is at the high stop (all
the
way
up)
and
<LSTOP>
when
the
piston
is
at
the
low
stop
(all the way down). Flashes when Not Ready and piston is floating (see Section 3.4.1). Indicates
< ---- > when information is unavailable or out of range.
Pressing [ESCAPE] in the first SYSTEM run screen returns operation to the MAIN
run screen. Pressing [SYSTEM] or [±] toggles between the first and second run
screen. All function keys are active from the first SYSTEM run screen and
operation returns to that screen when leaving functions the were accessed from it.
The measurement systems for piston behavior indications rely on movement of
the mass loading bell. Piston behavior indications (piston position, piston rotation
rate) are not valid when the mass bell is not loaded on the piston.
See Section 3.5 for information on the piston stroke and measurement zone.
3.9.5.2
SECOND SYSTEM RUN SCREEN
OPERATION
The second SYSTEM run screen displays the values of piston-cylinder
temperature and temperature rate of change measured by PG7000.
PG7601 also displays reference vacuum and vacuum rate of change. If internal
or external measurement is specified for the vacuum values in SETUP (see
Section 3.10), the second SYSTEM run screen provides a real time display of the
values measured.
To access the second SYSTEM run screen, press [SYSTEM] or [±] from the first
SYSTEM run screen. To access the first SYSTEM run screen, press [SYSTEM]
from any run screen.
Page 73
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The second SYSTEM run screen displays:
1.
2.
<n.nn°C>:
Current
piston-cylinder
temperature. Source of value can be internal
measurement, default or user depending on
current SETUP selection (see Section 3.10).
The unit of measure is degrees Centigrade
[±°C] and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---> when information is unavailable or out of
range.
n.nn°C
±n.nn/min
nnn.n Pa
±nnn.n/min
<+n.nn/min>: Sign and numerical value of
current rate of change of temperature. A
negative
value
indicates
temperature
decreasing.
A positive value indicates
temperature increasing. The unit of
measure is degrees Centigrade per minute [°C/min] and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- >
when information is unavailable or out of range. Indicates < ---- > when “user” or “default” is
the current SETUP selection for piston-cylinder temperature source (see Section 3.10).
3.
<+nnn.n/min>: (Used for PG7601 only.) Sign and numerical value of current rate of change
of the vacuum reference pressure. A negative value indicates pressure decreasing. A positive
value indicates pressure increasing. The unit of measure is Pascal per minute [Pa/min] and
cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- > when information is unavailable or out of range.
<Blank> if the PG7000 model is not PG7601 or if user or default is the current SETUP
selection for reference vacuum (see Section 3.10).
4.
<nnn.n Pa>: (Used for PG7601 only.) Current vacuum reference value. Can be internal
measurement, external measurement, default or user depending on current SETUP selection.
Flashes when Not Ready and piston is floating (see Section 3.4.3). The unit of measure is
Pascal [Pa] and cannot be changed. Indicates < >20 Pa > if current SETUP selection is
internal or external and current measurement is out of range or greater than 20 Pascal.
<Blank> if PG7000 model is not PG7601.
Pressing [ESCAPE] in the second SYSTEM run screen returns operation to the
MAIN run screen. Pressing [SYSTEM] or [±] toggles between the first and
second SYSTEM run screen. All function keys are active from the second
SYSTEM run screen and operation returns to that screen when leaving functions
that were accessed from it.
The current selection in SETUP determines the source of the values used by
PG7000 for piston-cylinder temperature and vacuum reference values. If the SETUP
setting is user or default, the SYSTEM screen displays the user or default value, not
PG7000’s on-board measurement(s).
3.9.6
[AMBIENT]
PURPOSE
Access the AMBIENT run screen which displays the current ambient condition values being
used by PG7000 for calculations of reference pressures.
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 uses ambient condition values to calculate the reference pressures that it defines
(see Section 7.2). The source of the ambient condition values is specified in the current
SETUP file (see Section 3.10). The AMBIENT run screen displays the current ambient
condition values. If the SETUP selection for the ambient condition is internal measurement,
then the AMBIENT run screen provides a real time display of the measurement of PG7000’s
on-board sensor for that variable.
OPERATION
To access the AMBIENT run screen, press [AMBIENT] from any other run screen
(MAIN or SYSTEM).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 74
3. GENERAL OPERATION
The AMBIENT screen is a run screen. This means that other functions can be accessed from
the AMBIENT screen and the active AMBIENT screen will be returned to when leaving functions. The
MAIN screen and SYSTEM screens are also run screens (see Sections 3.7 and 3.9.5).
The AMBIENT run screen displays:
1.
<nnnnnnn uuuu>: Current numerical value and pressure
unit of atmospheric pressure. Source of value can be internal
measurement, remote barometer, default or user depending
on current SETUP selection (see Section 3.10). The unit of
measure is determined by the UNIT function setting (see
Section 3.9.3). ATM head is applied to internal or external
barometer reading to correct atmospheric pressure to the
PG7000 reference level (see Section 3.11.3.3). Indicates < --- > when information is unavailable or out of range.
Indicates <TIMEOUT> if the current SETUP selection is a
remote barometer and PG7000 communication with the
barometer times out.
nnnnnnn uuuu nn.n°C
nn%RH
n.nnnnnn/s2
2.
<n.nn°C>: Current ambient temperature. Source of value can be internal measurement, default or user
depending on current SETUP selection (see Section 3.10). The unit of measure is degrees Centigrade [ºC]
and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- > when information is unavailable or out of range.
3.
<n.nnnnnnm/s2>: Value of local acceleration due to gravity. Can be default or user depending on current SETUP
selection (see Section 3.10). The unit of measure is meters per second squared (m/s2) and cannot be changed.
4.
<nn%RH>: Current ambient relative humidity. Can be internal measurement, default or user depending on
current SETUP selection (see Section 3.10). The unit of measure is percent relative humidity (%RH) and
cannot be changed. Indicates < -- > if current SETUP selection is internal and current measurement is
unavailable or out of range.
Pressing [ESCAPE] in the AMBIENT run screen returns operation to the MAIN run screen.
All function keys are active from the AMBIENT run screen and operation returns to that
screen when leaving functions that were accessed from it.
The current selection in SETUP determines the source of the values used by PG7000 for
atmospheric pressure, ambient temperature and relative humidity. If the SETUP setting for these
values is user or default, the AMBIENT screen displays the user or default value, not PG7000’s
on-board measurement(s).
To change the ambient pressure units of measure, see Section 3.9.3. When the current
pressure unit of measure is an altitude unit, atmospheric pressure in the AMBIENT run screen is
expressed in kPa if the altitude unit is meters (m) or psi if the altitude unit is feet (ft).
3.9.7
[HEAD]
PURPOSE
To cause a pressure value, representing the fluid head resulting from a difference in height,
to be added to the pressure defined by PG7000 at its reference level. To set the height of
the DUT head.
PRINCIPLE
The pressure defined by the PG7000’s floating piston is the pressure at the bottom of the piston.
This is referred to as the PG7000 reference level. The height of the bottom of the piston with
the piston in mid-stroke position is marked reference level on the PG7000 piston-cylinder
module mounting post. Frequently, when performing a calibration or test, the device or
system under test is at a different height than the PG7000 reference level. This difference in
height (referred to as DUT head) can cause a significant difference between the pressure
defined by the PG7000 at its reference level and the pressure actually applied to the device
under test located at a different height. In this case, it is useful to make a head correction to
Page 75
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the pressure defined by the PG7000 at its reference level in order to accurately predict the
pressure actually applied at a different height. The HEAD function allows this head
correction to be applied automatically for a variety of fluids based on operator entry of the height
difference. The fluid used and the HEAD function units of measure are set by pressing
[SPECIAL] and selecting <3head> (see Section 3.11.3).
PG7000 can accurately determine head pressures for gases (nitrogen, helium and air) and
liquids (Di-2 ethylhexyl Sebacate oil, water and a user defined liquid) as the pressurized medium.
When gas is the test fluid, use of the HEAD function is most important at low
absolute pressures. In this case, specifying the head height within ± 0.2 in. (5 mm) is adequate
to ensure that, even in the worst case, the uncertainty on the head correction will be insignificant
relative to the tolerance on the PG7000 measurement. Use of the HEAD function to ensure
tolerance measurements is particularly critical when a liquid is the test fluid, due to the high
density of liquids. To determine when and how precisely a head correction for liquids must be
made, 0.03 psi/inch (90 Pa/cm) may be used as an estimation of the liquid head value.
Regardless of the head function’s setting, corrections are automatically applied to the
calculated reference pressure to compensate for the deviation between the current piston
position and the mid-stroke position (see Section 3.11.3.4).
The pistons of certain gas operated piston-cylinder modules are hollow. Due to their
irregular shape, for these pistons, the natural reference level is not at the bottom of the piston.
So that, in practice, the actual reference level is the same for all piston-cylinder modules, a
reference level offset is applied when a hollow piston is used. The reference level offset is included
in the piston-cylinder file (see Section 3.11.1.1) and corrects the reference level back to the
reference point marked on the mounting post.
OPERATION
To access the HEAD function, press [HEAD]. The display is:
Edit DUT head height
1.
Test fluid currently specified for the head correction.
2.
Entry field for head height (1 to 999 cm or in.).
95 cm
N2
Entering a value of zero turns the HEAD function OFF. Entering a value other than zero
turns the HEAD function ON using the height entered. Pressing [ESCAPE] returns to the
main run screen with NO change to the current head setting.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 76
3. GENERAL OPERATION
(+)
Reference
Line
REFERENCE
LEVEL
(-)
The reference height of PG7000 pressure definition is the bottom of the piston in midstroke float position. This position is marked on the piston-cylinder module mounting post and
on the optional AMH, mass automated handler. The DUT head height should be entered as a
positive value if the device or system under test is higher than the PG7000 reference level and
negative if it is lower.
To change units of DUT head height between inches and centimeters and to change the test
fluid, press [SPECIAL] and select <3Head> (see Section 3.11.3).
When the HEAD function is ON (DUT head value different from 0), the application of a head
correction is indicated by <h> in the right side of the top line of the MAIN run screen (see Section 3.7).
When the HEAD function is OFF, the <h> is NOT shown. PG7000’s also have a separate head
correction to compensate for the deviation between the current piston position and mid-stroke
(see Section 3.11.3.4). This PISTON head can be turned ON and OFF (see Section 3.11.3.4).
3.9.8
[ROTATE]
PURPOSE
To turn automatic control of motorized piston rotation (acceleration and brake) ON and OFF.
See Section 3.9.13 for information on manual control of motorized piston rotation.
PRINCIPLE
The motorized piston rotation system is used to start or increase piston rotation rate when the
piston is floating. It is also used to stop piston rotation when necessary, for example before
manipulating mass to set a new pressure. The system operates by engaging a motor driven
belt around the bottom of the mass loading bell to accelerate or brake the rotation rate of the
mass bell and piston it is loaded on. The motorized rotation system can engage with the
piston at any position in its stroke and at any rotation speed with minimal impact on piston
position and the defined pressure. When the motorized rotation system disengages, the
piston is completely free.
Page 77
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
With automatic motorized rotation ON, the motorized rotation system engages and
disengages automatically as needed when the piston is floating to maintain the piston
rotation rate above the minimum rate Ready limit (see Section 3.4.2). The rotation rate is
measured by PG7000 on board sensors and the rotation rate limits are set in the file of the
active piston cylinder (see Section 3.11.1.1). Whenever the piston is floating, the motorized
rotation system will attempt to maintain the piston rotation rate within the Ready limits (except
under the cutoff mass load of 3 kg, at which the low limit is reduced to minimum to maximize
free rotation time. The piston rotation Ready/Not Ready indication character indicates Not
Ready to alert the operator when the motorized rotation system is about to engage. The
rotation system will not engage when the current mass load is less than the mass of the
piston + mass loading bell.
The motorized rotation system is also used to brake and stop rotation when starting a new
pressure point. If the piston is floating and rotating when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed, the
motorized rotation system engages at a speed near the rotation rate of the piston and then
brakes it to a stop. Piston rotation is stopped to avoid loading and unloading masses on the
rotating piston and to avoid stopping rotation by friction between the piston and the piston
end of stroke stops.
With automatic motorized rotation OFF, the motorized rotation system engages only when
actuated by the operator. Pressing [ ] accelerates rotation or [ ] followed by [←] stops
rotation (see Section 3.9.13).
Automatic motorized rotation is generally left ON for normal operation. It is turned OFF in
situations where rotation system actuation independent of operator initiative is undesired
(e.g. when performing a crossfloat intercomparison with another piston gauge).
OPERATION
To access the AutoRotate
[ROTATE]. The display is:
functions,
press
AutoRotate OFF
1on 2pre-decel
<AutoRotate ON> or <AutoRotate OFF> indicates the current state of AutoRotate. Use
<1on> or <1off> to change the state.
When automated rotation is OFF, the PG7000 motorized rotation system will only engage if
the operator presses [ ] or [ ] followed by [←] (see Section 3.9.13).
When automated rotation is ON, the automated rotation system engages automatically.
When the piston is floating, it engages as needed to maintain the piston rotation rate above
the Ready limit (see Section 3.4.2). When [ENTER/SET P] is pressed, it engages to stop
rotation before masses are loaded and/or the pressure is adjusted (this function can be
turned ON and OFF, see Section 3.9.8.1). Manual control using [ ] and [ ] followed by
[←] is also still active.
Automatic motorized piston rotation is dependent on PG7000’s measurements of piston
position and rotation rate. These measurements are only available when the mass loading bell is
installed on the piston. Automatic piston rotation is suspended when the current PG7000 mass
load does not include the mass loading bell.
Proper operation of the rotation system is dependent on PG7000’s measurements of
piston position. When using AutoGen, be sure that the piston position indication system is
properly adjusted (see Section 5.2.2).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 78
3. GENERAL OPERATION
When PG7601 is operating in absolute by vacuum mode using the internal vacuum sensor to
measure reference vacuum, automatic motorized piston rotation will not engage until the
reference vacuum value is within the Ready limit (see Section 3.4.3).
3.9.8.1
<2PRE-DECEL>
PURPOSE
To turn ON and OFF a function that causes the automated rotation system to
begin the piston rotation deceleration when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed rather
than at the time mass is to be loaded.
On a PG7000 Platform equipped with motorized rotation, when AutoRotate is on,
the piston rotation deceleration function is used to stop rotation before masses
are loaded or pressure is adjusted. As the deceleration function can take up to
one minute to execute, it can be initiated the moment that [ENTER/SET P] is
pressed to enter a new pressure or mass target. The deceleration function then
runs while the new target value is being entered. However, when the next target
does not require changing main masses, it may not be necessary to stop piston
rotation. In these cases, the running the deceleration function is probably not
desired and it is not beneficial for piston deceleration to initiate it when
[ENTER/SET P] is pressed. For this reason, the function to start piston
deceleration when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed can be turned ON and OFF.
If pre-deceleration is ON and AutoRotate is ON, piston rotation deceleration
always initiates immediately when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed.
If pre-deceleration is OFF and AutoRotate is ON, piston rotation deceleration
occurs after entry of the pressure or mass target value and only if the new target
requires changing main masses with a manual mass set or operation AMH if an
automated mass handling system is active.
OPERATION
To turn ON and OFF the function that causes stopping piston rotation to initiate
when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed, press [ROTATE], <2pre-decel>. The cursor
is on the choice corresponding to the current state. Select <2on> for piston
rotation deceleration to initiate when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed. Select <1off>
for deceleration to initiate only after entry of a new pressure or mass target and
only if main masses need to be moved or AMH automated mass handling needs
to be operated. The default is <2on>.
3.9.9
[GEN] (OPTIONAL)
PURPOSE
To turn ON and OFF automated pressure generation/control and view and edit automated
pressure control settings.
Requires that an automated pressure generation/control
component be included in the PG7000 system and properly configured (see Section 2.4.9).
PRINCIPLE
PG7000s support automated pressure generation/control components. These components, when
properly configured and interfaced with the PG7000 platform, are controlled by the PG7000
platform to automatically set and adjust pressure to float the piston. Automated pressure
generation and control components are interfaced via the PG7000 platform’s COM3 RS232
port (see Section 3.11.5.1).
Once an automated pressure generation/control component has been properly configured
and interfaced with the PG7000 platform, the functions under [GEN] are used to turn
Page 79
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
automated pressure generation/control ON and OFF and to set operating parameters
associated with automated pressure control.
With automated pressure generation/control ON, PG7000 uses the automated control
component to float and refloat its piston when a pressure or mass value is entered.
[ENTER/SET P] is pressed to initiate a new command. The automated control function is
suspended when any function key is pressed, when entering remote mode or if automated
pressure control is turned OFF.
After a target pressure or mass has been entered (locally or remotely) and the required mass
has been loaded, the GEN function controls the pressure control component as needed to
float the PG7000 piston at the piston float target (see Section 3.9.9.1) and refloat it if
necessary. If the piston moves beyond the high or low piston position Ready limit the GEN
function refloats it to the piston float target. The piston float target and piston position ready
limits are user adjustable (see Section 3.10 <6READY). See Section 3.5, Figure 8 for a
description piston position stroke zones and limits.
With automated pressure generation/control OFF, PG7000 leaves the automated
pressure generation/control component idle and does not attempt to use it.
If an automated pressure control component is included in the PG7000 system, automated
pressure generation/control is generally left ON for normal operation. It is turned OFF in
situations where pressure control independent of operator initiative is undesired (e.g. when
performing a crossfloat intercomparison with another piston gauge).
The [GEN] menu includes:
1. Turning the GEN function ON and OFF.
2. The adjustable piston float target that defines the position to which the piston is set when
floated (see Section 3.9.9.1).
3. A choice to have the piston raised to the top of the stroke before manipulating mass using
an AMH automated mass handler (see Section 3.9.9.2).
4. Viewing and setting the UPPER LIMIT of the automated pressure generation component to
avoid accidental overpressure (see Section 3.9.9.2).
5. Viewing and setting the assumed pressure controller tolerance used to determine pressure
setting limits when floating the PG7000 piston (see Section 3.9.9.4).
6. A choice to not readjust piston position if the piston is already floating within the Ready
position limit after a new target is executed (see Section 3.9.9.5).
7. Viewing and setting the volume of the system to which the PG7000 system is connected
(PG7302 and PG7307 only) (see Section 3.9.9.6).
OPERATION
AutoGen OFF
To access the GEN functions, press [GEN].
display is:
The
1on
2target 3raise 4UL
5tol 6refloat
<AutoGen ON> or <AutoGen OFF> indicates the current state of AutoGen. Use <1on> or
<1off> to change the state.
If automated pressure control is OFF, PG7000 attempts to turn automated pressure control
ON when <1on> is pressed. To do so, communication must be established with a valid
automated pressure control component over its COM3 RS232 port (see Section 3.11.5.1). If
PG7000 is not able to establish communication with a valid pressure control component, <P
control timeout, autogen off> is displayed momentarily. Correct the communications error
with the pressure control component and try again. If PG7000 is able to establish
communications with a valid automated pressure control component, <Turning ON
automated generation> is displayed momentarily and automated control is turned ON.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 80
3. GENERAL OPERATION
The PG7000 automated control function will attempt to float the piston within the piston
position ready limits (see Section 3.4.1) after any mass to pressure or pressure to mass
command once mass loading has been confirmed. It will continue to attempt to float its
piston until [ENTER] is pressed to initiate a new command, a function key is pushed to
interrupt AugoGen, or automated pressure control is turned OFF using [GEN].
If automated pressure control is ON and <1off> is pressed, <Turning OFF automated
generation> is displayed momentarily and automated control is turned OFF. The PG7000
automated control function is inactive.
Automated pressure generation/control ON is indicated by a <G> in the right of the top
line of the PG Terminal main run screen. The <G> flashes when automated generation is active
(see Section 3.7).
Proper operation of the automated pressure generation/control function is dependent on
PG7000’s measurements of piston position. When using AutoGen, be sure that the piston
position indication system is properly adjusted (see Section 5.2.2).
Proper operation of the automated pressure generation/control function is dependent on
PG7000’s measurements of piston position and rotation rate. These measurements are only
available when the mass loading bell is installed on the piston. Automated pressure
generation/control is automatically turned off when the PG7000 entered pressure or mass load
does not include the mass loading bell.
Automated pressure generation/control is not available when operating in PG7000 high line
differential pressure mode (see Section 3.9.4.2).
To help protect against accidental overpressure, when using automated pressure
generation/control, set the upper limit (UL) of the pressure control system using [GEN], <4UL>
(see Section 3.9.9.3).
3.9.9.1
<2TARGET>
PURPOSE
To adjust the distance from midstroke to which the piston position must be set
before the automated generation system considers the piston floating process
complete (see Sections 3.9.9, 3.5).
With PG7202, AutoGen pressure control using the PPCH-G pressure control
does not stop when the target piston position is reached. The PPCH-G thermal
pressure control unit (TPCU) is used continuously to attempt to maintain the piston
at the target position. The default target piston position for a PG7202 is mid-float
position (0.0 mm).
OPERATION
To adjust the AutoGen piston float target press [GEN], <2target>. Edit the value of
the target as desired. The default is + 1 mm (0 mm for PG7202). The entry should
not exceed + 2.5 mm.
Page 81
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.9.9.2
<3RAISE>
PURPOSE
To turn ON and OFF a function that causes the automated generation component (see
Section 3.9.9.) to raise the PG7000 piston to the top of its stroke before automated
mass manipulation by an AMH automated mass handler. This can avoid a large
pressure change which may occur in certain circumstances when AMH lifts the mass
load off of the piston.
OPERATION
To turn ON and OFF the raise piston before mass loading fuction, press [GEN],
<3raise>. The cursor is on the choice corresponding to the current state. Select <1no>
for the piston not to be raised or <2yes> to raise the piston. The default is <1no>.
3.9.9.3
<4UL>
PURPOSE
To read and/or set the UPPER LIMIT (UL) of the automated pressure generation
component used by AutoGen. This function is used to protect against accidential
overpressure when using the PG7000 automated pressure generation function (see
Section 3.9.9 and the generation component’s Operation and Maintenance Manual,
UL section)
OPERATION
To view or set the UPPER LIMIT of the automated pressure control component
used by AutoGen, press [GEN], <4UL>.
If AutoGen is not currently ON, the control component UPPER LIMIT cannot be
accessed and an error message is displayed.
If AutoGen is ON, the current UPPER LIMIT of the automated control component
is displayed and can be edited.
The automated pressure control component will abort pressure generation and
beep repeatedly if its UPPER LIMIT is exceeded.
3.9.9.4
<5TOL>
PURPOSE
To read and/or set the pressure measuring tolerance of the pressure controller used by
AutoGen to automate pressure control.
This function is used only when the pressure controller is a PPC3.
PRINCIPLE
The control tolerance function can be used to reduce the time required to set pressure
and float the PG7000 piston when the pressure controller used is significantly more
accurate than the default tolerance value. The tolerance can also be described as the
degree of agreement between the pressure control’s pressure measurement and the
pressure value set by the PG7000 when its piston is floating. In general, making the
tolerance smaller reduces the time required to float the piston and making the
tolerance wider increases the time. However, if the tolerance is set too small so that it
does not correctly reflect the degree of agreement between the pressure controller
pressure measurement and the PG7000’s floating piston, overshoot of the piston float
point or inability to float the piston will result.
The pressure controller tolerance determines, when applicable:
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 82
3. GENERAL OPERATION
a) the distance from the actual pressure target that pressure is set before the
AutoGen function begins to seek movement of the piston.
b) the amount of pressure overshoot that must occur before “forced rotation” is
used to overcome possible friction between the piston and the cylinder.
This function is used only when the pressure controller is a PPC3.
OPERATION
To view or set the pressure control tolerance, press [GEN], <5tol>.
The current value of the pressure control tolerance is displayed. The value is in
% of full scale of the pressure controller. If the pressure controller is
AutoRanged, the AutoRange maximum pressure is used as full scale (see the
pressure controller’s Operation and Maintenance Manual).
The default tolerance value is 0.05% of full scale.
Edit the tolerance value if desired. Do not make the pressure tolerance less than
the worse case agreement between the pressure controller pressure measurement
and the pressure indicated by the PG7000 when its piston is floating.
3.9.9.5
<6REFLOAT>
PURPOSE
To turn ON and OFF a function that causes the automated generation component (see
Section 3.9.9.) to refloat the piston to the target piston position after a new pressure or
mass target is entered, even if the piston is already floating within the piston position
Ready limits. When Refloat is ON, the piston is always refloated to the target piston
position after a new pressure or mass target command. This gives the full stroke of the
piston to drop before refloat is necessary. When Refloat is OFF, the time required to
activate the pressure control component and refloat the piston is eliminated if it is not
needed. This can result in very rapid pressure setting when the piston is still floating
after a mass load change.
OPERATION
To turn ON and OFF the Refloat function, press [GEN], <6refloat>. The cursor is on
the choice corresponding to the current state. Select <1no> for the piston NOT to be
controlled to the target position after a pressure or mass command if the piston is
already in the Ready piston position limits. Select <2yes> for the piston to always to
be controlled to the raise the piston. The default is <2yes>.
3.9.9.6
<7VOL>
PURPOSE
To read and/or set the volume of the system to which the PG7000 system is
connected.
This function is used available only with PG7302 and PG7307.
PRINCIPLE
The piston floating routines of PG7302 or PG7307 oil operated piston gauge using a
PPCH automated pressure controller are highly dependent upon the volume of the test
system into which pressure is being controlled. The VOL function is used to specify
the test volume so that the PG7302 or PG7307 may scale the PPCH rates properly for
the volume.
Page 83
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Operating with an improperly specified volume will cause the piston floating
routine to be either very slow (specified volume to small) or to overshoot
(specified volume too large).
If the test system volume is not known, the PPCH volume determination
function may be used to measure it. This function is run directly from the PPCH
front panel (see the PPCH Operation and Maintenance Manual, {INTERNAL],
<1CONFIG>).,
The test volume can be read or set remotely (see Section 4.3.4, ).
OPERATION
To view or set the test volume, press [GEN], <7vol>.
The current volume value is displayed. The value is in cubic centimeres (cc).
The default volume is 30 cc. The maximum volume is 300 cc.
Edit the volume value if desired.
3.9.10
[RES]
PURPOSE
To set the resolution with which PG7000 loads mass in response to pressure or mass
commands (see Section 3.9.12).
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 piston-cylinders are sized such that there is a whole number, nominal relationship
between mass loaded on the piston in kilograms [kg] and the pressure at which the piston will
float in kilo Pascal [kPa] or Mega Pascal [MPa]. This relationship is called the pressure to
mass conversion coefficient and is expressed as kPa/kg or MPa/kg. The pressure to mass
conversion coefficient is marked on the cap of each piston.
PG7000 mass sets are made up of masses in multiples and submultiples of the kilogram
making it simple to load mass values rounded to 0.01 g, 1 g, 10 g or 0.1 kg.
When using PG7000 to define pressure, the desired pressure value is entered (see Section
3.9.11) and PG7000 prompts the user with the mass value to be loaded. Due to the many
variables that influence the exact pressure to mass relationship for a piston-cylinder
(even though there is nominally a whole number mass to pressure relationship) the mass
value to load to reach exactly the pressure requested is always an odd value. Therefore,
defining the exact pressure value requested always requires loading mass with 0.01 g
resolution.
When it is acceptable for the pressure values defined to not be exactly the nominal pressure
value of the point, operation can be simplified and mass loading errors can be reduced by
loading mass with a lower level of resolution and using the pressure that the lower level
resolution mass load generates. For example, on a piston-cylinder with a nominal pressure to
mass relationship of 10 kPa/kg, defining a pressure of exactly 100 kPa, nominally requires
loading 10 kg of mass. However, once all the influences on the measurement are taken into
consideration, the actual mass to load to define exactly 100 kPa will not be 10.00000 kg, it will be
a value near 10 kg such as 9.99731 kg. This value is difficult to load, as it requires relatively
complex mass accounting and the manipulation of very small sub-gram masses. To avoid
handling a difficult, odd mass value, one might instead decide to load 10 kg and use whatever
pressure results as the reference pressure. In this example, loading 10 kg rather than 9.99731
kg would result in defining 100.0269 kPa rather than 100.0000 kPa. The pressure defined is only
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 84
3. GENERAL OPERATION
very slightly different from the nominal value and there is no additional uncertainty if that value is
used. The savings in time and reduction of possible mass loading errors are significant.
The PG7000 RES function is used to cause PG7000 to automatically calculate mass loads to a
whole number value starting at 0.01 g and increasing in powers of 10 to 0.1 kg. This function is very
useful to make operation more convenient and less error prone when it is not imperative that the
pressure defined by PG7000 be exactly the nominal pressure of the test or calibration sequence.
The mass loading resolution of AMH automated mass handling systems is 0.1 kg. The
default mass loading resolution when AMH is initialized is 0.1 kg. If resolution finer than 0.1 kg is
set when AMH is active, the AMH loads the required mass value wit 0.1 kg resolution and the
operator is prompted with an instruction to load the trim mass under 0.1 kg. For fully automated
operation, the mass loading resolution should always be set to 0.1 kg.
OPERATION
To access the resolution function, press [RES]. The
display is:
Mass loading rsltn:
0.01 g
< and >
Press the [←] and [→] keys to select the desired level of resolution. [←] decreases
resolution and [→] increases resolution. Press [ENTER] to set the selected resolution and
return to the main run screen. The resolution range is from 0.01 g to 0.1 kg in powers of 10.
The RES setting has no affect in mass to pressure mode. The RES setting only affects the
resolution of the mass commands that result from pressure entries in pressure to mass mode
(see Section 3.9.12).
In PG7000 high line differential pressure mode (see Section 3.9.4.2), line pressures setting
is not affected by the RES setting; line pressures are always set with 0.1 kg resolution.
Differential pressure mass loading resolution is determined by the RES setting.
3.9.11
[ENTER/SET P] FROM RUN SCREEN
PURPOSE
To enter and execute pressure to mass or mass to pressure commands (see Section 3.9.12).
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 can calculate and display the mass to be loaded to achieve an entered pressure
value (pressure to mass mode), or the pressure resulting from an entered mass load (mass
to pressure mode). The P OR M function is used to set pressure to mass or mass to pressure
mode (see Section 3.9.12).
Pressing [ENTER/SET P] from any run screen (MAIN, SYSTEM or AMBIENT) accesses the
pressure or mass entry screen which allows the command value to be entered and proceeds
through the sequence to set or read the pressure defined by PG7000.
OPERATION
To access the pressure or mass entry screen, press [ENTER/SET P] from any run screen. The
sequence after [ENTER/SET P] has been pressed varies between mass to pressure and
pressure to mass mode. The mode is selected by pressing [P OR M] (see Section 3.9.12).
See Section 3.9.11.1 for details on [ENTER/SET P] in pressure to mass mode and Section
3.9.11.2 for mass to pressure mode. See immediately below for typical operational sequences in
Page 85
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
gauge and absolute modes. See Section 3.9.4.1, Operating in Differential Mode, for typical
differential mode operational sequence.
Typical Gauge and Absolute by ATM Mode Operational Sequence
Press [MODE] and select gauge or absolute by ATM mode as desired (see Section 3.9.4).
Press [P OR M] and select pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode (see Section 3.9.12).
Press [ENTER/SET P] and enter a pressure or mass value. If the piston is floating and
AutoRoate is ON, the braking function engages to stop piston rotation (see Section 3.9.8).
Load mass as instructed (see Section 3.6). If an AMH automated mass handling system
is active, the mass is loaded automatically with resolution of 0.1 kg.
Use the system pressure control component to float the PG7000 piston. If the AutoGen
function is ON, the automated pressure control component floats the piston automatically
(see Section 3.9.9).
When PG7000 indicates Ready on all Ready/Not Ready indicators (see Section 3.4), take a
DUT reading at the pressure indicated on the top line of PG7000 display.
Repeat Steps
through
for each desired pressure value.
Typical Absolute by Vacuum Mode Operational Sequence (PG7601 Only)
Press [MODE] and absolute by vacumm (avac) mode (see Section 3.9.4).
Press [P OR M] and select pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode (see Section 3.9.12).
Press [ENTER/SET P] and enter a pressure or mass value.
If AutoRoate is ON, the
braking function engages to stop piston rotation (see Section 3.9.8).
Load mass as instructed (see Section 3.6).
If an AMH automated mass handling
system is active, the mass is loaded automatically to resolution of 0.1 kg.
Install bell jar on PG7000, shut PG7000 vacuum vent valve, open vacuum reference
shutoff valve. Wait for vacuum under bell jar to reach Ready condition (see Section 3.4.3).
Use system pressure control component to float the PG7000 piston. If the AutoGen
function is ON, the automated pressure control component floats the piston automatically
(see Section 3.9.9).
When PG7000 indicates Ready on all Ready/Not Ready indicators (see Section 3.4), take a
DUT reading at absolute pressure indicated on the top line of the PG7000 display.
Shut vacuum reference shutoff valve, open vacuum vent valve. Wait for pressure under
bell jar to return to ambient. Remove bell jar. If an AMH automated mass handling
system is active and mass loading resolution is 0.1 kg, the vacuum does not need to be
broken and reestablished at each increment since the masses are moved automatically.
Repeat Steps
through
3.9.11.1
for each desired differential pressure point.
[ENTER/SET P] IN PRESSURE TO MASS MODE
PURPOSE
To enter and execute a pressure to mass command in pressure to mass mode
(see Section 3.9.12).
OPERATION
Put the PG7000 in pressure to mass operation mode (see Section 3.9.12), then
press [ENTER/SET P] in any run screen. If automated rotation is on, the
<DECELERATING> screen shows until piston deceleration is complete.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 86
3. GENERAL OPERATION
Pressing [ENTER] in the run screen causes automated pressure generation to
be suspended if ON (see Section 3.9.9) and AutoRotate to stop piston rotation if
ON (see Section 3.9.8). When [ENTER] is pressed to confirm mass entry,
automated pressure generation and/or motorized rotation resume.
The display is:
1.
Current measurement mode (see Section
3.9.4).
2.
Current pressure unit of measure (see Section
3.9.3).
3.
Entry field for the target value of pressure to
be set.
Target pressure:
100.0000 kPa a
Use the numerical keys and editing keys to enter the target pressure value desired.
Press [ENTER/SET P] to process the target pressure value. If the pressure
value entered cannot be executed, an explanatory error message is displayed
momentarily and operation returns to the target pressure entry screen with the
previous target pressure value displayed. If the target pressure value entered is
valid, the value is processed and operation proceeds to the mass loading
instruction screen. The display is:
Load nominal mass:
1.
Mass to load using trim masses.
2.
Nominal mass to load using main and
fractional masses.
10.0 kg and 3.17 g
If an AMH automated mass handling system is active and mass loading
resolution is set to 0.1 kg, the AMH loads the mass automatically. As it does, the
steps of its operation are displayed. If resolution is set to higher than 0.1 kg, the
operator is prompted to load the trim mass value.
With PG7601 in absolute by vacuum measurement mode (see Section 3.9.4), the instruction
is <Load mass & vac:> indicating that the nominal mass value should be loaded
and then the bell jar should be installed and vacuum established under the bell jar.
Load the nominal mass value following the protocol described in Section 3.6 and
press [ENTER/SET P]. When [ENTER/SET P] is pressed confirming that the
nominal mass value has been loaded, operation returns to the previous run
screen with the new pressure target and mass value active.
To make “in tolerance” measurements, it is imperative that all mass loading
instructions be executed following the protocol describe in Section 3.6. This ensures
that the actual mass value resulting from a nominal mass loading command will be
correct. Failure to load masses following the PG7000 mass loading protocol is likely
to result in out of tolerance mass load determinations and pressure definitions.
The resolution with which the pressure to mass mode mass loading
instruction is given depends on the resolution set in the RES function. The RES
function makes it possible to avoid loading high resolution mass values when it is not
imperative that the pressure defined be exactly the nominal pressure requested (see
Section 3.9.10).
Page 87
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The pressure to mass loading instruction is given in nominal mass while the
main run screen displays the true mass loaded. For this reason, the nominal mass
loading instruction and the true mass displayed in the main run screen are slightly
different values. This is normal operation (see Section 3.6).
3.9.11.2
[ENTER/SET P] IN MASS TO PRESSURE MODE
PURPOSE
To enter and execute a mass to pressure command in mass to pressure mode
(see Section 3.9.12).
OPERATION
Put the PG7000 in mass to pressure operation mode (see Section 3.9.12), then
press [ENTER/SET P] in any run screen. If automated rotation is on, the
<DECELERATING> screen shows until piston deceleration is complete.
Pressing [ENTER] in the run screen causes automated pressure generation to
be suspended if ON (see Section 3.9.9) and AutoRotate to stop piston rotation if
ON (see Section 3.9.8). When [ENTER] is pressed to confirm mass entry,
automated pressure generation and/or motorized rotation resume.
The display is:
Load nominal mass:
1.
Edit field for total trim mass currently loaded.
2.
Edit field for nominal mass of main and
fractional masses currently loaded.
10.0 kg and 3.17 g
Use the numerical and editing keys to enter the nominal mass to be loaded on
the piston following the mass loading protocol described in Section 3.6.
Press [ENTER/SET P] to process the mass value. If the mass value entered
cannot be executed, an explanatory error message is displayed momentarily and
operation returns to the mass entry screen with the previous nominal mass value
displayed. If the mass value entered is valid, the value is processed and
operation proceeds to the previous run screen with the new mass value active.
To make “in tolerance” measurements, it is imperative that the value of mass
loaded on the piston be the NOMINAL mass following the protocol describe in
Section 3.6. This ensures that PG7000 will correctly determine the true mass value
loaded. Failure to enter nominal mass values following the PG7000 mass loading
protocol is likely to result in out of tolerance mass load determination and pressure
definitions.
The setting of the RES function has no effect on the resolution of mass load
entries in mass to pressure mode (see Section 3.9.10).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 88
3. GENERAL OPERATION
The mass to pressure mass entry is expressed in nominal mass while the
MAIN run screen displays the true mass loaded. For this reason, the nominal mass
loading instruction and the true mass displayed in the main run screen are slightly
different values. This is normal operation (see Section 3.6).
3.9.11.3
COMMANDS FOR ZERO PRESSURE, ENDING A TEST
Entering a value of zero as the target presure is a convenient way to end a test
and vent the automated pressure control component when AutoGen is ON.
Entering a value of zero in pressure to mass
sequence to occur:
mode causes the following
Stop piston rotation if AutoRotate is ON.
Vent pressure control component if AutoGen is ON or prompt operator to vent.
A special run screen displays reflecting that the PG7000 is at rest and the
mass loading bell may not be installed. The display is:
3.9.12
1.
<?> in ready/not ready indicator positions as
status of piston is unknown since mass loading
bell may not be installed.
2.
Unknown pressure except in absolute by
atmosphere measurement mode in which the
current value of atmospheric pressure is
displayed. This is the value of absolute by
atmospheric pressure when the system is
vented.
3.
Unknown/meaningless mass load.
4.
Unknown/meaningless piston position.
[P
OR
???----- psi a
--- mm
--------kg
M]
PURPOSE
To select between PG7000 pressure to mass or mass to pressure operation mode.
PRINCIPLE
Piston gauges are generally used either to define desired pressure set points (e.g. when
applying reference pressures to a device to be calibrated) or to measure a static pressure
(e.g. when performing a crossfloat intercomparison with another piston gauge).
PG7000s support these two typical situations with two operating modes: pressure to mass
and mass to pressure.
In pressure to mass operating mode, the operator enters target pressure values and the
PG7000 provides instructions of the mass to load to achieve the desired target pressure.
In mass to pressure operating mode, the operator enters the mass currently loaded and the
PG7000 determines the pressure resulting from the current mass load. Mass to pressure
mode is also useful to determine the true mass resulting from a nominal mass load (see
Section 3.6).
The P OR M function is used to set the PG7000 operating mode to either pressure to mass or
mass to pressure.
OPERATION
For details on pressure to mass and mass to pressure operation, see Section 3.9.11.
Page 89
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
To access the P
the display is:
OR
M function, press [P
OR
M],
Select entry mode:
1pressure 2mass
Selecting <1pressure> activates pressure to mass mode and returns to the previous run screen.
Selecting <2mass> activates mass to pressure mode and returns to the previous run screen.
3.9.13
[ ] AND [ ], [←]
PURPOSE
To activate motorized piston rotation manually.
PRINCIPLE
Motorized rotation engages and disengages to rotate or stop the rotation of the PG7000
piston.
Motorized rotation can be set to operate automatically to maintain the piston within Ready
condition rotation rate limits when the piston is floating and stop rotation before changing the
pressure or mass load (see Section 3.9.8). Motorized rotation can also be engaged manually
to accelerate or brake piston rotation at any time under direct operator control.
[ ] is used for momentary acceleration of piston rotation. [
start a function that stops piston rotation.
] followed by [←] is used to
OPERATION
To momentarily engage the motorized piston rotation system and accelerate the piston, press
[ ] from any run screen. If PG7000 is equipped with motorized rotation, the motorized
rotation system engages and remains engaged until maximum rotation rate has been
achieved or the key is released.
The display is a modified version of the 1st system run screen to indicate the piston rotation is
being accelerated while showing rotation rate and position:
1.
Current piston rotation rate.
2.
Current rate of piston vertical displacement.
12 rpm ACCELERATING
3.
Current piston position.
+ 2.05 mm
0.1/min
To start the piston braking function press and hold [ ], then press [←]. If PG7000 is
equipped with motorized rotation, the motorized rotation system engages and stays engaged
until the piston rotation is stopped. Once the braking function starts the keys may be released
and the function will complete unless [ESCAPE] is pressed.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 90
3. GENERAL OPERATION
The display is a modified version of the 1st system run screen to indicate the piston rotation is
being decelerated while showing rotation rate and position:
1.
Current piston rotation rate.
2.
Current rate of piston vertical displacement.
48 rpm DECELERATING
3.
Current piston position.
+ 2.05 mm
0.1/min
To interrupt the piston rotation braking routine, press [ESCAPE].
Most PG7000 platforms produced before 2006 use a solenoid based rotation actuation
system. The system is protected against overloading. If the duty cycle becomes excessive,
motorized rotation cuts OFF and remains off for a 25 second delay. During the cutoff time, [ ]
has no effect.
The motorized rotation system can be set to operate automatically based on current
piston position and rotation rate. See Section 3.9.8 for information.
In PG7000 high line differential mode (see Section 3.9.4.2), pressing [ ] on the reference
PG7102 engages motorized rotation on both the reference and tare PG7000s.
3.10
[SETUP] MENU
PURPOSE
To select, view and edit the SETUP files that determine the source of the values that PG7000 uses in its
calculation of defined pressure and as criteria for Ready/Not Ready condition determination.
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 piston gauges perform continuous, real time calculations of the pressure defined by the floating
piston under current conditions (see Section 7.2 for the details on the calculations applied). The
calculations are used to determine the defined pressure displayed in the MAIN run screen, and to arrive
at the mass to load value when a target pressure is entered in pressure to mass mode.
The equations that PG7000 uses to calculate pressure include many instrument and ambient variables.
PG7000 allows the source of the value used for each variable to be defined. For example, the value
of barometric pressure used to calculate current air density and to add to gauge pressure to define
absolute pressure in absolute by atmosphere mode could come either from PG7000’s internal sensor,
an external barometer connected to PG7000’s COM2, a user entered value or be set to standard
atmospheric pressure. The PG7000 SETUP function allows the source (and in some cases the value) of
the variables used in the pressure equations to be specified. In order to allow various combinations of
sources and/or values to be setup and recalled, SETUP files can be created, stored, edited and recalled.
The SETUP files also include certain variables used to determine PG7000 Ready/Not Ready status.
Table 19 identifies the variables included in the SETUP file, the factory source setting for each variable
and the default value for each variable.
Page 91
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Variable source and value selections are recorded in SETUP files. These files can be stored and recalled
so that specific combinations of variable sources and/or values can be conveniently recalled. There are
20 SETUP files. File #1 is a factory SETUP file that cannot be edited. It includes the factory default
variable choices and values.
SETUP files, USER values and PG7000’s calculation capabilities can be used to calculate defined
pressure in specific conditions independent of actual PG7000 operation.
The SETUP function supports the following:
•
View SETUP files (see Section 3.10.2);
•
Create/edit SETUP files (see Section 3.10.3);
•
Select active SETUP file (see Section 3.10.1).
Table 19. SETUP File Choices, Factory Preferred Choice and Normal Value
VARIABLE
SOURCE
CHOICES
FACTORY
DEFAULT CHOICE
NORMAL VALUE
Atmospheric pressure
1. Internal
2. Normal
3. User
4. COM2
1. Internal
101.325 kPa
(14.6959 psi)
Ambient temperature
1. Internal
2. Normal
3. User
1. Internal
20 °C
Ambient relative humidity
1. Internal
2. Normal
3. User
1. Internal
45 %RH
Piston-cylinder
temperature
1. Internal
2. Normal
3. User
1. Internal
20 °C
Gravity
1. Local
2. Normal
3. User
1. Local
9.806650 m/s
Vacuum
(PG7601 only)
1. Internal
2. Normal
3. User
4. COM2
1. Internal
0 Pa
Ready/Not Ready
Piston position
1. User
1. User
± 2.5 mm from
midfloat position
(default)
Ready/Not Ready
Maximum vacuum
reference pressure in
absolute by vacuum mode
(PG7601 only)
1. User
1. User
5 Pa (default)
2
The factory default SETUP choice is the SETUP choice setting for all variables in a new SETUP file.
SETUP file #1 is fixed to factory SETUP choices and cannot be altered.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 92
3. GENERAL OPERATION
OPERATION
To access the SETUP menu, press [SETUP] from the main run
screen. The display is:
Current SETUP: #01
1select 2view 3edit
#nn in the upper right hand corner displays the number of the SETUP file that is currently active.
Select <1select> to select a different active SETUP file. Select <2view> to view the variable choices and
values of the active SETUP file. Select <3edit> to create or edit a SETUP file.
See Sections 3.10.1 to 3.10.3 for detailed information on each SETUP function operation.
3.10.1
<1SELECT>
PURPOSE
To change the active SETUP file number.
Changing the current SETUP file will change the source and in some cases the values of the
variables used by PG7000 in calculating defined pressure. SETUP files should be selected and
changed only by qualified personnel. Incorrect SETUP file selection may cause out of tolerance
calculations and measurements. See Section 3.10, PRINCIPLE, for information on SETUP files and
their use.
OPERATION
To select a SETUP file number to make it the active SETUP file, press [SETUP] and select
<1select>. In the following screen enter the number of the desired SETUP file and press
[ENTER]. If a valid SETUP file number has been entered, operation returns to the previous
run screen with the selected SETUP file number displayed and active.
Entering an invalid SETUP file number causes an error message to be displayed briefly and
returns to the select SETUP file screen.
If the SETUP file selected specifies COM2 as the source of barometric pressure, PG7000
will attempt to read a barometer on COM2 when initializing the new SETUP file. If PG7000 is
unable to read a barometer on COM2, a communications time out message is displayed briefly and
operation returns to the select SETUP file screen. See Section 3.11.5.4 for information on
configuring COM2 to read an external barometer.
3.10.2
<2VIEW>
PURPOSE
To view the variable source choices and values of any SETUP file number.
OPERATION
Selecting <2view> SETUP allows the variable source choices and values of the active SETUP
file for viewing only. <2view> does not make the viewed SETUP file active. To select the active
SETUP file, press [SETUP] and select <1select>.
Page 93
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
See Table 19 for a listing of the source choices for each variable.
To view an existing SETUP file, press [SETUP] and select <2view>. The display is:
View SETUP file:
1.
Entry field for number of SETUP file to be viewed. Defaults
to SETUP file currently selected. Must be a number from 2 to
10.
#02
Enter the desired SETUP file number and press [ENTER].
If a valid SETUP file number is entered, the display is:
View #02 latmP 2ambT
3%RH 4PCT 5g 6READY
7vac
Select <1atmP> to view the atmospheric pressure variable source choice and current value.
The value is displayed in the current pressure units (see Section 3.9.3).
Select <2ambT> to view the ambient temperature variable source choice and the
current value. The value is displayed in degrees Centigrade [°C].
Select <3%RH> to view the ambient relative humidity variable source choice and the current
value. The value is displayed in %RH.
Select <4PCT> to view the piston-cylinder temperature variable source choice and the
current value. The value is displayed in degrees Centigrade [°C].
Select <5g> to view the gravity variable source choice and the current value. The value is
displayed in meters per second squared [m/s2].
Select <6READY> to view the values of Ready/Not Ready status criteria (see Section 3.4).
These include:
<1Pposition>:
Piston position Ready/Not Ready limits (see Section 3.4.1). The value is
displayed as a band in millimeters about mid-float position [± mm] (see Section
3.5).
<2vac> (PG7601 only):
Maximum reference vacuum pressure limit when operating in absolute by
vacuum mode. The value is displayed in Pascal [Pa].
Select <7vac> (PG7601 only): to view the reference vacuum variable source choice and the
current value. The value is displayed in Pascal [Pa].
3.10.3
<3EDIT>
PURPOSE
To edit an existing SETUP file and/or to create a new SETUP file.
See Section 3.10, PRINCIPLE for information on SETUP files and their purpose.
OPERATION
SETUP file #1 is the factory preferred file and it cannot be edited.
See Table 19 for a listing of the source choices for each variable.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 94
3. GENERAL OPERATION
To edit an existing SETUP file or create a new SETUP file, press [SETUP] and
select <3edit>. The display is:
Edit SETUP file:
1.
Entry field for number of SETUP file to be edited or created.
Defaults to SETUP file currently selected. Must be a number
from 2 to 10.
#02
Enter the desired SETUP file number and press [ENTER].
If a valid SETUP file number is entered, the display is:
Edit #02 latmP 2ambT
3%RH 4PCT 5g 6READY
7vac
Selecting an item leads to the variable source choices menu for that item. The cursor is on the
source choice that is currently selected in that SETUP file number. Select the desired
variable source. The selection causes the variable choice selection to be made and returns
to the edit menu. From the variable source choice menus, pressing [ENTER] or [ESCAPE]
returns to the edit selection menu. This allows easy, discreet movement between variable
source choices when editing a SETUP file.
Select <1atmP> to specify the atmospheric pressure variable source for the pressure values
that are used to calculate ambient air density and to add to gauge pressure measurements to
calculate absolute pressure in absolute by addition of atmosphere mode. Selecting <1atmP>
offers the atmospheric pressure variable source choices:
<1internal>
Use real time readings from PG7000’s on-board barometer.
<2normal>
Use a fixed value of 101.325 kPa (14.6959) psi.
<3user>
Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must be
entered, in the current pressure unit of measure (see Section 3.9.3).
<4COM2>
Use real time readings from the device connected by RS232 to PG7000’s COM2
port. The external barometer must be properly set up to communicate with PG7000
(see Section 3.11.5.4 for information on setting up to read an external barometer).
For differential mode operation (see Section 3.9.4) the AtmP selection must be <4COM2>.
Select <2ambT> to specify the ambient temperature variable source for the temperature
values that are used to calculate ambient air density. Selecting <2ambT> offers the
temperature variable source choices:
<1internal>:
Use real time readings from PG7000’s on-board ambient temperature platinum
resistance thermometer (in the Temperature - Humidity (TH) Probe on the
platform rear panel).
<2normal>:
Use a fixed value of 20 °C.
<3user>:
Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must be
entered, in degrees Centigrade [°C].
Select <3%RH> to specify the relative humidity variable source for the relative humidity
values that are used to calculate ambient air density. Selecting <3%RH> offers the relative
humidity variable source choices:
<1internal>:
Use real time readings from PG7000’s on-board relative humidity sensor (in the
Temperature - Humidity (TH) Probe on the platform rear panel).
<2normal>:
Use a fixed value of 45 %RH.
<3user>:
Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must be
entered, in percent relative humidity [%RH].
Page 95
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Select <4PCT> to specify the piston-cylinder temperature variable source for the temperature
values that are used to compensate piston-cylinder effective area for temperature. Selecting
<4PCT> offers the temperature variable source choices:
<1internal>:
Use real time readings from PG7000’s on-board piston-cylinder temperature
platinum resistance thermometer (embedded in the piston-cylinder module
mounting post).
<2normal>:
Use a fixed value of 20 °C.
<3user>:
Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must be
entered, in degrees Centigrade [°C].
Select <5g> to specify the value of acceleration due to gravity that is used in calculating the
force applied to the piston. Pressing <5g> offers the gravity variable source choices:
<1locall>:
<2normal>:
<3user>:
Use the fixed value of local gravity stored under [SPECIAL], <6gl> (see Section
3.11.6).
2
Use a fixed value of 9.806650 m/s .
Use a fixed user entered value different from the current local gravity value
stored in the [SPECIAL], <6gl> menu option. If <3user> is selected, the user
2
value must be entered, in meters per second squared [m/s ].
Select <6READY> to edit the values of Ready/Not Ready status criteria (see Section 3.4).
These include:
<1position>:
Piston position limits. Edit the fixed value, in millimeters [mm], of the band
around mid-float position within which the piston position is Ready (see
Section 3.4.1). This also determines the limit at which the piston is refloated by
the GEN function when GEN is ON (see Section 3.9.9).
<2vacl>
(PG7601 only):
Maximum reference vacuum pressure when operating in absolute by vacuum
mode. Edit the value, in Pascal [Pa], under which the reference vacuum must
be for a vacuum Ready condition to occur (see Section 3.4.3).
Select <7vac> to specify the reference vacuum variable source for the value used for the
pressure under the bell jar when calculating the absolute pressure defined in absolute by
vacuum mode. Pressing <7vac> offers the reference vacuum variable source choices:
3.11
<1internal>:
Use real time readings from PG7000’s on-board vacuum gauge (mounted
directly in the vacuum plate, under the mass load).
<2normal>:
Use a fixed value of 0 Pa.
<3user>:
Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must be
entered, in Pascal [Pa].
<4COM2>:
Use real time readings from or through the device connected by RS232 to
PG7601’s COM2 port. The external vacuum gauge must be properly set up to
communicate with PG7601 (see Section 3.11.5.5 for information on setting up to
read an external vacuum gauge).
[SPECIAL] MENU
PURPOSE
The [SPECIAL] key accesses a menu of PG7000 functions and settings that are less
commonly or not normally used in regular operation.
OPERATION
To access the SPECIAL menu, press [SPECIAL] from
the main run screen. This display is:
1PC/MS 2presU 3head
4prefs 5remote 6gl
7cal 8AMH 9reset
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 96
3. GENERAL OPERATION
Some screens, such as the SPECIAL menu, go beyond the two lines provided by the display.
This is indicated by a flashing arrow in the second line of the display. Press the [←] and [→] keys
to move the cursor to access the lines that are NOT visible or directly enter the number of the
hidden menu choice if you know it.
Special menu choices include:
<1PC/MS>:
Edit and view stored piston-cylinder module and mass set metrological
information. Select mass set to be used (see Section 3.11.1).
<2presU>:
Customize the pressure unit of measure choices available under [UNIT]
(see Section 3.11.2).
<3head>:
Change the height unit of measure and the fluid used in DUT head corrections;
adjust the barometer head height; turn the automated piston position head
correction ON and OFF (PG7302 only) (see Section 3.11.3).
<4prefs>:
To access a menu of internal PG7000 operational preferences and functions
including screen saver, sounds, time/date, instrument ID and user level
protection (see Section 3.11.4).
<5remote>: Set up/modify PG7000 RS232 (COM1, COM2, COM3) and IEEE-488 interfaces.
Test RS232 ports. Set up external barometer communications (see Section 3.11.5).
<6gl>:
Set the value of local gravity used by PG7000 in reference pressure
calculations when gl is specified as the gravity value in the active SETTINGS
file (see Section 3.11.6).
<7cal>:
View the output of and adjust PG7000 internal sensors and measurement
systems (see Section 3.11.7).
<8AMH>:
View the status of and directly control an AMH automated mass handler (see
Section 3.11.8).
<9reset>:
Access and execute various reset options (see Section 3.11.9).
3.11.1
<1PC/MS>
PURPOSE
To perform the following piston-cylinder module and mass set metrological functions:
•
View and edit piston-cylinder module metrological information.
•
Create new piston-cylinder modules.
•
View and edit mass set and mass loading bell information.
•
Create new mass sets and mass loading bells.
•
Select the active mass set and mass loading bell.
See Section 3.9.2 for information on more direct access to selecting the active
piston-cylinder module.
Page 97
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The piston-cylinder module and mass set information contained in <1PC/MS> is element
specific metrological data. Uninformed or accidental altering of this information may lead to out
of tolerance measurements. Piston-cylinder module and mass set information should only be
edited by qualified personnel as part of the PG7000 calibration or recalibration process.
PRINCIPLE
To calculate the pressure defined by its floating piston, PG7000 must have available the
specific characteristics of the piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass loading bell that are
being used. This information is entered, viewed and edited under [SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>.
This is also where the active mass and mass loading bell are selected.
The piston-cylinder module and mass set information required by PG7000 is reported on the
Calibration Reports that are delivered with the metrological elements. When the PG7000
Platform and metrological elements are delivered together, the metrological elements
information is entered by DHI at the factory. If the metrological elements are delivered
separately from the platform or after a recalibration when new data is available, the information
must be entered or edited by the user.
OPERATION
To access the piston-cylinder module, mass set and
mass loading bell information, press [SPECIAL] and
select <1PC/MS>. The display is:
1PC 2mass set
3mass bell
Select the type of metrological element that you would like to view, edit, create or select.
See Sections 3.11.1.1 to 3.11.1.7 for operation of specific piston-cylinder module, mass set
and mass bell functions as follows:
•
Create a new piston-cylinder module (see Section 3.11.1.1).
•
Edit piston-cylinder module information (see Section 3.11.1.2).
•
View piston-cylinder module information (see Section 3.11.1.3).
•
Delete a piston-cylinder module (see Section 3.11.1.4).
•
Select the active piston-cylinder module (see Section 3.11.1.5).
•
Create a new mass set (see Section 3.11.1.6).
•
Edit mass set information (see Section 3.11.1.7).
•
View mass set information (see Section 3.11.1.8).
•
Delete a mass set (see Section 3.11.1.9).
•
Select a mass set (see Section 3.11.1.10).
•
Add a mass loading bell (see Section 3.11.11).
•
Edit mass loading bell information (see Section 3.11.12).
•
View the active mass loading bell (see Section 3.11.1.13).
•
Delete a mass loading bell (see Section 3.11.1.14).
•
Select a mass loading bell (see Section 3.11.1.15).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 98
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.11.1.1
CREATE PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE
PURPOSE
To create a new piston-cylinder module that will be available for selection from
the [P-C] function key. Use this function when a new piston-cylinder module has
been acquired.
If the piston-cylinder module and PG7000 Platform were delivered together, the
piston-cylinder module has already been entered at the factory. Before creating a new
piston-cylinder module, press [P-C] to check if it already exists (see Section 3.9.2).
PRINCIPLE
The PG7000 add and edit piston-cylinder module functions allow piston-cylinder
metrological module variable values to be defined and stored. These values will
be used by PG7000 in calculating defined pressure, piston-cylinder range and
pressure to mass and mass to pressure values when the piston-cylinder module
is made active using [P-C]. The information needed can be found in the
calibration report for the piston-cylinder module.
Setting up or editing a piston-cylinder module requires specifying, in sequential
order, the following:
Serial number (S/N) [nnnn].
Effective area (Ae) at 0 pressure and 20 °C [mm2].
Piston temperature coefficient [linear thermal expansivity/°C].
Cylinder temperature coefficient [linear thermal expansivity/°C].
Effective area pressure coefficient [change in Ae/MPa].
Piston-cylinder surface tension effect [N/m].
Reference level offset [mm].
Piston assembly mass [kg].
Piston assembly apparent density [kg/m3].
Rotation rate ready limits [rpm].
k(P) [kg/mm/min].
Calibration report number [nnnnnnnnn].
Calibration report date [yyyymmdd].
OPERATION
Adding or editing a piston-cylinder module requires the user to specify a large
number of variables in a series of data entry screens described below. For a summary
of the piston-cylinder module data requirements in the order they are edited see
PRINCIPLE in this section.
PG7000 can store up to 18 piston-cylinder module (PC) files. When <3add> is
selected and all the files have already been used, a warning is displayed. A file must
be deleted before a file can be added.
Page 99
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
To create a new piston-cylinder module press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and
select <1PC>, <3add>. A series of data entry menus will be presented. Edit
each menu to reflect the correct information on the piston-cylinder module being
added. Press [ENTER] after each entry to proceed to the next menu. Pressing
[ESCAPE] at any point offers an <Abandon edits?> query and then returns to
the <1PC> menu without saving any of the edited data or [ENTER] returns to the
add piston-cylinder module process.
The data entry screens to add or edit a piston-cylinder module are, in order:
•
Serial number (S/N): Edit the serial number using four digits. This value is
marked on the piston cap. The default is 1.
•
Effective area at 0 pressure and 20 °C: Edit the value of the pistoncylinder effective area at 0 pressure and 20 °C. The value must be entered
in square millimeters [mm2]. This value is reported in the calibration report
for the piston-cylinder module. The default is 0.
•
Piston temperature coefficient: Edit the value of the piston material linear
thermal expansivity. The value must be entered in terms of relative change per
degree centigrade [nn x 10-6/°C]. The E-6 exponent is fixed. This value is reported
in the calibration report for the piston-cylinder module. The default is 00.
•
Cylinder temperature coefficient: Edit the value of the cylinder material
linear thermal expansivity. The value must be entered in terms of relative
change per degree centigrade [nn x 10-6/°C]. The 10-6 exponent is fixed.
This value is reported in the calibration report for the piston-cylinder module.
The default is 00.
•
Effective area pressure coefficient: Edit the value of the piston-cylinder
change in effective area in terms of relative change per MegaPascal
[n.nn x 10-6/MPa]. The exponent is 10-6 for PG7601 and PG7102 and 10-6
for PG7302.
This value is reported in the calibration report for the
piston-cylinder module. The default is 0.00.
•
Piston-cylinder surface tension effect: Edit the value of the surface
tension effect of the pressurized fluid on the piston. The value must be
entered in Newton per meter [N/m]. This value is reported in the calibration
report for the piston-cylinder module. The default is 0.00. The correct value
for all gas lubricated and liquid lubricated, gas operated piston-cylinders
(PG7102, PG7601 and PG7202) is 0 unless they are operated with oil as the
test medium.
•
Reference level offset: Edit the value of the reference level offset which
corrects the piston-cylinder reference level for hollow pistons (5 kPa/kg,
10 kPa/kg, 20 kPa/kg and 50 kPa/kg gas lubricated piston-cylinder
modules only) to the reference level marked on the mounting post (see
Section 3.9.7). The value must be entered in millimeters [mm]. This value
is reported in the calibration report for 5 kPa/kg, 10 kPa/kg, 20 kPa/kg and
50 kPa/kg gas lubricated piston-cylinders; it is 0 for all other pistoncylinders. The default is 0.00.
•
Piston assembly mass: Edit the value of the mass of the piston assembly
(piston + piston head + piston cap). The value must be entered in kilogram [kg].
This value is reported in the calibration report for the piston-cylinder module.
The default is 0.200000.
•
Piston assembly average density: Edit the value of the average density of
the piston assembly (piston + piston head + cap). The value must be
3
entered in kilogram per cubic meter [kg/m ]. This value is reported in the
calibration report for the piston-cylinder module. The default is 0.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 100
3. GENERAL OPERATION
•
Rotation rate ready limits [rpm]: The minimum Ready rotation rate (see
Section 3.4.2) and the target maximum rate. The values must be entered in
rotations per minute [rpm]. The values (min and max) must be entered in
rotations per minute [rpm]. The value automatically defaults to the factory
recommended value for the piston-cylinder size and pressurized medium. In
most circumstances, the factory default values should be used.
•
k(P) coefficient [kg/mm/min]: Edit the value of the mass to equilibrium fall
rate proportionality coefficient. This value is non-zero only for PG7102 or
PC-7600 piston-cylinder modules that are used as the taring piston-cylinder
in high line differential measurement mode (see Section 3.9.4.2). In all other
cases, this value is zero. The value, when applicable, is specified in the
piston-cylinder module technical data.
•
Calibration report number: Edit the calibration report number to reflect the
number of the piston-cylinder module calibration report that is currently valid.
The number can be up to nine digits. The default is 1.
•
Calibration report date: Edit the date of the current calibration report.
The date must be expressed in yyyymmdd format. The default is 19800101.
After pressing [ENTER] to accept the
edited calibration report date the option to
save the edited piston-cylinder module
information is presented. The display is:
Save PC S/N nnnn
1no 2yes
Select <2yes> to save the piston-cylinder module information under serial
number nnnn and return to the <1PC/MS> menu.
Select <1no> to discard all edits and return to the <1PC/MS> menu.
3.11.1.2
EDIT PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE
PURPOSE
To edit information contained in an existing piston-cylinder module file. Use this
function to change piston-cylinder module data after a recalibration.
PRINCIPLE/OPERATION
Piston-cylinder module information is element specific metrological data.
Uninformed or accidental altering of this information may lead to out of tolerance
measurements. Piston-cylinder module information should only be edited by qualified
personnel as part of the PG7000 calibration or recalibration process.
See Section 3.11.1.1 describing adding a new piston-cylinder module.
The principles and procedures to add or edit a piston-cylinder module are
identical except for the identification of the piston-cylinder module to be edited.
To edit information on an existing piston-cylinder module, press [SPECIAL] ,
<1PC/MS> and select <1PC>, <2edit>.
The display identifies the currently active piston-cylinder module. Press [ENTER]
to edit the currently active piston-cylinder module or press [P-C] to toggle
through the other piston-cylinder modules available. When the desired pistoncylinder module is identified, press [ENTER] to proceed with editing pistoncylinder module information. Operation of the editing function is identical to the
add new piston-cylinder module procedure (see Section 3.11.1.1, OPERATION).
Page 101
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.11.1.3
VIEW PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE
PURPOSE
To view the information contained in an existing piston-cylinder module file.
PRINCIPLE/OPERATION
See Section 3.11.1.1, PRINCIPLE. The piston-cylinder module viewing function
allows the piston-cylinder module information to be viewed but not altered.
To view information on an existing piston-cylinder module, press [SPECIAL] ,
<1PC/MS> and select <1PC>, <3view>.
The display identifies the currently active piston-cylinder module. Press
[ENTER] to view the currently active piston-cylinder module or press [P-C] to
toggle through the other piston-cylinder modules available (see Section 3.9.2).
When the desired piston-cylinder module is identified, press [ENTER] to proceed
with viewing piston-cylinder module information.
Successive pressing of
[ENTER] steps through the piston-cylinder information screens in the same order
as the add and edit functions (see Section 3.11.1, View Piston-Cylinder
Module, Principle).
3.11.1.4
DELETE PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE
PURPOSE
To delete a piston-cylinder module file so that it is no longer included in the
piston-cylinder modules available for selection by pressing [P-C].
OPERATION
Once a piston-cylinder module file has been deleted it cannot be recovered.
To recreate it, the add piston-cylinder module function must be used (see Section
3.11.1.1) which requires entering all the piston-cylinder module information. Before
deleting a piston-cylinder module, consider editing it (see Section 3.11.1.2).
To delete a piston-cylinder module press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and select
<1PC>, <4delete>.
The display identifies the currently active piston-cylinder module. Press
[ENTER] to delete the currently active piston-cylinder module or press [P-C] to
toggle through the other piston-cylinder modules available (see Section 3.9.2).
When the desired piston-cylinder module is identified, press [ENTER] to proceed
with deleting the piston-cylinder module information. Confirmation to delete is
required. Select <2yes> to delete the piston-cylinder module. Select <1no> to
NOT delete.
The active piston-cylinder module (piston-cylinder module that is currently
selected) cannot be deleted. Before attempting to delete a piston-cylinder module,
be sure it is not currently selected.
3.11.1.5
SELECT THE ACTIVE PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE
PURPOSE
To select the piston-cylinder module that is active and used by PG7000 in its
mass loading and defined pressure calculations.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 102
3. GENERAL OPERATION
This function serves the same purpose as pressing [P-C] (see Section 3.9.2).
OPERATION
To select the active piston-cylinder module press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and
select <1PC>, <5select>.
3.11.1.6
ADD MASS SET
PURPOSE
To create a new mass set that will be available for selection as the active mass
set to load on the PG7000 piston. Use this function when a new mass set has
been acquired or a mass set was deleted and must be reentered.
If the mass set and PG7000 Platform were delivered together, the mass set
has already been entered at the factory. Before creating a new mass set, check
whether it already exists using the view mass set function (see Section 3.11.1.8).
PRINCIPLE
The PG7000 add and edit mass set functions allow mass set composition and
metrological variable values to be defined and stored. These values will be used
by PG7000 when the mass set is made active to calculate nominal mass
instructions and true mass loads. Up to three mass sets can be created.
Setting up or editing a mass set requires defining the density of the masses, the
mass set composition and the true mass of each individual mass. This
information can be found in the calibration report for the mass set.
Mass sets are created and edited in terms of mass groups reflecting the normal
composition of a PG7000 mass set. Standard PG7000 mass sets are made up
of these groups (see Section 2.1.2.2 for listings of standard PG7000 mass
set compositions).
The mass groups of a MANUAL mass set include:
1. Make up mass (9, 4.5 or 4 kg): A single mass, sequentially numbered 1.
The value of this mass is 9 kg if the mass set main masses are 10 kg and
4 kg or 4.5 kg if the mass set main masses are 5 kg. The purpose of this mass
is to arrive at a whole number nominal mass load equal to the sets main
masses (10 kg or 5 kg) when added to the piston and mass loading bell.
2. 10 kg masses: The main masses in a standard 80 or 100 kg mass set.
Sequentially numbered from 1 up to the total number of 10 kg masses.
Mass sets of < 80 kg do not normally include 10 kg masses.
3. 5 kg masses: The main masses in any standard mass set of less than
80 kg. Sequentially numbered from 1 up to the total number of 5 kg masses.
Standard 80 and 100 kg mass sets have one 5 kg mass.
4. 2 kg masses:
and 2.
Every standard mass set has two 2 kg masses numbered 1
5. 1 kg masses:
Every standard mass set has one 1 kg mass numbered 1.
6. 0.5 kg masses: Every standard mass set has one 0.5 kg mass number 1.
7. 0.2 kg masses: Every standard mass set has two 0.2 kg masses numbered 1
and 2.
Page 103
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. 0.1 kg masses: Every standard mass set has one 0.1 kg mass numbered 1.
9. Trim masses: Every standard mass set has a trim mass set made up of
masses from 50 to 0.01 g. These masses are NOT defined and entered as
part of the mass set.
The mass groups of an AMH automated mass handler mass set include:
1. Main masses (10 kg with AMH-100, 6.2 kg with AMH-38): Sequentially
numbered from 1 to a maximum of 9 for AMH-100 or 1 to a maximum of 5 for
AMH-38.
2. 6.4 kg mass (AMH-100 only): Single tubular, binary mass.
3. 3.2 kg mass:
Single tubular, binary mass.
4. 1.6 kg mass:
Single tubular, binary mass.
5. 0.8 kg mass:
Single tubular, binary mass.
6. 0.4 kg mass:
Single tubular, binary mass.
7. 0.2 kg mass:
Single tubular, binary mass.
8. 0.1 kg mass:
Single tubular, binary mass.
9. Trim masses: Every standard mass set has a trim mass set made up of
masses from 50 to 0.01 g. These masses are NOT defined and entered as
part of the mass set.
When PG7000 provides mass loading instructions and calculates the true
mass of the mass currently loaded, it assumes that the mass set in use has been
set up correctly and that masses have been loaded following PG7000 mass loading
protocol (see Section 3.6). For PG7000 mass loading protocol to operate properly,
the mass set in use must be EXACTLY the mass set that has been defined by the
add and/or edit mass function. No extra mass can be included, no mass used can be
missing and the sequential numbers of masses in each mass group must be followed
with the correct true mass value entered for each individual mass. Using a mass set
that is not accurately set up may result in out of tolerance pressure definitions.
Though the piston and the mass loading bell constitute part of the mass load,
they are not included in the definition of a mass set. Also, one PG7000 system may be
used with several piston-cylinder modules, mass loading bells and mass sets.
Therefore, the piston mass and mass loading bell mass information are not part of
the mass set. Piston mass information is defined and stored in the piston-cylinder
module file (see Section 3.11.1.1) and mass loading bell information is defined and
stored in a separate mass loading bell files (see Section 3.11.1.11). In an AMH mass
set, the binary mass carrier and mass lifting shaft are considered part of the bell.
OPERATION
Mass set information is element specific metrological data. Uninformed or
accidental altering of this information may lead to out of tolerance measurements.
Mass set information should only be edited by qualified personnel as part of the
PG7000 calibration or recalibration process.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 104
3. GENERAL OPERATION
To use the create or edit mass set function with a manual mass set, it is
important to have an understanding of mass set structure and mass groups.
Consult Section 3.6, PRINCIPLE, to familiarize yourself with this information before
attempting to create or edit a mass set. Before creating or editing an AMH
automated mass handler mass set, see the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
PG7000 can store up to 3 MS (mass set) files. When <3add> is selected and
all the files have already been used, a warning is displayed. A mass set must be
deleted before a mass set can be added.
To create a new PG7000 mass set there are three sequential steps:
Initialize mass set: Define serial number, density, mass set type (manual or
AMH), calibration report number and date.
Define individual masses: Edit, add and delete mass groups as necessary to
identify and define all masses in the mass set.
Save mass set file or abandon changes.
Step
: Initialize Mass Set
Press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and select <2mass set>, <3add>.
Edit the serial number to the number of
the mass set being added and press
[ENTER]. The display is:
Edit the density of the masses being
added (all PG7000 mass sets have
density of 8 000 kg/m3) and press
[ENTER]. The display is:
Select <1manual> for a manual mass set
or <2AMH> for an automated mass
handler mass set.
Edit the calibration report number (up to
nine digits) to the the number of the
current calibration report of the mass set
that is being added and press [ENTER].
The display is:
Edit the calibration report date to the date
of the current calibration report of the
mass set that is being added (format must
be YYYYMMDD) and press [ENTER].
[ENTER] leads to the second step of
mass set adding or editing.
Add mass set:
S/N 1
Mass density:
8000 kg/m3
Mass set type:
1manual 2AMH
Cal report number?
1
Cal report date?
19800101
Pressing [ESCAPE] at any point goes to an abandon edits warning screen.
To continue with defining the mass set proceed to Step .
Step
: Define Individual Masses
Page 105
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
This step can only be reached by going through Step
.
Select mass grp (kg)
If the mass set is a MANUAL mass set,
the display is:
MKUP 5.00 2.00 1.001
0.50 0.20 0.10 ADD
If the mass set is an AMH automated
mass handler mass set, the display is:
(6.4 is only present for AMH-100)
Select mass grp (kg)
MAIN 6.40 3.20 1.60
0.80 0.40 0.20 0.10
Some screens, such as the SPECIAL menu, go beyond the two lines provided by
the display. This is indicated by a flashing arrow in the second line of the display.
Press the [←] and [→] keys to move the cursor to access the lines that are NOT
visible or directly enter the number of the hidden menu choice if you know it.
Refer to Sections 3.11.1.6, PRINCIPLE and 3.6 for information on mass
group definitions. To create the mass set, each and every mass in the mass set,
no more and no less, (but not the piston and the bell) must be identified and its
true mass entered. To select a mass group press the [←] and [→] keys to
position the cursor on the mass group to be edited. If the mass is needed but not
shown, select <ADD> to create a new mass group. To delete a mass group,
enter <0> as the number of masses in the group.
All standard PG7000 MANUAL mass sets have a makeup mass (MKUP). This
mass may be 4, 4.5 or 9 kg depending on the mass set (see Section 3.6, PRINCIPLE).
It is imperative that the make up mass be defined and entered in the MKUP group.
Operation within each mass group is identical, for example, select <5.00>. The
display is:
1.
Edit field for number of masses in the mass
group.
# of masses in group
(0 deletes grp):
1
Edit the number of masses in group to reflect the number of masses of that
nominal value there are in the group and press [ENTER]. The display is:
1.
Sequential ID number of this specific mass
within the mass group.
2.
Edit field for the true value of this specific
mass.
5.0 kg mass #1
True mass:
5.00000
Edit the mass value to the true value of the specific mass identified and press
[ENTER].
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 106
3. GENERAL OPERATION
For high line differential mode, when setting up the tare mass set of the tare
PG7000, the true mass of each mass is entered as equal to the nominal value. Enter
the nominal mass values for the true mass values.
If there are additional masses in this mass group, the next display is the same as
the display immediately above but with the next mass specific mass sequential
ID number in the mass group. The screens continue until the true value of all of
the masses within the group has been entered. After the last entry, the screen
returns to the <Select mass grp> screen.
Edit, add and delete mass groups as necessary until all of the masses in the
mass set (do not include pistons, bells and trim masses of 50 grams and less)
have been entered, no more, no less. When Step is completed, press [ESCAPE]
to go to Step .
Setting up an 80 kg or 100 kg manual mass set requires using <ADD> to add
a 10 kg mass group as the 10 kg mass group is not included by default.
Step
: Save Mass Set File
Pressing [ESCAPE] in the mass set editing screen goes to the save screen.
Save MS S/N 4573
The display is:
1no 2yes
Select <2yes> to save the all changes made to the mass set and exit.
Select <1no> to abandon all changes made to the mass set and exit.
3.11.1.7
EDIT MASS SET
PURPOSE
To edit information contained in an existing mass set file. Use this function to
change mass set data after a recalibration or if a mass set configuration
changes.
PRINCIPLE/OPERATION
Mass set information is element specific metrological data. Uninformed or
accidental altering of this information may lead to out of tolerance measurements.
Mass set information should only be edited by qualified personnel as part of the
PG7000 calibration or recalibration process.
See Section 3.11.1.6 describing adding a new mass set. The principles and
procedures to add or edit a mass set are identical except that the mass set to
edit is selected from the existing mass sets screen.
The mass set type (manual or AMH) cannot be changed when a mass set is edited.
3.11.1.8
VIEW MASS SET
PURPOSE
To view information contained in an existing mass set file.
Page 107
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OPERATION
To view information contained in an existing mass set file press [SPECIAL] ,
<1PC/MS> and select <2mass set>, <1view>. The viewing function operates in
the same manner as the add function (see Section 3.11.1.6).
3.11.1.9
DELETE MASS SET
PURPOSE
To delete an existing mass set file entirely.
OPERATION
Once a mass set file has been deleted it cannot be recovered. To recreate it,
the add mass set function must be used (see Section 3.11.1.6) which requires
entering all the mass set information. Before deleting a mass set, consider editing
it (see Section 3.11.1.7).
To delete a mass set press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and select <2mass set>,
<4delete>. Select the mass set to be deleted and press [ENTER]. Select
<2yes> to delete the mass set. Press <1no> to NOT delete.
The active mass set (mass set that is currently selected) cannot be deleted.
Before attempting to delete a mass bell, be sure it is not currently selected.
3.11.1.10
SELECT MASS SET
PURPOSE
To select a mass set to be active and used by PG7000 in its mass loading and
defined pressure calculations. To initialize the optional AMH automated mass
handler if present.
OPERATION
To select the active mass set press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and select <2mass
set>, <5select>.
Mass sets for an AHM automated mass handler are identified by a letter <A> after their
serial number.
Put the cursor on the desired mass set and press [ENTER].
If a MANUAL mass set is selected, operation returns to the MAIN run screen.
If an AMH automated mass handler mass set is selected, the PG7000 platform
attempts to establish communication with the AMH and initialize it. If the
communication cannot be established with the AMH, an error is displayed. If
communication with the AMH mass set is established, the AMH is initialized and all
masses are loaded. If the AMH is unable to complete initialization, an error message is
displayed. The most common reason for failure to complete initialization is inadequate
drive pressure supply to the AMH. For trouble shooting, see the AMH-38/AMH-100
Operation and Maintenance Manual. If the AMH initialization completes successfully,
operation returns to the main run screen with the AMH active. The AMH remains active
until a non-AMH mass set is selected. The PG7000 platform will attempt to initialize the
AMH on power up if an AMH mass set is the active mass set.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 108
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.11.1.11
ADD MASS LOADING BELL
PURPOSE
To create a new mass loading bell that will be available for selection as the active
mass loading bell. Use this function when a new mass loading bell has been acquired.
If the mass loading bell and PG7000 Platform were delivered together, the
mass loading bell has already been entered at the factory. Before creating a new
mass loading bell, check whether it already exists (see Section 3.11.1.13).
PRINCIPLE
See Section 3.11.1.6, PRINCIPLE.
OPERATION
Mass loading bell information is element specific metrological data.
Uninformed or accidental altering of this information may lead to out of tolerance
measurements. Mass loading bell information should only be edited by qualified
personnel as part of the PG7000 calibration or recalibration process.
PG7000 can store up to 3 mass bell files. When <3add> is selected and all
the files have already been used, a warning is displayed. A mass loading bell must be
deleted before a mass loading bell can be added.
To create a new PG7000 mass loading bell press [SPECIAL] and select
<1PC/MS>, <3mass bell>, <3add>.
Edit the serial number to the number of
the mass bell being added and
press [ENTER]. The display is:
Edit the average mass density of the
mass loading bell and press [ENTER].
The value defaults to the default density
for the typical mass loading bell for the
PG7000 model. The display is:
Add mass bell:
S/N 1
Mass density?
5058 kg/m3
The AMH automated mass handler mass bell includes the bell, the binary
mass carrier and the mass lifting shaft.
Edit the calibration report number (up to
nine digits) to the the number of the
current calibration report of the mass
loading bell that is being added and press
[ENTER]. The display is:
Edit the calibration report date to the date
of the current calibration report of the
mass loading bell that is being added and
press [ENTER]. The display is:
Page 109
Cal report number?
1775
Cal report date?
20040101
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Edit the the true mass value of the mass
loading bell that is being added and press
[ENTER]. The value defaults to the nominal
mass of the typical mass loading bell for the
PG7000 model. The display is:
Bell #2832
True mass: 0.449985
For high line differential mode, when setting up the tare bell of the tare
PG7000, the true mass of is entered as equal to the nominal mass. Enter the
nominal mass of the bell as the true mass.
Select <2yes> to save the all changes
made to the mass loading bell and exit.
Select <2no> to abandon all changes
made to the mass loading bell and exit.
3.11.1.12
Save bell S/N 2832?
1no 2yes
EDIT MASS LOADING BELL
PURPOSE
To edit information contained in an existing mass loading bell file. Use this
function to change mass loading bell data after a recalibration.
PRINCIPLE/OPERATION
Mass loading bell information is element specific metrological data.
Uninformed or accidental altering of this information may lead to out of tolerance
measurements. Mass loading bell information should only be edited by qualified
personnel as part of the PG7000 calibration or recalibration process.
See Section 3.11.1.11 describing adding a new mass loading bell. The principles
and procedures to add or edit a mass loading bell are identical except that the mass
loading bell to edit is selected from the existing mass loading bell screen.
3.11.1.13
VIEW MASS LOADING BELL
PURPOSE
To view information contained in an existing mass loading bell file.
OPERATION
To view information contained in an existing mass loading bell file press
[SPECIAL] and select <1PC/MS>, <3mass bell>, <1view>. The viewing
function is identical to the add function (see Section 3.11.1.11).
3.11.1.14
DELETE MASS LOADING BELL
PURPOSE
To delete an existing mass loading bell file entirely.
OPERATION
Once a mass loading bell file has been deleted it cannot be recovered.
To recreate it, the add mass loading bell function must be used (see Section 3.11.1.11)
which requires entering all the mass loading bell information. Before deleting a mass
loading bell, consider editing it (see Section 3.11.1.12).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 110
3. GENERAL OPERATION
To delete a mass loading bell press [SPECIAL], <1PC/MS> and select <3mass
bell>, <4delete>.
Confirmation to delete is requested. Select <2yes> to delete the mass loading bell.
Press <1no> to NOT delete.
The active mass bell (mass bell that is currently selected) cannot be deleted.
Before attempting to delete a mass bell, be sure it is not currently selected.
3.11.1.15
SELECT MASS LOADING BELL
PURPOSE
To select the mass loading bell that is active and used by PG7000 in its mass
loading and defined pressure calculations.
OPERATION
To select the active mass loading bell set press [SPECIAL], <1PC/MS> and
select <3mass bell>, <5select>.
3.11.2
<2PRESU>
PURPOSE
To customize the selection of pressure units that are available for selection from the UNIT
function key (see Section 3.9.3).
PRINCIPLE/OPERATION
See Section 3.9.3.1.
3.11.3
<3HEAD>
PURPOSE
To change DUT head configuration; to change the ATM head height; turn to turn the PISTON
head ON and OFF (PG7302 only).
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 supports three different fluid head correction functions.
1. There is a correction to consider the difference in height between the PG7000 reference
level and a device under test (see Section 3.9.7, PRINCIPLE). This head correction is
referred to as DUT head. The head height can be adjusted by pressing [HEAD]. The
head unit of measure and fluid are adjusted by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting
<3head>, <1fluid> and <2unit>.
2. The second head function is the head correction for the PG7000 reading of atmospheric
pressure that is used to calculate air density and/or to add to atmospheric pressure in absolute
by adding atmosphere mode. The barometer reading atmospheric pressure may not be at the
same height as the piston reference level and, if so, a head correction is needed to determine
atmospheric pressure at the piston reference level. This head correction is referred to as ATM
head. The ATM head height can be edited by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting <3head>,
<3atm>. The ATM head is only applied to internal or external barometer readings. It is not
applied to normal or user values of atmospheric pressure.
3. The third head function is the automated correction for the piston position, referred to as
PISTON head. The PG7000 reference level marked on the piston-cylinder module
mounting post is the level at which pressures are defined when the piston is in midstroke
position. But it may not always be practical to make measurement with the PG7000
piston exactly in its midstroke position. In fact, the piston position is Ready within a limit
band above and below midstroke (see Section 3.4.1). As the piston moves away from
midstroke, the pressure definition reference level moves proportionally. PG7000’s
Page 111
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
automated correction for piston position calculates the head pressure corresponding to
the deviation in piston position from midstroke and compensates the defined pressure
back to midstroke. In this way, the defined pressure calculated by PG7000 is always the
pressure at the reference level marked on the mounting post, even if the piston is not at
midstroke position. The PISTON head function can be turned ON and OFF by pressing
[SPECIAL] and selecting <3head>, <4piston>.
See Section 7.2.3 for information on calculation of the three fluid head correction functions.
OPERATION
To access various fluid HEAD correction functions press
[SPECIAL], and select <3head>. The display is:
Edit head: 1fluid
2unit 3atm 4piston
•
Select <1fluid> to change the DUT head fluid (see Section 3.11.3.1).
•
Select <2unit> to specify the DUT head height unit of measure (see Section 3.11.3.2).
•
Select <3atm> to adjust the ATM head height (see Section 3.11.3.3).
•
Select <4piston> to turn the PISTON head correction ON and OFF (see Section 3.11.3.4).
3.11.3.1
<3HEAD>, <1FLUID>
OPERATION
•
•
•
To specify the DUT head fluid (see
Section 3.11.3, PRINCIPLE), press
[SPECIAL] and select <3head>,
<1fluid>. The display is:
If <1gas> is selected, the display
offers the choice of three gasses.
Making a gas selection returns to the
previous run screen with that gas
active for the DUT head function.
The display is:
If <2liquid> is selected, the display
offers the choice of oil, water or a
user defined liquid.
If the user
defined liquid is selected, its density
must be specified. Making a liquid
selection returns to the previous run
screen with that liquid active for the
DUT head function. The display is:
Head fluid:
1gas 2liquid
Gas type:
1N2 2He 3Air
Liquid type:
1oil 2H20 3user
In systems using fluid interfaces, the head fluid selected should be the
medium used in the height separating the P7000 reference level from the device
under test.
3.11.3.2
<3HEAD>, <2UNIT>
OPERATION
To specify the DUT and ATM head
height unit (see Section 3.11.3,
PRINCIPLE), press [SPECIAL] and
select <3head>, <2unit>. The display is:
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 112
Head height unit:
1in 2cm
3. GENERAL OPERATION
Selecting the desired unit returns to the previous run screen with that unit active
for the DUT and ATM head function heights.
3.11.3.3
<3HEAD>, <3ATM>
OPERATION
To specify the ATM head height (see
Section 3.11.3, PRINCIPLE), press
[SPECIAL]
and
select
<3head>,
<3atm>. The display is:
Edit ATM head unit:
-10.00 cm
Entering the ATM head returns to the previous run screen with the new height
active.
The correct head height when using the PG7000 internal barometer is the
source for atmospheric pressure measurements (see Section 3.10) is -10.00 cm
(-3.94 in.).
The ATM head height is negative if the barometer is below the PG7000
reference level and positive if the barometer is above the reference level. The ATM head
fluid is air and it cannot be changed. The ATM head height unit is set by pressing
[SPECIAL] and selecting <3head>, <2unit>. The default ATM head height is -10 cm,
which is the difference in height between the PG7000 reference level and its internal
barometer mounted on the PG7000 Platform rear panel.
3.11.3.4
<3HEAD>, <4PISTON>
OPERATION
To turn the PISTON head correction function ON and OFF (see Section 3.11.3,
PRINCIPLE), press [SPECIAL] and select <3head>, <4piston>.
Select <1on> to turn the PISTON head correction function ON so that a head
correction for piston position IS automatically applied.
Select <2off> to turn the PISTON head correction function OFF so that a head
correction for piston position IS NOT applied.
The PISTON head is automatically turned OFF (has no effect) in gauge or
differential measurement mode when the set pressure is zero (system vented
or bypassed). When the system is vented or bypassed, the piston position no longer
affects the head. If the pressurized medium is a liquid, the head reference level is the
top of the fluid in the tank to which the PG7000 system is connected.
In PG7202, the test medium to use for the head correction is determined by
the piston-cylinder module pressure deformation coefficient and the surface tension
correction value. If the pressure deformation coefficient value is positive, the pistoncylinder module in use is assumed to be a PC-7300 module and the test medium is
oil. If the pressure deformation coefficient is negative and the surface tension
correction is zero, the piston-cylinder module in use is assumed to be a PC-7200 and
the test medium is gas. PC-7300 modules have free deformation mounting systems
and thus positive pressure deformation coefficients while PC-7200 modules have
negative free deformation mounting systems and thus negative deformation
coefficients.
Page 113
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.11.4
<4PREFS>
PURPOSE
To access a menu of PG7000 internal operational preferences and functions including
screen saver, sounds, time and date, instrument ID and user protection levels.
OPERATION
To access the PREFS menu press [SPECIAL], and
select <4prefs>. The display is:
1ScrSvr 2sound 3time
4ID 5level
Prefs menu choices include:
<1ScrSvr>: View and change the screen saver function (see Section 3.11.4.1).
<2sounds>: View and change keypad press and piston position sound settings (see Section
3.11.4.2).
<3time>:
View and edit the internal time and date settings (see Section 3.11.4.3).
<4ID>:
View and edit the PG7000 user ID (see Section 3.11.4.4).
<5level>:
View and edit user protection levels and password (see Section 3.11.4.5).
3.11.4.1
<4PREFS>, <1SCRSVR>
PURPOSE
To adjust the time of inactivity after which PG7000’s SCREEN SAVER function
activates or to turn off the screen saver function.
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 has a SCREEN SAVER function which causes the display to dim after a
front panel key is NOT pressed for a certain amount of time. The default time
activates the screen saver after 10 minutes. The time can be adjusted by the
user or screen saving can be disabled.
OPERATION
To access the SCREEN SAVER function, press [SPECIAL] and select
<4prefs>, <1ScrSav>. Edit the time, in minutes, after which the screen saver will
activate to dim the screen. Set zero to disable the SCREEN SAVER function.
Setting the screen saver time to zero disables the screen saver function so
that the display remains permanently at full brightness.
3.11.4.2
<4PREFS>, <2SOUND>
PURPOSE
To adjust the key press sounds and turn piston position sounds ON and OFF.
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 provides audible feedback of valid and invalid key presses and of when
the piston leaves the high or low stop position (see Section 3.5). Key press
sounds can be adjusted in frequency or turned OFF completely. Piston position
sounds may be turned ON and OFF.
OPERATION
To access the audible feedback adjustment function, press [SPECIAL] and
select <4prefs>, <2sound>.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 114
3. GENERAL OPERATION
Select <1keypad> to adjust keypad sounds.
position sounds ON or OFF.
3.11.4.3
Select <2piston> to turn the
<4PREFS>, <3TIME>
PURPOSE
To view and edit the PG7000 internal time and date settings.
OPERATION
To access the time function press
[SPECIAL] and select <4prefs>,
<3time>. The display is:
Edit: 1time 2date
08:32:11 am 19980101
Select <1time> to edit the time. Edit hours, then minutes, then am/pm by
pressing [ENTER] at each entry. Seconds go to zero when minutes are entered.
Select <2date> to edit the date. The date must be specified in YYYYMMDD format.
The PG7000 date and time are set to United States Mountain Standard Time in
the final test and inspection process at the factory. If desired, use the date
function to set your local time and date.
3.11.4.4
<4PREFS>, <4ID>
PURPOSE
To view or edit the PG7000 user ID and to view the PG7000 serial number.
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 has a factory programmed serial number that is included on the rear of
the platform and can be viewed in the introductory screen.
PG7000 also allows the user to store one unique, twelve character, alpha
numeric ID number. This feature is frequently used to assign an organizational
control ID such as an asset number, tool number, standard number, etc. The ID
function allows the ID number to be viewed and edited. It also displays the
PG7000 factory serial number.
OPERATION
To access the ID function press [SPECIAL] and select <4prefs>, <4ID>.
Select <1view> to view the current ID.
Select <2edit> to edit the ID.
The ID has twelve characters. When the edit screen is opened, the cursor is on the
first character. Numerical values can be entered directly from the keypad.
In addition, the [←] and [→] keys can be used to toggle through a list of available
alpha numeric characters. Holding the key steps through the characters. Character
order going up ([→]) is: blank space, symbols, lower case letters, upper case
letters, numbers. Press [ENTER] to select a character and move to the next
character.
When a character is selected the cursor moves to the next character. To leave a
blank character, press [ENTER] with the field for that character blank.
Press [ESCAPE] when all ID characters have been entered to access the
<Save ID?> option. Select <1no> to abandon edits and exit or select <2yes> to
save the edited ID.
Page 115
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The ID can be viewed and edited but it cannot be cleared or reset by any reset
functions (see Section 3.11.9).
3.11.4.5
<4PREFS>, <5LEVEL>
PURPOSE
To set user protection levels that restrict access to certain functions and to edit
the password required for changing User Levels.
PRINCIPLE
PG7000’s front panel user interface provides the means to access all PG7000 user
defined data, settings and functions including calibration data. Inadvertent,
uninformed or unauthorized altering or deleting of data, settings and functions could
require extensive reconfiguration by the user and might cause invalid readings. For
these reasons, depending upon the application in which PG7000 is being used, it
may be desirable to restrict access to certain functions. The USER LEVEL function
provides a means of restricting access to certain functions. Four different levels of
security are available: none, low, medium and high.
Access to changing security levels can be left open, or be protected by a
password so that security levels can be used as a convenient way to avoid
accidental changing of data or as a secured means of preventing tampering with
PG7000 settings.
The security levels are structured to support typical operating environments as
follows:
None
This level is intended for use only by the system manager and/or calibration
facility. It allows access and editing in all areas including critical metrological
information and other settings that affect measurement integrity.
Low
Low security is designed to protect the specific metrological information and
system diagnostic and maintenance functions of the system against accidental
alteration. It is intended for an advanced operator performing many different
tasks. Low security is the default User Level setting.
Medium
Medium security is designed to protect specific metrological information in the system
and to ensure that PG7000 is operated using consistent operational parameters.
High
High security protects all operating parameters. It is intended to minimize
operator choices (e.g., to perform repeated identical tests under consistent
conditions).
PG7000 is delivered with the security level set to low to avoid inadvertent altering
of critical internal settings but with unrestricted access to changing security
level setting. It is recommended that the low security level be maintained at all times
and password protection be implemented if control over setting of security levels
is desired.
If there is a risk of unauthorized changing of the security level, changing
authority should be password protected (see OPERATION of this section).
The High security level disables remote communications and returns an error
message (“ERROR”) to all remote commands. All other security levels have NO effect
on remote communications.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 116
3. GENERAL OPERATION
The security levels are structured to support typical levels of operation.
Specifically, the security levels prevent execution of the functions marked by “•”:
Table 20. Security Levels - Functions NOT Executed Per Function/Level
FUNCTION
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
[P-C]
•
[UNIT]
•
[MODE]
•
[SYSTEM]
•
[AMBIENT]
•
•
[HEAD]
•
[ROTATE]
•
[GEN]
•
[RES] (change setting)
•
•
[P OR M]
•
•
[SETUP], <1select>
•
•
•
[SETUP], <2view>
•
[SETUP], <3edit>
•
•
[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <any selection>, <1view>
[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <any selection>, <2edit>
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <any selection>, <3add>
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <any selection>, <4delete>
•
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <1PC>, <5select>
[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <2mass set>, <5select>
•
•
[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <2mass bell>, <5select>
•
•
[SPECIAL], <2presU>
•
•
[SPECIAL], <3head>
•
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <4prefs>, <3time> (make changes)
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <4prefs>, <4ID>, <2edit>
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <4prefs>
•
[SPECIAL], <6remote> (access)
[SPECIAL], <6remote> (make changes)
•
•
[SPECIAL], <5prefs>, <3time> (make changes)
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <6gl> (access)
•
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <7cal>, (access)
•
•
[SPEICAL], <8AMH>, <any selection>
•
•
[SPECIAL], <9reset>
•
•
[SPECIAL], <7cal>, <any selection except 5Pposition>, <2cal>
•
[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <1sets>
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <3com>
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <4cal>
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <5setups>
•
•
•
[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <6all>
•
•
•
Remote communications disabled
Page 117
•
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OPERATION
PG7000 is delivered with NO active password so access to the User Level
menu is open. The User Level is set to <1Low>. User Levels can be changed freely
until a password has been created. Reset functions (see Section 3.11.9) do not
affect the password setting.
To access the User Level function, press [SPECIAL] and select <2level>.
If NO password yet exists or if the
correct password has been entered, the
display is:
1change user level
Selecting <1change user level> brings
up the restriction menu:
Restriction: 1none
2edit password
2low 3medium 4high
You can then select the current restriction level, or press [ESCAPE] to return to
the main run screen.
Selecting <2edit password> displays the
user password and allows it to be edited.
Passwords can be up to six numbers in
length and cannot start with a zero.
Password: pppppp
0 disables password
If 0 is entered as the password value, then the password is made inactive and a
password will NOT be required to access the User Level menu. This is the
factory default with a security level of <2low>.
Once a password has been entered, the User Level cannot be changed without
reentering the password.
If there is an active password, the
PG7000 password entry screen appears.
PG7000 NS nnn-xx
Password: pppppp
The user must enter the user defined password or the factory secondary
password to proceed. When a password is entered correctly, operation
proceeds to the <1change user level 2edit password> screen.
The first field, <nnnn>, is the serial number of PG7000, followed by a second
field, <xx>. That counts the number of times that a secondary password has
been used. This second field increments each time a secondary password
is used. The third field, <pppppp>, is for normal password entry.
The factory secondary password is available in case the user’s password has
been misplaced or forgotten. It can be obtained by contacting a DHI Authorized
Service Provider. The factory secondary password is different for all PG7000’s
and changes each time it is used.
3.11.5
<5REMOTE>
PURPOSE
To configure the PG7000 COM1, COM2, COM3 and IEEE-488 communication ports. To test
COM1, COM2 and COM3 communications.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 118
3. GENERAL OPERATION
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 has three RS232 communications ports referred to as COM1, COM2 and COM3
and a single IEEE-488 port. COM1 and the IEEE-488 port are for communicating with a host
computer (see Section 4). COM2 is for communicating with an external barometer and/or
vacuum gauge (see Section 3.11.5.4, 3.11.5.5) or for pass through commands to an RS232
device.
COM3 is reserved for communications with an automated pressure
generation/control component. The communication ports can be set up from the PG7000
front panel.
PG7000 provides a self-test for its RS232 communication ports. The self-test allows
verification that the PG7000 RS232 ports (COM1, COM2, COM3) are operating properly and
that a valid interface cable is being used. (see Section 3.11.5.3)
OPERATION
To access the port communications settings, press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>.
Select <1COM1>, <2COM2>, <3COM3> or <4IEEE-488> to view and edit that port’s
communications settings (see Section 4.2.1 for information on COM port settings). Selecting
<2COM2> includes the choice to set up external barometer communications as well as the
port’s communications settings. Select <1settings> to view and edit COM2 communications
settings. Select <2baro> to view and edit external barometer communications settings (see
Section 3.11.5.4).
To access the RS232 self-test press [SPECIAL], <5remote>, <5RS232test>.
3.11.5.1
COM1, COM2 AND COM3 (RS232)
The COMx ports can be set for the specific settings required by the user.
The settings are baud rate, parity, data bits and stop bits. The available options
are found in Table 21.
Table 21. COM1, COM2 and COM3 Available Settings
BAUD RATE
PARITY
300, 600, 1 200, 2 400, 4 800, 9 600, 19 200
NONE, ODD or EVEN
DATA BITS
7 or 8
STOP BITS
1 or 2
TERMINATORS
<CR><LF> or <LF><CR>
The default COMx settings are 2400, E, 7,1, <CR><LF> or <LF><CR> for all three
COM ports.
PG7000 appends a carriage return (<CR>) and a line feed (<LF>) or <LF><CR>
to all messages that are sent out of the COM1 port to the host. It looks for a
carriage return to terminate incoming messages and ignores line feeds. The
user MUST wait for a reply to each message sent to PG7000 before sending
another message to it (see Section 4.3).
3.11.5.2
IEEE-488
The IEEE-488 port address can be defined from 1 to 31. The default address is 10.
PG7000 sends a line feed (<LF>) and asserts the EOI line at the end of all
transmitted messages. It looks for a line feed and/or assertion of the EOI line to
terminate incoming messages.
Page 119
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.11.5.3
RS232 SELF TEST
The RS232 self-test is provided to check the PG7000 COM ports and the
interface cable independently of an external device or computer.
If you are having difficulty communicating with PG7000 from a host
computer using RS232, the RS232 self test can help establish that the PG7000
COM1 port you are trying to communicate with and the interface cable you are
using are good.
To run a self test of the RS232 ports (COM1 and COM2 or COM1 and COM3),
press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>, <5RS232test>.
Then select
<1COM2> to test COM1 and COM2 or <2COM3> to test COM1 and COM3.
The display prompts you to connect COM1 to COM2 or COM1 to COM3 using a
standard pin-to-pin DB-9F to DB-9M RS232 cable (see Section 4.2.1).
Once the cable has been installed, press [ENTER] to run the self-test. The test
is first executed in the COM1→COM2 (or COM3) direction and then in the COM2
(or COM3) →COM1 direction.
If the COM1→COM2 (or COM3) test passes: <PASSED> displays briefly and
the test proceeds to COM2 (or COM3) →COM1.
If COM2 (or COM3) →COM1 passes: <PASSED> is displayed briefly followed
by the conclusion, <PG7000 RS232 test has PASSED>.
If a test fails: Execution is suspended until [ENTER] is pressed.
The PG7000 RS232 test can fail for three reasons:
1. The RS232 cable being used is incorrect (see Section 4.2.1, for information on
the correct cable).
2. COM1 and COM2 (or COM3) do NOT have the same serial communications
settings and therefore cannot communicate together (see Section 3.11.5.1 to set
the COM ports).
3. One of the COM ports is defective.
The reason for failed communications is almost always a cable or incorrect RS232
interface settings. Be sure that these are correct before concluding that a COM
port is defective.
3.11.5.4
EXTERNAL BAROMETER (RPM) COMMUNICATIONS
(COM2)
PURPOSE
To set up communications with an external barometer from which PG7000 will
read the value of atmospheric pressure used in its internal calculations. The
external device is also used for reading the static pressure when PG7601 is used
in differential mode (see Section 3.9.4).
The source of the values of atmospheric pressure used by PG7000 in its
internal calculations is determined by the AtmP setting in the current SETUP file
(see Section 3.10). Setting up communications with an external barometer does NOT
set PG7000 to utilize the external barometer.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 120
3. GENERAL OPERATION
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 uses atmospheric pressure values in its calculations of reference
pressure (see Section 7.2). The source of the value is determined by the AtmP
setting in the current SETUP file (see Section 3.10). One of the possible sources
is COM2, which allows an external barometer, connected to PG7000’s COM2
RS232 port to be read automatically to obtain the atmospheric pressure values
that are used. In order to communicate with an the external barometer PG7000’s
COM2 must be properly set up. This setup occurs by pressing [SPECIAL] and
selecting <5remote>, <2COM2>, <2baro>.
OPERATION
To set up PG7000’s COM2 port to communicate with an external barometer,
press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>, <2COM2>, <2baro>. Select <1RPMx>
if the external barometer is a DHI RPM.
Select <2user> to set up
communications with a barometer other than a DHI RPM.
Setting Up for User Barometer Communications
For a remote barometer to be able to be used for automated atmospheric
pressure readings on PG7000 COM2, the following requirements apply to the remote
barometer’s communications:
• Replies to a request to send string within 2 seconds.
• Accepts <CR, LF> terminators.
• Supplies <CR> or <CR, LF> terminators.
• Request to send string must be printable alphanumeric (no control
modes or nulls).
After pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting
<5remote>,
<2COM2>,
<2baro>,
<2user>, the display is:
COM2 meas req string
The string value is entered on the second line. It may have up to 20 characters.
When the string screen is opened, the cursor is on the first character.
Numerical values can be entered directly from the keypad. In addition, the [←] and
[→] keys can be used to toggle through a list of available alpha numeric characters.
Holding the key steps through the characters. Character order going up ([→]) is:
blank space, symbols, lower case letters, upper case letters, numbers.
Press [ENTER] to select a character and move to the next character. When a
character is selected the cursor moves to the next character. To leave a character
blank, press [ENTER] with the field for that character blank. After the last character
has been entered, press [ESCAPE]. This causes a <Save edits?> screen
to appear. Select <2yes> to save the edited string and move to the next screen.
th
Select <1no> abandon the edits. Also, if [ENTER] is pressed on the 20 character,
the string is saved automatically and operation advances to the next screen.
The external barometer parameters including the communication string can
also be set by remote command, which is more convenient than front panel entry (see
Section 4.3.4.2, “UDD” command).
Page 121
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
After the string value has been entered
the display is:
Reply conv coef:
1.000000 Pa/unit
<conv coef> is the conversion coefficient that PG7000 will use to convert
readings from the external barometer to the pressure unit of measure
Pascal [Pa]. If the readings from the external barometer are NOT Pascal, edit
the conversion coefficient value as needed to convert the readings to Pascal.
When the conversion coefficient is entered
the next setup screen is opened. The
display is:
Leading characters to
Strip: 0
This entry specifies the leading characters in the return string that precede the
numerical value of the pressure. PG7000 will strip the specified number of
characters from the front of the return string and assume that the next character
is the first number defining the current value of atmospheric pressure.
To verify whether external barometer communications have been set up properly,
select a SETUP file that specifies COM2 under AtmP (see Section 3.10) and verify
that communications with the external barometer are achieved. Then view current
barometer readings in the AMBIENT run screen (see Section 3.9.6) and verify that
the readings are correct. Note that a fluid head correction should be set if the
external barometer is not at the PG7000 reference level. This correction may cause
the reading of the external barometer and the value of ambient pressure indicated
by the PG7000 to not be identical (see Section 3.11.3.3).
For communications with an external barometer on COM2 to be established
properly, the inquiry string to send to the barometer must be defined following this
section and the PG7000 COM2 port and barometer COM port must have the same
communications settings. Press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>, <2COM2>,
<1settings> to set up PG7000 COM2 communications settings. When unable to
establish communications between COM2 and the external barometer, consider using
the PG7000 RS232 self test to verify COM2 operation (see Section 3.11.5.3).
If
both a barometer and a vacuum gauge are connected, the barometer must always be
the first device connected to the PG7000 Platform COM2.
3.11.5.5
EXTERNAL VACUUM GAUGE COMMUNICATIONS
(COM2) (PG7601 ONLY)
PURPOSE
To set up communications with an external vacuum gauge from which PG7601
will read the value of reference vacuum under the bell jar used in the calculation of
absolute pressure in absolute by vacuum measurement mode (see Section 3.9.4).
The source of the value of vacuum pressure used by PG7000 in its internal
calculations is determined by the Vac setting in the current SETUP file (see Section
3.10). Setting up communications with an external vacuum gauge does NOT set
PG7601 to utilize the external vacuum gauge.
PRINCIPLE
PG7601 uses a value of reference vacuum under the bell jar in its calculation of
the pressure defined by the PG in absolute by vacuum measurement mode (see
Section 7.2). The source of the value is determined by the Vac setting in the
current SETUP file (see Section 3.10). One of the possible sources is COM2,
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 122
3. GENERAL OPERATION
which allows an external vacuum gauge, connected to PG7601’s COM2 RS232
port to be read automatically to obtain the reference vacuum values that are
used. In order to communicate with the external vacuum gauge, PG7601’s
COM2 must be properly set up. This setup occurs by pressing [SPECIAL] and
selecting <5remote>, <2COM2>, <3vac>.
If a DHI RPM is being used on COM2 for external measurement of barometric
pressure, the vacuum gauge may be connected to COM2 of the RPM. In this case,
COM2 of the RPM barometer must be set to have the same communication settings
as the external vacuum gauge.
If both a barometer and a vacuum gauge are
connected, the barometer must always be the first device connected to the PG7000
Platform COM2.
OPERATION
To set up PG7601’s COM2 port to communicate with an external vacuum gauge,
press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>, <2COM2>, <3vac>. Select <1RPMx>
if the external barometer is a DHI RPM.
Select <2user> to set up
communications with a vacuum gauge other than a DHI RPM.
Setting Up for User Vacuum Gauge Communications
For an external vacuum gauge to be able to be used for automated reference
vacuum readings on PG7601 COM2 or a DHI RPM’s COM2, the following requirements
apply to the remote vacuum gauge’s communications:
• Replies to a request to send string within 2 seconds.
• Accepts <CR, LF> terminators.
• Supplies <CR> or <CR, LF> terminators.
• Request to send string must be printable alphanumeric (no control
modes or nulls).
After pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting
<5remote>, <2COM2>, <3vac>, <2user>,
the display is:
COM2 meas req string
The string value is entered on the second line. It may have up to 20 characters.
When the string screen is opened, the cursor is on the first character.
Numerical values can be entered directly from the keypad. In addition, the [←] and
[→] keys can be used to toggle through a list of available alpha numeric characters.
Holding the key steps through the characters. Character order going up ([→]) is:
blank space, symbols, lower case letters, upper case letters, numbers.
Press [ENTER] to select a character and move to the next character. When a
character is selected the cursor moves to the next character. To leave a character
blank, press [ENTER] with the field for that character blank. After the last character
has been entered, press [ESCAPE]. This causes a <Save edits?> screen
to appear. Select <2yes> to save the edited string and move to the next screen.
Select <1no> abandon the edits. Also, if [ENTER] is pressed on the 20th character,
the string is saved automatically and operation advances to the next screen.
Page 123
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The external vacuum gauge parameters including the communication string can
also be set by remote command which is more convenient than front panel entry (see
Section 4.3.4.2, “UDV” command).
After the string value has been entered
the display is:
Reply conv coef:
1.000000 Pa/unit
<conv coef> is the conversion coefficient that PG7600 will use to convert
readings from the external vacuum gauge to the pressure unit of measure
Pascal [Pa]. If the readings from the external vacuum gauge are NOT Pascal,
edit the conversion coefficient value as needed to convert the readings to Pascal.
When the conversion coefficient is entered
the next setup screen is opened. The
display is:
Leading characters to
Strip: 0
This entry specifies the leading characters in the return string that precede the
numerical value of the pressure. PG7601 will strip the specified number of
characters from the front of the return string and assume that the next character is
the first number defining the current value of reference vacuum.
To verify whether external vacuum gauge communications have been set up
properly, select a SETUP file that specifies COM2 under Vac (see Section 3.10) and
verify that communications with the external vacuum gauge are achieved. Then
view current vacuum readings in the AMBIENT run screen (see Section 3.9.6) and
verify that the readings are correct.
For communications with an external vacuum gauge on COM2 to be established
properly, the inquiry string to send to the vacuum gauge must be defined following
this section and the PG7000 COM2 port and vacuum gauge COM port must have the
same communications settings (or if the vacuum gauge is connected to COM2 of a
DHI RPM, the RPM3 COM2 and vacuum gauge COM port must have the same
communication settings. Press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>, <2COM2>,
<1settings> to set up PG7000 COM2 communications settings. When unable to
establish communications between COM2 and the external vacuum gauge, consider
using the PG7000 RS232 self test to verify COM2 operation (see Section 3.11.5.3).
3.11.6
<6gl>
PURPOSE
To view and set the value of local gravity used by PG7000 in reference pressure calculations
(see Section 7.2) when gl is specified as the gravity value in SETTINGS (see Section 3.10).
OPERATION
To access the PG7000 local gravity value (gl), press
[SPECIAL] and select <6gl>. The display is:
Local gravity:
9.806650 m/s2
The value displayed is the PG7000 local gravity value. This value can be edited unless it is
protected by the current security level. The default value is normal gravity of 9.806650 m/s2.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 124
3. GENERAL OPERATION
The local gravity (gl) value may or may not be used by PG7000 in its calculations of defined
pressure. Whether gl or another value, such as normal gravity, is used is determined by the
current SETUP file (see Section 3.10), not by what is entered by pressing [SPECIAL] and
selecting <6gl>.
3.11.7
<7CAL>
PURPOSE
To view the output of and adjust or calibrate PG7000’s internal sensors and measurement
systems including:
Barometric pressure
Ambient relative humidity
Ambient temperature
Piston-cylinder module temperature
Vacuum (PG7601 only)
Piston position
Piston rotation rate
In normal operation, the measurements made by PG7000s internal sensors can be viewed
in the SYSTEM and AMBIENT run screens by pressing [SYSTEM] or [AMBIENT]
(see Sections 3.9.5 and 3.9.6).
PRINCIPLE/OPERATION
PG7000 internal sensor adjustment functions are considered part of PG7000 maintenance
and are covered in the maintenance section of this manual (see Section 5).
3.11.8
<8AMH>
PURPOSE
Control optional AMH automated mass handling system directly and view its status (see the
AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual for information).
PRINCIPLE
An optional automated mass handling system is available for PG7000 Platforms. AMH-38 is
used with PG7601 and AMH-100 is used with other models.
Operation of the AMH is integrated into PG7000 Platform operation so that mass handling
occurs automatically when necessary. [SPECIAL], <8AMH> accesses functions to view the
current mass loading status, load all masses, unloaded all masses and load specific masses.
OPERATION
To access the AMH status and control functions, an AMH automated mass handler must
already be initialized by selecting an AMH type mass set (see Section 3.11.1.10). To access
the AMH status and control functions, press [SPECIAL], <8AMH>.
Select <1status> for a display of the current loaded/not loaded status of AMH masses (the
indication is the same as the discreet control function screen in Section 3.11.8.2).
Page 125
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Select <2control> to control AMH directly:
Select <1up/down> to move the AMH mass handler up or down (see Section
3.11.8.1).
Select <2discreet> to specify masses to be loaded and unloaded (see Section
3.11.8.2).
Select <3loadall> to load all the AMH masses onto the piston (see Section 3.11.8.3).
Select <4unloadall> to unload all the AMH masses from the piston (see Section
3.11.8.3).
3.11.8.1
<2CONTROL>, <1UP/DOWN>
PURPOSE
To move the AMH mass load to the up or down position (see the AMH-38/
AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual).
OPERATION
To move the AMH mass handler to the up and down positions, press [SPECIAL],
<8AMH>, <1up/down>.
The display indicates the current position.
position.
Press [ENTER] to change the
Do not put your fingers or anything else under the AMH trim mass tray. When
the mass load is lowered, it will pinch or crush anything under it.
3.11.8.2
<2CONTROL>, <2DISCREET>
PURPOSE
To load and unload specifc AMH masses.
OPERATION
To load and unload specific AMH masses, press [SPECIAL], <8AMH>,
<2control>, <2discreet>.
The display is (64 is present only with
AMH-100):
1* 2
64
4* 8
16
32
Main:1
The <1>, <2>, <4>, <8>, <16>, <32> and <64> indicate the 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6,
3.2 and 6.4 kg masses. <*> indicates that the mass is loaded. Move the cursor
to a mass and press [+/-] or [.] to change its status.
<Main:> indicates the number of main masses that are loaded. Edit this number
to the desired value.
If any condition in the discreet display is changed the bottom right of the display
changes to <ENT loads>. Press [ENTER] to causes AMH to operate to load the
new mass configuration. Press [ESCAPE] to return to the AMH menu with no
change in mass load.
Do not put your fingers or anything else under the AMH trim mass tray. When
the mass load is lowered, it will pinch or crush anything under it.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 126
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.11.8.3
<2CONTROL>, <3LOADALL>
PURPOSE
To clear the AMH mass handler and cause all the masses in the AMH mass set to
be loaded onto the piston. The function is used to remove all the masses from the
AMH mass handler and prepare it to be removed or installed on the PG7000
platform.
OPERATION
To load all AMH masses, press [SPECIAL], <8AMH>, <3loadall>. Confirm the
loadall instruction and AMH proceeds to lower all the masses onto the piston.
Do not put your fingers or anything else under the AMH trim mass tray. When
the mass load is lowered, it will pinch or crush anything under it.
3.11.8.4
<2CONTROL>, <4UNLOADALL>
PURPOSE
To clear the AMH mass handler and cause all the masses in the AMH mass set
to be unloaded from the piston (retained in the AMH automated mass hander).
OPERATION
To unload all AMH masses, press [SPECIAL], <8AMH>, <4unloadall>. Confirm the
unloadall instruction and AMH proceeds to raise all the masses off the piston. When
the mass handler lowers, the bell and mass lifting shaft are still loaded on the piston.
Do not put your fingers or anything else under the AMH trim mass tray. When
the mass load is lowered, it will pinch or crush anything under it.
3.11.9
<9RESET>
PURPOSE
To reset various PG7000 settings to default or factory values.
PG7000 stores its user definable settings in non-volatile memory. The reset menu allows the
user to selectively or completely reset these settings to factory defaults. Resets clear
settings that the user may have made, and should be used only to restore the PG7000 to a
known state. PG7000 will go through its reboot routine after any type of reset is executed.
OPERATION
To access the reset choices press [SPECIAL] and
select <9reset>. The display is:
1sets 2units 3com
4cal 5setups 6all
Select the desired reset. After confirmation, the reset occurs. A reset always puts PG7000
through its start up routine as if power had been turned OFF and back ON.
See Sections 3.11.9.1 through 3.11.9.6 for detailed information on the specific reset choices.
Reset functions change user settings that affect pressure measurement. If not used
properly, resetting can cause out of tolerance measurements. Reset functions should only be
used by qualified personnel with reference to this manual for information on the reset functions.
Page 127
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.11.9.1
<9RESET>, <1SETS>
PURPOSE/OPERATION
To access Reset - Sets, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <1sets>.
Reset - Sets clears and sets to default the user settings. This includes:
•
Pressure unit of measure to pressure unit #1 of [UNIT] (see Section 3.9.3).
•
Measurement mode to gauge (see Section 3.9.4).
•
DUT head height to zero and ATM head height to -10 cm (see Sections
3.9.7, 3.11.3.3).
•
DUT head height units to centimeters (see Section 3.11.3.2).
•
PISTON head correction ON (PG7302 only) (see Section 3.11.3.4).
•
Set up file to #1 (see Section 3.10).
•
Active piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass loading bell to #1 (first in list)
(see Sections 3.11.1.5, 3.11.1.10, 3.11.1.15).
•
Mass loading resolution to 0.01 g (see Section 3.9.10).
•
Automatic rotation off (see Section 3.9.8).
•
Automatic rotation pre-decel on (see Section 3.9.8.1).
•
Automatic pressure generation off (see Section 3.9.9).
•
Automatic pressure generation controller raise function to OFF (see Section
3.9.9.2).
•
Automatic pressure generation controller tolerance to 0.05% of full scale
(see Section 3.9.9.4).
•
Automatic pressure generation controller refloat function to ON (see Section
3.9.9.5).
•
Mode to pressure to mass (see Section 3.9.12).
•
Screen saver to 10 minutes (see Section 3.11.4.1).
•
PC sounds to ON and keyboard sounds to medium frequency (see Section 3.11.4.2).
3.11.9.2
<9RESET>, <2UNITS>
PURPOSE/OPERATION
To access Reset - Units, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <2units>.
Reset - Units clears and sets to default all unit of measure functions. This includes:
•
[UNIT] pressure unit of measure selections to defaults and active unit to #1
(see Section 3.9.3).
•
Sets the user pressure unit coefficient to 1.00/Pa (see Section 3.9.3.1).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 128
3. GENERAL OPERATION
3.11.9.3
<9RESET>, <3COM>
OPERATION/PURPOSE
To access Reset - Com, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <3com>.
Reset - Com clears and sets to default the PG7000 communications ports
(see Section 3.11.5). This includes:
COM1, COM2 and COM3
Baud Rate
2 400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
7
Stop Bits
1
Terminating Characters
<CR>, <LF>
IEEE-488 (GPIB)
Address
Terminating Characters
COM2 User Barometer Inquiry String and Characters
3.11.9.4
10
<CR>, <LF>
Learned
(see Section 3.10.9.4)
<9RESET>, <4CAL>
OPERATION/PURPOSE
Use special caution with this reset as critical calibration data may be altered.
To access Reset - Cal, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <4cal>.
Reset - Cal DOES NOT reset piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass bell files.
There is no user available reset for them.
Reset - Cal clears and sets to default the user calibration coefficients for PG7000
on-board sensors (see Section 5.2.1). This includes:
Barometric Sensor
Adder
0
Multiplier
1
Calibration Date
19980101
Humidity Sensor
Adder
0
Multiplier
1
Calibration Date
19980101
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Adder
0
Multiplier
1
Calibration Date
19980101
Piston-Cylinder Module Temperature Sensor
RZ
Slope
Calibration Date
100.000 Ω
0.3896
19980101
Vacuum Gauge (PG7601 Only)
Adder
0
Multiplier
1
Calibration Date
Page 129
19980101
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Reset - Cal has NO effect on the reference resistance values used to calibrate
PG7000s internal ohmic measurement system (see Section 5.3).
3.11.9.5
<9RESET>, <5SETUPS>
To access Reset - Setups, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <5setups>.
Reset - Setups deletes all SETUP files and selects SETUP file #1 as the active
SETUP file (see Section 3.10).
3.11.9.6
<9RESET>, <6ALL>
OPERATION/PURPOSE
To return PG7000 to the original, as delivered, factory condition.
To access Reset - All, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <6all>.
•
Performs the functions of the Sets, Units, Cal and Com resets
(see Sections 3.11.9.1 to 3.11.9.5).
•
User security level to low, but does not affect the User Level password
(see Section 3.11.8).
•
Local gravity to 9.80665 m/s2 (see Section 3.11.6)
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 130
4. REMOTE OPERATION
4.
REMOTE OPERATION
4.1
OVERVIEW
Most of the PG7000 Terminal’s front panel functions can also be executed by commands from
a remote computer. The host computer can communicate with PG7000 using the COM1 RS232 port
or the IEEE-488 port located on the PG7000 Platform rear panel. The command syntax is the same for
either port except when using the IEEE STD. 488.2 Common commands.
4.2
INTERFACING
Sending a command to PG7000 places it in remote mode. The function keys on the front panel are
locked-out, except for the [SYSTEM] and [AMBIENT] keys which still respond to allow the user to
change the data displayed. Pressing the [ESC] key returns PG7000 to local mode unless the “REMOTE”
command was sent which locks out keypad operation until the “LOCAL” command is sent.
Most remote commands return a reply within 500 ms. The following commands may query external
devices connected to PG7000’s COM2 and/or COM3 ports and can take up to 5 seconds to reply:
“MASS=” (possible communications with an external AMH mass handler)
“PGEN=” (requires communications with an external pressure controller)
“SETUP=” (possible communications with external barometer or vacuum gage)
You must wait for this reply before issuing another command to PG7000. This ensures that PG7000 has
completed the command. An exception is the use of any of the IEEE STD. 488.2 Common Commands
(see Section 4.3.4.1) via the IEEE-488 interface (common commands all start with an asterisk, “*”). The
common commands only generate a reply if using the COM1 port or if the query form of the common
command is used (command followed by a “?”).
4.2.1
RS232 INTERFACE
To establish RS232 communications a standard pin-to-pin DB-9F to DB-9M RS232 cable
must be used to connect the host COM port to PG7000 COM1. The interface settings of both
ports must be the same.
PG7000 supports an independent RS232 self-test to verify that the PG7000 RS232 ports
are operating correctly and the interface cable being used is valid. Use this self-test to
troubleshoot if you are having difficulty establishing communications with any PG7000 COM1 (see
Section 3.11.5.3).
Page 131
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.2.1.1
COM1
The PG7000 COM1 RS232 interface is located on the PG7000 Platform rear
panel. It is a 9-pin female DB-9F connector configured as a DCE device. Data is
transmitted out of PG7000 using pin 2, and is received on pin 3. This allows a
standard pin-to-pin DB-9M to DB-9F RS232 cable to be used to connect to a
DTE host. Handshaking is NOT required or supported.
COM1 RS232 commands must be terminated with at least a single carriage
return character, while line feed characters are ignored. All RS232 responses
from PG7000 are terminated with a carriage return character and a line feed
character (either <CR><LF> or <LF><CR> see Section 3.11.5.1).
Table 22. COM1 DB-9F Pin Designation
IBM PC/XT DB-9F CONNECTIONS
IBM PC/XT DB-9M to PG7000 DB9F CONNECTIONS
DB-25M
DB-9F
DB-9M
DB-9F
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
7
5
5
5
4.2.1.2
COM2 AND COM3
The PG7000 COM2 and COM3 RS232 interfaces are located on the PG7000
Platform rear panel. They are 9-pin male DB-9M connectors configured as a
DTE device. Data is transmitted out of PG7000 using pin 3 and is received on
pin 2. This allows a standard pin-to-pin DB-9F to DB-9M RS232 cable to be
used to connect to a DCE slave. Handshaking is NOT required or supported.
COM2 and COM3 are used by the PG7000 Platform to communicate with external
devices. An external barometer and/or vacuum gauge can be connected to COM2
(see Sections 3.11.5.4, 3.11.5.5). An automated pressure control component can
be connected to COM3.
Table 23. COM2 and COM3 DB-9M Pin Designation
PIN #
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
2
RxD
This pin accepts serial data from another PG7000 or another
device.
3
TxD
This pin transmits serial data from the PG7000 to another
PG7000 or another device.
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready. Held at 5 Volts.
5
Grn
This pin is the common return for the TxD and RxD signals.
IBM PC/XT DB-25F to DB-9M
CONNECTIONS
IBM PC/XT DB-9F to PG7000 DB9M CONNECTIONS
DB-25F
DB-9M
DB-9F
DB-9M
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
7
5
5
5
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 132
4. REMOTE OPERATION
4.2.2
IEEE-488 (GPIB)
The PG7000 IEEE-488 interface is located on the PG7000 Platform rear panel. The physical
and electrical interface conforms to IEEE Std 488.1-1987 Subset E2 and IEEE
Std. 488.2-1992. You should NOT attempt to communicate with the IEEE-488 interface while
using the COM1 interface. The IEEE-488 receive buffer is 250 bytes deep. PG7000 will hold
OFF release of the NRFD handshake line until it can service and empty the receive buffer.
This keeps the buffer from overflowing.
IEEE-488 commands must be terminated with a single line feed character along with the
assertion of the EOI line. All IEEE-488 responses from PG7000 are terminated with a line
feed character along with the assertion of the EOI line. Replies are held in a buffer until the
host computer gets them, so it is possible to have old replies in this buffer, while you are
expecting new replies from a just issued command.
Address
4.3
10
Terminating Characters
<CR> and <LF> with EOI asserted with <LF>
IEEE Local Functions
Supported
SH1, AH1, T4, L2, RL2, DC2
Physical Interface
IEEE-488.2 with tri-state bus drivers
IEEE-488
To establish IEEE-488 communications the host computer must
have an IEEE-488 card and PG7000 must be correctly addressed.
PG7000’s IEEE-488 address can be set locally from the front panel
using [SPECIAL], <5Remote> (see Section 3.11.5.2). An IEEE-488
interface cable must be used.
Parallel poll mode is not supported
COMMANDS
4.3.1
COMMAND SYNTAX
All PG7000 commands are ASCII strings. The user must wait for PG7000 to reply before
sending another command. An exception to this is the use of any of the IEEE Std. 488.2
Common Commands via the IEEE-488 interface (these Common Commands are shown first
in 4.3.4.1 and always start with an asterisk: “*”). The common commands only generate a
reply if using the COM1 port or if the query form of the common command is used (command
followed by a “?”).
Page 133
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.3.2
COMMAND SUMMARY
Table 24. Command Summary
COMMAND
DESCRIPTION
ABORT
Interrupt PG7000 activity and put it in an idle state
AMPHx(=)
Set or read the source for ambient humidity
AMBPx(=)
Set or read the source for ambient pressure
AMBTx(=)
Set or read the source for ambient temperature
AMB
Read back the current ambient conditions
AMHERR
Read error messages from AMH automated mass handler
AMHLOAD(=)
Load or unload all AMH masses
AMHMS(=)
Read or set the discreet AMH mass load
AROT(=)
Set or read the current automated motorized rotation status
ATMHEIGHT(=)
Set or read the ATM head height
BELL(=)
Read or select the mass loading bell to use
BELLx(=)
Read or set a mass loading bell’s information
CALx(=)
Set or read the calibration coefficients for an internal sensor
*CLS
Clear the status registers and all queues
COMx(=)
Set or read the COMx port configuration
DATE(=)
Set or read the current date
DIFLOAD
Execute the mass load determined by the DIFSETUP command
DIFOFFSET(=)
Read or set the differential mode RPM offset value
DIFSETUP
Prepare PG7601 to determine the differential mode RPM offset
DUTHEIGHT(=)
Set or read the DUT head height
*ESE(?)
Read or set the Event Status Enable Register
ERR
Read the last error message
*ESR?
Read the Event Status Register
HLDFALL
Read the results of the last natural fall rate measurement step completed in high
line differential mode
HLDLINEP
Set a new line pressure in high line differential mode
HLDVIEW
Read the results of the last line pressure set in high line differential mode
HLDXFLT
Read the results of the last crossfloat fall rate measurement step completed in high
line differential mode
*IDN?
Identify the product and software version
LOCALG(=)
Set or read the local gravity
LOCAL
Local operation
MASSSETx(=)
Set or read the mass set values
MASSx(=)
Set or read the mass set data
MASS(=)
Set or read the selected mass set
MEDIA(=)
Set or read the DUT head medium
MEM
Read the memory OK flag
MMODE(=)
Set or read the measurement mode
MRES(=)
Set or read the mass loading resolution
MROT(=)
Set or read the manual motorized rotation status
MR
Read the current mass load
MS=
Specify a new mass target, loading masses if AMH enabled
OHMS
Read the ambient PRT and piston-cylinder PRT resistance
*OPC(?)
Read or set the Operation Complete register (not applicable to the PG7000)
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 134
4. REMOTE OPERATION
COMMAND
DESCRIPTION
*OPT?
Read the PG7000 options installed
PCTx(=)
Set or read the source for the piston-cylinder temp
PGEN(=)
Set or read the automated pressure generation setting
PISTONRDYx(=)
Set or read piston rotation rate limits.
PISTONVARx(=)
Set or read additional piston variables
PISTONx(=)
Set or read the piston header information
PISTON(=)
Set or read the piston in use
PPC=
Send a command to an external pressure generation/control component.
PPCPR
Read the pressure measured by a PPC pressure controller connected to PG7000’s
COM3.
PPOS
Read the current piston position
PRTPC
Set or read the piston cylinder temperature PRT information
PR
Read the current PG7000 defined pressure and “ready” status
PS=
Specify a new PG7000 target pressure, loading masses if AMH enabled
READYx(=)
Set or read the ready criteria for a specific “Setup”
READYCK(=)
Set or read the ready check flag status
REMOTE
Set the PG7000 into local lockout condition
RESET
Set basic PG7000 operating conditions to default. Equivalent to front panel “Reset,
Sets”.
RESUME
Resume the suspended process of setting a new pressure by remote command.
RESUME(=mode)
Set the resume mode, which determines whether a pressure setting process
initiated by remote command will pause after target entry and require the RESUME
comand to continue .
RPM(x)
Send a command to an external DHI RPM connected to COM2
*RST
Reset user settings to factory defaults
SETUP(=)
Set or read the setup to use
SN
Read the PG7000 serial number
SPEED
Read the piston rotation speed
*SRE(?)
Read or set the Service Request Register
*STB?
Read the Status Byte
TIME(=)
Set or read the current time
*TST?
Read the system self test results
UCOEF
Read the current pressure units conversion coefficient
UDD(=)
Set or read the user defined external barometer settings
UDU(=)
Set or read the user defined pressure unit
UDV(=)
Set or read the user defined external vacuum gage settings
UL(=)
Set or read the upper limit of an external pressure generation/control component.
UNIT(=)
Set or read the current pressure unit
VACPx(=)
Set or read the source for the vacuum measurement
VAC(=)
Set or read the vacuum reference flag
VENT(=)
To vent the test pressure to atmosphere if an automated pressure
generation/control component is being used for automatic pressure generation.
VER
Read version number of the internal software
VOL(=)
Read or set the currently active test volume for AutoGen using PG7203 or PG7307
with a PPCH pressure controller
#
Send a command through PG7000 to an external RPM on COM2
Page 135
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.3.3
ERROR MESSAGES
The PG7000 always replies to a command. If the command is incorrect or contains invalid
data, an error number is returned in the form “ERR# n” where n is an integer number that
represents a specific error. This allows for easy error trapping by the host computer.
Table 25 is a list of the possible error numbers and the error description for each.
Table 25. Error Messages
REPLY
DESCRIPTION
ERR #0
OK
ERR #1
First argument missing or out of range
ERR #2
Second argument missing or out of range
ERR #3
Third argument missing or out of range
ERR #4
Fourth argument missing or out of range
ERR #5
Fifth argument missing or out of range
ERR #6
Sixth argument missing or out of range
ERR #7
Seventh argument missing or out of range
ERR #8
Eighth argument missing or out of range
ERR #9
Unknown command
ERR #10
Motorized rotation recovering from overload
ERR #11
Command missing argument
ERR #12
System overpressured
ERR #13
External RPM or PG7000 not detected
ERR #14
User unit not defined
ERR #15
Range jumper setting invalid
ERR #16
Element not defined
ERR #17
UDD not defined
ERR #18
Command not yet available
ERR #19
Not available with gauge units
ERR #20
Not available with vacuum reference
ERR #21
Internal pointer error
ERR #22
Pressure must be below 20 psia
ERR #23
Option not available or installed
ERR #24
Not available with isolation on
ERR #25
Must be READY set
ERR #26
COM port failed to initialize
ERR #27
Internal device time out error
ERR #28
External device time out error
ERR #29
File not opened
ERR #30
File end
ERR #35
PG7601 must first be setup for differential mode
ERR #36
Mass load invalid
ERR #37
External device invalid
ERR #38
External device configured incorrectly
ERR #39
External device reply invalid
ERR #40
Not ready
ERR #41
Measurement outside limits
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 136
4. REMOTE OPERATION
4.3.3.1
AMH ERRORS
If the optional AMH mass handler is being used, it can generate it’s own error
message during operation. This usually occurs if the AMH is not properly setup,
or has a mechanical failure. The 3rd character of the “PR” query reply will be an
‘E’ to indicate if the AMH has failed to operate as expected. If this occurs, you
can use the “AMHERR” command to get the specific AMH error message, and
refer to the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual for more
details.
4.3.4
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
Each command description gives the full syntax showing usage. Ranges of parameters or
parameter types are indicated. There are two types of commands. The Common and Status
Commands support IEEE STD 488.2, while the PG7000 commands access all other functions.
4.3.4.1
IEEE STD. 488.2 COMMON AND STATUS COMMANDS
PG7000 supports a set of commands that are common to all instruments
conforming to IEEE Std. 488.2 protocol. Though defined by the IEEE-488.2
standard, they also apply to PG7000 RS232 (COM1) communications. These
commands make it easy to perform basic functions for any device that
supports them. These command also cover the status reporting commands.
Refer to Section 4.4 for details on the status registers mentioned in these
commands. Query forms of these commands must be followed by a question
mark and IEEE-488.2 Common Commands always start with an asterisk (“*”).
Unlike the other PG7000 commands, they must have a space instead of an
equals sign (“=”) between the command and any arguments. Also unlike the
other PG7000 commands, if you are using the IEEE-488 port, the query form
(command is immediately followed by a “?”) must be used to get a reply. If using
the COM1 port and the command is not a query, “OK” will be replied.
∗CLS
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
∗ESE(?)
Purpose
Syntax
Parameters
Query Reply
Remarks
Example
Clear all of the status and event structures.
“∗CLS”
This program message clears the following evens and status registers:
Standard Byte Register (STB)
Standard Event Status Register (ESR)
Error Queue
AMH error message
Pending OPC operations
Command:
“*CLS”
Reply:
“OK” (using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)
Read or set the Standard Event Status Enable Register.
“∗ESE n”
“∗ESE?”
n:
’0 to 255’ This is the decimal representation of the bit(s) to
enable. To enable the PON and QYE bits, the argument would
be 128 + 4 = 132.
n (0 to 255)
The Standard Event Status Enable register determines which bits in the standard Event
Status Register are enabled and included in the Status Byte Register (ESB bit), and can
assert the SRQ line. The reply is in decimal numeric form.
Command:
“*ESE 132”
Reply:
“OK” (using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)
Command:
“*ESE?”
Reply:
“132”
Page 137
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
∗ESR?
Purpose
Syntax
Query Reply
Remarks
Example
∗IDN?
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Query Reply
Example
∗OPC(?)
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Query Reply
Example
∗OPT?
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Query Reply
Example
∗RST
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
See Also:
∗SRE(?)
Purpose
Syntax
Parameters
Remarks
Query Reply
Example
Read the Standard Event Register.
“∗ESR?”
n (0 to 255)
The Standard Event Register contents are cleared after reading. The reply is in decimal
numeric form.
Command:
“*ESR?”
Reply:
“4”
Identify the PG7000 model, and serial number.
“∗IDN?”
The identification reply is made up of the manufacturer, the model, the serial number
and the software version. Each is separated by a comma.
The version string.
Command:
“*IDN?”
Reply:
“DH INSTRUMENTS INC, PG7102, 1001, Ver2.00 –fhf”
Sets the operation complete bit when all operations have completed.
“∗OPC”
“∗OPC?”
This Command enables PG7000 to set the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register
when it has completed all pending functions. The Query replies with a “1” when all functions
are complete.
Since PG7000 does not support overlapping commands, this command has no practical use.
“0” or “1”
Command:
“*OPC”
Reply:
“OK”
(using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)
Command:
“*OPC?”
Reply:
“1”
Reads the list of installed molbloc RFM options.
“∗OPT?”
This Query returns any registered option(s) installed in the PG.
separated by a comma.
A comma delimited text field of the installed options.
“*OPT?”
Command:
“NONE” (no options installed)
Reply:
“auto rotation” (auto rotation option)
Reply:
Each option is
Resets the PG7000 settings to factory settings.
“∗RST”
This Command sets the PG7000 settings to factory settings which is equivalent to a
front panel executed [SPECIAL], <5Reset>, 1sets.
This does not affect the
communications settings.
Command:
“*RST”
Reply:
“OK” (using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)
3.11.9.1
Read or set the Service Request Enable Register.
“∗SRE n”
“∗SRE?”
n:
’0 to 255’
This is the decimal representation of the bit(s) to enable. To allow the MAV and ESB
bits to assert the SRQ line, the argument would be 32 + 16 = 48. Bit 6 (64) is reserved
and cannot be set.
The Service Request Enable Register determines which bits of the Status Byte can set
the MSS bit of the Status Byte and request service by asserting the SRQ line of the
IEEE-488 interface.
n (0 to 255)
Command:
“*SRE 48”
Reply:
“OK” using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)
Command:
“*SRE?”
Reply:
“48”
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 138
4. REMOTE OPERATION
∗STB?
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Query Reply
Example
∗TST?
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Query Reply
Example
See Also
4.3.4.2
#
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
ABORT
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Read the Status Byte Register.
“∗STB?”
The Status Byte Register reflects the general status of the PG. The ‘MSS’ bit state is
represented by bit 6.
n (0 to 255)
Command:
“*STB?”
Reply:
“4”
Read the power on self test status.
“∗TST?””
The PG7000 system memory stores the user settings (units, mode, resolution) and
retains them when the unit is shut off. On power up, this memory is checked. If this
memory is corrupted, all user settings are reset to default (as if the “∗RST” program
message was executed), and the ∗TST query returns a ‘1’. If PG7000 passed the test
on power up OR if the ∗TST query was used at least once since the unit was powered
up the reply is ‘0’.
“0” or “1”
Command:
“*TST?”
Reply:
“1”
3.11.9.1
PG7000 COMMANDS
To send a command through PG7000 to an external device on COM2.
“#ddddd”
N/A
N/A
If PG7000 receives a command from the serial port (COM1) with a “#” as the leading
character, the character is stripped off and the command is sent out the secondary serial
port (COM2).
Any data received from the secondary serial port (COM2) is sent back out the main
serial port (COM1) automatically.
Typical command:
“#*0100P3”
Typical reply:
“*000114.503”
3.11.5
Aborts any active process executing in the PG7000.
“ABORT”
N/A
N/A
The ABORT command places the PG7000 in an Idle state, halting the execution of any
active processes. This includes automated AMH mass loads, auto float operations or
any differential or high line differential mode preparation sequence.
Typical command:
“ABORT”
Typical reply:
“ABORT”
None
“PS=”, “MS=”, AROT, DIFOFFSET, DIFSETUP, HLDLINEP
Page 139
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AMBHx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
AMBPx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Set or read the source for the ambient humidity measurement. Also optionally sets the
USER defined measurement.
“AMBHx=source, meas”
“AMBHx=source”
“AMBHx”
INTERNAL
x:
The setup number from 1 to 19. See the SETUP command.
Setup 21 is reserved for remote communication use only.
Source:
The measurement source. This can be INTERNAL, DEFAULT
(normal) or USER.
Meas:
The current measurement used. This can only be set if the
source argument is USER. If specified, the limit for this
argument is 0 to 100 %.
PG7000 has an on-board humidity sensor that can be used as the source of ambient
humidity values in calculations. You may also request that another source be used for
this measurement.
The measurement source can be the internal sensor, a user defined fixed value, or a
normal value. The SETUP function allows 19 separate source configurations for the
various SETUP variables to be saved in 19 files. The SETUP command selects which
of the files to make active. Setup number 1 is restricted as INTERNAL only to serve as
a manufacturer’s fixed Setup, and cannot be changed.
Typical command:
“AMBH2=USER,50”
Typical reply:
“USER, 50 %”
Typical command:
“AMBH9=INTERNAL”
Typical reply:
“INTERNAL, 25 %”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
The setup number x is invalid
ERR #1
The source argument is invalid
ERR #2
The meas argument is invalid
ERR #3
1.2.1.2, 3.1, 3.9.6, 3.10, SETUP
Set or read the source for the ambient pressure measurement. Also optionally sets the
USER defined measurement.
“AMBPx=source, meas”
“AMBPx=source”
“AMBPx”
INTERNAL
x:
The setup number from 1 to 21. See the SETUP command.
Setup 21 is reserved for remote communication use only.
Source:
The measurement source. This can be INTERNAL, DEFAULT
(normal), USER, RPM or the user defined barometer “label”.
Meas:
The current measurement used is kPaa. This can only be set if
the source argument is USER. If specified, the limit for this
argument is 70 to 110 kPaa.
PG7000 has an internal atmospheric pressure sensor that can be used as the source of
ambient pressure values in calculations. You may also request that another source be used
for this measurement.
The measurement source can be the internal sensor, a user defined fixed value, the
manufacturer’s fixed default value, an external RPM, or a user defined external barometer.
If an external RPM or a user defined external barometer is chosen, you must setup the
COM2 port to the proper settings. It is also advised to set this up prior to selecting the
setup to make the device active. If you specify “RPM” or the user defined barometer “label”
, then all other barometer source setups set to “RPM” or the user defined barometer will
change to this source, as it is a global selection.
The SETUP function allows 19 separate source configurations for the various SETUP
variables to be saved in 19 files. The SETUP command selects which of the files to make
active. Setup number 1 is the manufacturer’s preferred Setup, and cannot be changed.
The meas argument is used to allow the user to define a fixed value if the source is set to
USER. The reply will always include the source and the meas fields.
Typical command:
“AMBP2=USER,101.g0”
Typical reply:
“USER, 101.90 kPaa”
Typical command:
“AMBP9=INTERNAL”
Typical reply:
“INTERNAL, 98.234kPaa”
See the “UDU” command
See the “COM2” command
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
The setup number x is invalid
ERR #1
The source argument is invalid
ERR #2
The meas argument is invalid
ERR #3
1.2.1.2, 3.1, 3.9.6, 3.10, SETUP, UDU, COM2
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 140
4. REMOTE OPERATION
AMBTx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
AMB
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Set or read the source for the ambient temperature measurement. Also optionally sets
the USER defined measurement.
“AMBTx=source, meas”
“AMBTx=source”
“AMBTx”
INTERNAL
x:
The setup number from 1 to 21. See the SETUP command.
Setup 21 is reserved for remote communication use only.
Source:
The measurement source. This can be INTERNAL, DEFAULT
(normal), or USER.
Meas:
The current measurement used is degrees Celsius. This can
only be set if the source argument is USER. If specified, the
limit for this argument is 0 to 50 ° C.
PG7000 has an internal ambient temperature sensor that can be used as the source of
ambient temperature values in calculations. You may also request that another source be
used for this measurement.
The measurement source can be the internal sensor, a user defined fixed value or the
manufacturer’s fixed default value. The SETUP function allows 19 separate source
configurations for the various SETUP variables to be saved in 19 files. The SETUP
command selects which of the files to make active. The SETUP command selects which of
the 19 to use. Setup number 1 is restricted as INTERNAL only to serve as a
manufacturer’s fixed Setup, and cannot be changed.
The meas argument is used to allow the user to define a fixed value if the source is set to
USER. The reply will always include the source and the meas fields.
Typical command:
“AMBT2=USER,22.00”
Typical reply:
“USER, 22.0 dC”
Typical command:
“AMBT9=INTERNAL”
Typical reply:
“INTERNAL, 23.2 dC”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
The setup number x is invalid
ERR #1
The source argument is invalid
ERR #2
The meas argument is invalid
ERR #3
1.2.1.2, 3.1, 3.9.6, 3.10, SETUP
To read all of the ambient conditions from the sources defined by the current setup.
“AMB”
N/A
none
PG7000 calculations use five ambient conditions to calculate the current pressure. The
source of these ambient conditions is defined by the current setup (see the SETUP
command).
These ambient values can be read at once using this command. They are returned
along with the measurement units, and are separated by commas. The units and
resolution of the measurement fields are fixed. The format returned is:
“xxx.xxxx kPaa, xxx.x Paa, xxx %, xx.xx dC, xx.xx dC”
The first field is the atmospheric pressure.
The second field is the vacuum under the bell jar (PG76XX only).
The third field is the relative humidity.
The fourth field is the ambient temperature.
The fifth field is the piston-cylinder temperature.
Typical command:
“AMB”
Typical reply:
“98,4594 kPaa, 18.3 Paa, 24%, 23.45 dC, 22.53 dC
None
1.2.1.2, 3.1, 3.9.6, 3.10, SETUP
Page 141
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AMHERR
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
See Also
AMHLOAD=
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
AMHMS(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Argument
Remarks
Example
See Also
Error
To read the last known error message from an active external AMH automated mass
handler.
“AMHERR”
If an optional AMH automated mass handler is being used, it can generate it’s own error
message during operation. This usually occurs if the AMH is not properly setup, for
example the drive air pressure is inadequate, or it has a mechanical failure. If the AMH
fails to operate at expected., the 3rd character of the “PR” command reply is an “E”. If
this occurs, you can use the “AMHERR” command to get the specific AMH error
message, and refer to the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual for
more details. You should not routinely poll the PG with the AMHERR command, as it
may contain a previously saved error that was recoverable by the PG. Instead, use the
“PR” command to detect an AMH error first.
The AMH error message is cleared by the next successful AMH operation or by sending
the “*CLS” command. If there is no error, “OK” is returned.
“AMHERR”
Typical command:
“ERR#122” (consult AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and
Typical reply:
Maintenance Manual)
“OK”
(no AMH errors or AHM not active)
Typical reply:
AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual, “”PR”
Load or unload all the AMH’s masses (used with optional AMH automated mass
handling system).
“AMHLOAD=action”
N/A
action::
‘0’
Unloads masses
Loads all masses
The optional AMH automated mass handling system can load and unload masses on
the PG7000 piston-cylinder automatically. The masses can all be loaded onto the piston
or unloaded and held in the mass handling by a single command. Setting ‘1’ causes the
AMH to operate to load all the masses. Setting ‘0’ causes the AMH to operate to unload
all the masses. This command can only be executed when the an AMH mass set is
selected and the AMH is idle. The operation can take several seconds to complete
before the PG replies to this command. The PG uses the resulting mass load for its
current pressure target. The AMHERR command should be used to check for AMH
errors after the load
Typical command:
“AMHLOAD=1”
Typical reply:
“AMHLOAD=1”
ERR #1 Invalid or missing argument
ERR# 13 AMH is not enabled
ERR# 37 AMH load / unload operation error
ERR# 40 AMH is not idle
3.11.8, 3.11.8.3, 3.11.8.4, AMH Operation and Maintenance Manual
Read or set the discrete AMH mass load.
“AMHMS=main, binary”
“AMHMS”
main:
The number of main masses to load
bin:
The binary mass load. This is a sum of the binary masses to load:
1:
0.1 kg mass
2:
0.2 kg mass
4:
0.4 kg mass
8:
0.8 kg mass
16:
1.6 kg mass
32:
3.2 kg mass
64:
6.4 kg mass
An AMH mass set must be active and an AMH automated mass handler must already
be initialized to use this command. The PG7000 will reflect the requested mass load in
the displayed pressure measurements. The RESUME command is not required to
initiate the auto float sequence when automatic pressure generation is enabled.
Typical command:
“AMH=3,19” (3 main masses plus 1.9 kg binary mass load)
Typical reply:
“3, 19”
3.11.8.2, “MASS=”, “”MASSn”
ERR #1 Invalid mass load or AMH not active.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 142
4. REMOTE OPERATION
AROT(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
ATMHEIGHT(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
BELL(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
BELLx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
To set or read the automated motorized rotation status (optional on PG7102 and
PG7302).
“AROT=x”
“AROT”
AROT=0
x:
The status to set.
PG7000 (optional on PG7102, PG7203 and PG7302) can rotate and brake the piston
automatically when appropriate. This function can be enabled by setting the status to
‘1’. Setting the status to ‘0’ disables the auto rotate function.
Typical command:
“AROT=0”
Typical reply:
“AROT=0”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument was not a ‘0’ or a ‘1’
3.9.8, 3.9.13
To set or read the height of an external barometer relative to the reference level on the
PG7000 mounting post (ATM head).
“ATMHEIGHT=height”
“ATMHEIGHT”
“ATMHEIGHT= 0.00 cm
height:
The position of the barometer relative to the PG7000 mounting
post reference level. This value will be negative if the sensor is
below the reference level, and positive if the sensor is above
the mark.
PG7000 uses this height difference to apply a head correction to the atmospheric
measurement (ATM head). For the internal sensor, this value is -10 cm. This value can
be set from –1 000 to 1 000 cm.
Typical command:
“ATMHEIGHT=-20”
Typical reply:
“-20.00 cm”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument was <-1000 or >1000
3.9.7 PRINCIPLE, 3.11.3.3
Read or select the mass loading bell to use.
“BELL=x”
“BELL”
1
x:
The mass bell number 1, 2, or 3.
You may define up to three different loading mass bells to use with PG7000 using the
BELLx command. You can then use the “BELL=x” command to select one of the three
to use.
Typical command:
“BELL=2”
Typical reply:
“2”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
Invalid or specifies a mass bell that is not defined
3.11.1 PRINCIPLE, 3.11.1.15
Read or set a mass loading bell’s information.
“BELLx=Sn, Dens, Mass, Report#, CalDate, EditDate”
“BELLx”
N/A
x:
The mass bell number 1, 2, or 3
Sn:
The mass bell serial number (4 digits max)
Dens:
The mass bell density
Mass:
The bell mass (kg)
Cert#:
CalDate:
EditDate:
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
The Calibration report number (4 digits max)
The date that the mass set was last calibrated (YYYYMMDD)
The
date
that
the
mass
information
was
last
edited.(YYYYMMDD)
You may define up to three different mass bells to use with the PG7000 using the BELLx
command. You can then use the “BELL=x” command to select one of the three to use.
Typical command:
“BELL1”
Typical reply:
“BELL1=101,5058.0 kg/m3,0.500010 kg, 1001, 19980415,
9980415”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1..7
Invalid or specifies a mass set that is not defined
3.11.1 PRINCIPLE, 3.11.1.13
Page 143
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CALx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
COMx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
DATE(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
To set or read the calibration adder and multiplier for PG7000 Platform internal measurement
sensors.
“CALx=adder, mult”
“CALx”
CALx=0, 1
x:
“1” for the piston temperature sensor (degrees Celsius).
“2” for the ambient temperature sensor (degrees Celsius).
“3” for the ambient pressure sensor (Paa).
“4” for the vacuum sensor (Paa).
“5” for the relative humidity sensor (%RH).
adder:
The calibration adder.
mult:
The calibration multiplier.
The internal sensors can be calibrated by the user if needed. This is possible by specifying
an adder or a multiplier, or both if needed.
The ambient sensor measurement is adjusted using the user calibration adder and multiplier:
Adjusted Ambient measurement = (measurement x multiplier) + adder
This calibration information should be changed with care, as it affects the ambient value. It
does not affect the default value or a user defined value.
Typical command:
“CAL2=100.0, 1”
Typical reply:
“100.0 Paa, 1.000000”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
5.2.1
To set or retrieve the configuration of the COM ports.
“COMx=baud,parity,data,stop”
“COMx”
“COM1=2400,E,7,1”
“COM2=2400,E,7,1”
“COM3=2400,E,7,1”
x:
“1” for COM1 port
“2” for COM2 port
“3” for COM3 port
The arguments must be separated by commas.
The available parameters are listed below. Once the port is configured, the configuration is
stored in permanent memory and becomes active on power up.
When the configuration of the primary port (COM1) is changed, the returned reply is sent at the
original COM1 settings but all subsequent replies will be sent at the new configuration settings.
COM2 is used for an external barometer and/or external vacuum gage.
COM3 is used for control of an external PPC pressure controller.
Serial Parameters:
Baud rates:
150 300 600 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600
Parity:
O – Odd
E - Even
N - None
Data bits:
7 8
Stop bits:
1 2
Typical command:
“COM1=9600,E,7,1”
Typical reply:
“9600,E,7,1”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
Missing or wrong COM setting
3.11.5
To read or set the internal calendar.
“DATE=YYYYMMDD”
“DATE”
N/A
The date in the YYYYMMDD format.
YYYY:
The year from 1980 to 2079.
MM:
The month 1 to 12.
DD:
The day of the month 1 to (up to) 31 depending on the month
and year.
The internal calendar is used to date stamp changes made to the internal sensor
calibrations and the piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass loading bell files.
Typical command:
“DATE“19991231
Typical reply:
”=19991231”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
If invalid date argument
3.11.4.3
DIFLOAD
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 144
4. REMOTE OPERATION
DIFLOAD
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
DIFOFFSET (=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Executes the mass load determined by the DIFSETUP command.
“DIFLOAD”
This command must be preceded by the DIFSETUP command. The DIFSETUP
command sets up the PG7601 and determines the proper mass load for offset
determination.
The DIFLOAD command executes the mass load determined by the DIFSETUP
command and places the PG7601 into the offset determination mode. When in this
mode, use the DIFOFFSET command to query the PG for the calculated differential
offset. The DIFOFFSET command is also used to save the offset as the new differential
mode RPM offset value, and to exit the offset determination mode. The ABORT
command can also be used to exit the offset determination mode.
The reply is the same nominal mass values returned by the DIFSETUP command that is
expected to be loaded.
Typical command:
“”DIFLOAD”
Typical reply:
“9.7 kg, 28.05 g”
See the “DIFSETUP” and “DIFOFFSET” commands.
Argument is invalid.
ERR #1
Vacuum reference not supported by this PG7000.
ERR #23
The “DIFSETUP” was not used prior to this command.
ERR #35
3.9.4.1, DIFLOAD, DIFSETUP
Set or read the differential offset value.
“DIFOFFSET=offset, pressure”
“DIFOFFSET”
Offset:
0 Pa
Pressure:
101325.0 Paa
Offset:
“NEW” Saves the current calculation of RPM offset if PG7601 is
currently in the offset determination mode, else set the
differential offset value in Pa.
Pressure:
The PG7601 defined pressure when the previously determined
differential offset was saved or if Offset is “NEW”, this argument
is ignored and should not be used.
The DIFOFFSET commands have two types of operation.
If PG7601 is in the offset determination mode, the calculated offset of the external
measurement device from the PG7601 defined pressure is returned along with the
current PG7601 pressure. If the “NEW” arguments is given with this command, the
calculated offset and PG7601 pressure are saved as the new RPM offset and pressure,
and PG7601 exits the offset determination mode returning to normal operation, with
differential measurement mode enabled.
If the PG7601 is not in the offset determination mode, this command just reads back the
RPM offset and pressure as determined previously, or can be used set them to another
value.
Typical command:
“DIFOFFSET=7.1,97.100”
Typical reply:
“7.10 Pa, 97.10 000 Paa”
If PG7601 is in the offset determination mode:
Typical command:
“DIFOFFSET=NEW”
Typical reply:
“4.13 Pa, 96.14321 Paa”
See the “DIFSETUP” and “DIFLOAD” commands.
The Offset field is invalid or missing.
ERR #1
The Pressure field is invalid or missing.
ERR #2
Offset was “NEW” but the PG is not in the offset determination
ERR #35
mode.
3.9.4.1, DIFLOAD, DIFSETUP
Page 145
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIFSETUP
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
DUTHEIGHT(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
ERR
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Prepare PG7601 to determine the differential RPM mode offset.
“DIFSETUP”
The differential mode of operation requires that an RPM offset be determined. This
command sets up PG7601 to determine the RPM offset. The PG measurement mode is
changed to absolute by vacuum, the mass load resolution is set to 0.01g, and the head
correction isdisabled. You MUST have PG7601 setup to use an external pressure
measurement device (RPM) connected to COM2 to execute this command. The reply to
this command is the external device measurement; the true and the nominal mass load
needed to generate the pressure indicated by the external device. After using this
command to setup PG7601 for offset determination, you then should use the “DIFLOAD”
command to execute the mass load determined by this command.
The external device (RPM) measurement, the actual true mass value, the main mass
nominal value, and trim mass values that need to be loaded are returned by this
command. It is provided in the following comma delimited format:
bb.bbbbb Paa, aa.aaaaaa Kg, mm.m Kg, t.ttt g
bb.bbbbb Paa:
The barometer measurement.
aa.aaaaaa kg:
The actual total true mass value.
mm.m kg:
The total of the main mass's nominal values.
t.tttg:
The trim mass loaded.
Typical command:
“”DIFSETUP”
Typical reply:
“97.23238 Paa, 9.728002 kg, 9.7 ,g, 28.05 g”
See the “DIFLOAD” and “DIFOFFSET” commands
ERR #1
The barometer measurement resulted in an invalid mass load
ERR #23
Vacuum reference not supported by this PG7000
ERR #28
An external measurement device has not been SETUP
3.9.4.1, DIFLOAD, DIFOSSET(=)
To set or read the height of an external Device Under Test (DUT) relative to the
reference level on the PG7000 mounting post (DUT head).
“DUTHEIGHT=height”
“DUTHEIGHT”
“ATMHEIGHT=0.00cm”
height:
The position of the device under test relative to the PG7000
mounting post reference mark. This value will be negative if the
DUT is below the reference level, and positive if the DUT is
above the reference level.
PG7000 uses this height difference to apply a head correction to the pressure
calculation. This value can be set from –1 000 to 1 000 cm.
Typical command:
“DUTHEIGHT=20”
Typical reply:
“20.00cm”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument was <-1000 or >1000
3.9.7, 3.11.3
To read the error messages of the last command.
“ERR”
ERR#=OK
N/A
If the last response returned from PG7000 was an error (ERR#xx), then the error
message that corresponds to that error can be read. If an error is received and a valid
command is sent to PG7000 before the “ERR” command has been sent, the error
pointer is reset and an “ERR# 0 = OK” will be returned with the next “ERR” command.
The *CLS command clears any pending error messages.
See Error Message Summary List Section 4.3.3.
Typical command:
“ERR”
Typical reply:
“ERR# 0 = OK”
None
4.3.3, AMHERR
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 146
4. REMOTE OPERATION
HLDFALL
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
HLDLINEP
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Argument
Example
Error
See Also
Get the results of the last natural fall rate measurement step while executing the line
pressure sequence in high line differential mode.
“HLDFALL”
This command should only be used after the natural fall rate measurement function of
setting a line pressure has completed (see Section 4.5). The reply contains:
Reference piston average fall rate (mm/min)
Tare piston average fall rate (mm/min)
Natural fall rate difference (Ref-Tare) or “ERR”
If the reference or tare piston position was outside of ± 2.9 mm during this step, an ERR
message will be contained in the third data field of the reply.
Typical command:
“HLDFALL”
Typical reply:
“-1.1, -1.3, 0.2” (step completed without error)
ERR #40
Did not just complete crossfloat step of LineP sequence
ERR #41
Piston position exceeded ± 2.9 mm
3.9.4.2, 3.11.5, 4.5, MODE, ABORT, HLDVIEW, HLDPPOS, HLDFALL, HLDXFLT
Execute the functions needed to set a new line pressure in high line differential mode.
“HLDLINEP”
“HLDLINEP=LineP”
“HLDLINEP=NEXT”
“HLDLINEP=REPEAT”
This command controls the new line pressure set sequence. It starts the sequence,
increments through the sequence steps and completes the sequence (see Section 4.5).
Use the “ABORT” command to abort the sequence at any time.
LineP:
The new line pressure to set. This is the initial step to setting a
new line pressure for high line differential mode. PG7102 will
check the request to ensure that the mass set and piston
combination can cover the pressure requested. PG7102 will
also configure itself and the tare PG7000 to set a new line
pressure. A tare PG7000 must be connected to the reference
PG7102’s COM2 port and communications setting of the tare
PG7000’s COM1 port must match the reference PG7102’s
COM2 port. After this command is successfully executed, you
can use the “MR” command to get the mass value needed to
set the line pressure.
NEXT:
Executes the next step when setting the line pressure. Refer to
Section 4.5 for examples of the use of this argument. This
argument is only valid if a new line pressure has previously
been requested by using the “LineP” argument, but the line
pressure sequence has not been completed yet.
REPEAT:
Repeats the previous step when setting a new line pressure.
This argument is only valid at specific points in the line pressure
set sequence. Refer to Section 4.5 for examples of the use of
this argument.
Typical command:
“”HLDLINEP=2000” (Start new line pressure set sequence)
Typical reply:
“2000.00 kPa”
Typical command:
“”HLDLINEP=NEXT” (Start the next step)
Typical reply:
BUSY1” or “BUSY2” (The next step has started)
Typical command:
“”HLDLINEP=REPEAT” (Repeat the last step)
Typical reply:
“OK”
Typical command:
“”HLDLINEP”
Typical reply:
“BUSY1” (Natural fall rate function is running)
Typical reply:
“BUSY2” (Crossfloat function is running)
Typical reply:
“OK” (Function is complete)
Line pressure is invalid for active piston and mass set
ERR #1
Text argument not as expected
ERR #1
Tare PG7000 has not been detected
ERR #13
Tare PG7000 communications timeout
ERR #28
Tare PG7000 incorrect type or software version
ERR #37
Tare and reference pistons do not match
ERR #38
Tare PG7000’s reply not as expected
ERR #39
“NEXT” argument given but current step not complete or failed
ERR #40
3.9.4.2, 4.5, MODE, ABORT, MR, HLDVIEW, HLDPPOS, HLDFALL, HLDXFLT
Page 147
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HLDPPOS
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
Notes
See Also
HLDVIEW
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
See Also
HLDXFLT
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
LOCALG(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Get the piston positions of the reference and tare PG7000s in high line differential mode.
Also returns the real time or average crossfloat fall rate difference when available.
“HLDPPOS”
This command can be used while generating the line pressure or during normal high line
pressure operation. The third field (crossfloat fall rate difference) is only available during
the crossfloating step of line pressure setting. It is an average value during the
crossfloat fall rate measurement function and a real time value in all other conditions.
Typical command:
“HLDPPOS”
Typical reply:
“0.7, 0.6, 9 8”
See the “HLDLINEP” command
3.9.4.2, 3.11.5, 4.5, MODE, ABORT, HLDVIEW, HLDPPOS, HLDFALL, HLDXFLT
Get the results from the previous line pressure set in high line differential mode.
“HLDVIEW”
Returns the results of the previous line pressure set sequence (local or remote). This
data is replied in the following comma delimited format:
pppp.pp uuuu, rr.r, tt.t, RR.R, TT.T, delta
The nominal line pressure
Pppp.pp
The line pressure units
uuuu
The reference piston-cylinder temperature recorded at the time
rr.r
of crossfloat in º C
tt.t
The tare piston-cylinder temperature recorded at the time of
crossfloat º C
The reference piston natural fall rate (mm/s)
RR.R
The tare piston natural fall rate (mm/s)
TT.T
The natural fall rate difference
Delta
Typical command:
“”HLDVIEW”
Typical reply:
“2000.0 kPa, 23.4, 23.2, -0.3, -0.4, 0.21”
3.9.4.2, 3.11.5, 4.5, MODE, ABORT, HLDVIEW, HLDPPOS, HLDFALL, HLDXFLT
Get the results of the last crossfloat fall rate measurement step while executing the line
pressure sequence in high line differential mode.
“HLDXFLT”
This command should only be used after the crossfloat fall rate measurement function of
setting a line pressure has completed (see Section 4.5). The reply contains:
Final average crossfloat fall rate difference (Δmm/min) or “ERR”
Suggested trim mass (g) adjustment on the tare PG7000 or “ERR”
If the reference or tare piston position was outside of ± 2.9 mm during this step, an ERR
message is contained in both data fields.
“HLDXFLT”
Typical command:
“0.1, 0.001g” (step completed without error)
Typical reply:
Typical reply:
“ERR, ERR” (piston position exceeded ± 2.9 mm)
ERR #40
Did not just complete crossfloat step of LineP sequence
ERR #41
Piston position exceeded ± 2.9 mm
3.9.4.2, 3.11.5, 4.5, MODE, ABORT, HLDVIEW, HLDPPOS, HLDFALL, HLDXFLT
Set or read the PG7000 local gravity.
“LOCALG=x”
“LOCALG”
“LOCALG=9.80665”
X:
The current local gravity.
The local gravity is used in the mass to pressure calculation. The Setup determines if
the local gravity, the default gravity or a user defined gravity will be used for this
calculation.
Typical command:
“LOCALG=9.805”
Typical reply:
“9.80500”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
If x is <8 or >11
3.11.6, 2.4.3, 3.10
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 148
4. REMOTE OPERATION
LOCAL
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
MASS(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
MASSx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Place the device in the LOCAL mode.
“LOCAL”
N/A
N/A
In LOCAL mode all front panel operations are available.
deactivates REMOTE mode.
Typical command:
“”LOCAL”
Typical reply:
“LOCAL”
None
The LOCAL command
Read or set the current mass set.
“MASS=n”
“MASS”
N/A
N:
The mass set number 1, 2, or 3.
You may define up to three different mass sets to use with PG7000 using the MASSx
and MASSSETx commands. The MASS(=) command is then used to select the current
active mass set. A mass set must be defined before selecting it. If an AMH mass set is
specified, the AMH automated mass handler is initialized.
Typical command:
“”MASS”
Typical reply:
“MASS=1”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
n invalid or specifies a mass set that is not defined
ERR #13
AMH mass set was specified but an AMH automated mass
handler was not detected.
3.11.1.10, 3.11.1 PRINCIPLE
Read or set a mass set’s general information.
“Massx=Sn,Dens,extra1,extra2,extra3,Cert#,CalDate,EditDate, AMH”
“Massx”
N/A
x:
The mass set number 1, 2, or 3.
Sn:
The mass set serial number (4 digits max).
Dens:
The main mass density.
extra1/2/3:
These are placeholders for data fields that are obsolete and are
always ‘0’.
Cert#:
The calibration report number (4 digits max).
CalDate:
The date that the mass set was last calibrated (YYYYMMDD).
The date that the mass information was last edited
EditDate:
(YYYYMMDD).
‘0’ for a manual mass set ‘1’ for an AMH mass set.
AMH:
You may define up to three different mass sets to use with PG7000 using the MASSx
and MASSSETx command. The MASSSETx command must be used first. The MASSx
command is then used to edit the mass set general information. If the “AMH” flag is set,
the mass set defined must correspond exactly to the AMH’s mass set.
Typical command:
“MASS1”
Typical reply:
“MASS1=101,8000.0 kg/m3,0,0,0,1002,19980415,19980415, 0”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1..9
Invalid arguments
3.11.1.6, 3.11.1 PRINCIPLE, 3.6, MASSSETx
Page 149
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MASSSETx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Return
Remarks
Read and define the masses included in mass sets.
“MASSSETX”
“MASSSET=nominal,true (, AMHtype)”
“MASSSET”
N/A
x:
The mass set number 1, 2, or 3.
0
To “close” a mass set.
nominal:
The nominal mass value.
true:
The true mass value.
AMHtype:
Optional AMH mass type specifier.
‘1’ indicates that this mass is an AMH ‘main’ mass
‘0’ indicates that this mass is an AMH ‘binary’ mass
nominal mass, true mass, mass ID, AMH Type
The nominal mass value (kg)
nominal:
The true mass value (kg)
true:
The mass sequential ID (1..10)
ID:
The AMH mass type. Only valid if the mass set is defined as an
AMHtype:
AMH mass set (see the “MASSx command).
The PG7000 supports setu up of up to three mass sets. A valid mass includes a
nominal and a true mass value. The MASSSETx command accesses masses
sequentially starting from the first defined mass. As a result, it is not possible to view or
edit a specific mass in the mass set with a single command. All masses in the mass set
must be edited or viewed in order to view or modify a single mass in the mass set.
To read the mass set contents, send the “MASSSETx” command substituting 1,2 or 3 for
“x” to specify a specific mass set. This “opens” the mass set for reading and returns the
data for the first mass in the set. For a non AMH mass set, the first mass returned is
always the makeup mass. Then send the “MASSSET” command without a mass set
number repeatedly to retrieve the additional masses in the set one at a time. Masses
are returned in their mass sequence order. When the end of the mass set is reached,
“ERR #30” is returned. Always send “MASSSET0” to close a mass set that was opened
using the MASSSETx command.
Use the MASSx command to create a new mass set prior to using the MASSSETx
command to add masses to the set. To define the mass set contents, send the
“MASSSETx=nominal, true,[AMHType]” command to specify the mass set (1, 2, or 3)
and to set the nominal and true mass values for the first mass in the set. This erases
the current mass set and “opens” the mass set for writing.
Then send
“MASSSET=nominal,true,” one at a time for each mass in the mass set. The commands
must be sent in the mass loading order. With a manual mass set, the first mass in the
set is always the special case “make up” mass that is always loaded first, when the
requested mass exceeds it’s mass value. For an AMH mass set, always define the main
mass set group first. In this case the first mass sent with the MASSSETx command will
be the first main mass of the AMH mass set.
Make sure to use “1” as the third
argument for AMH mass set main masses.ie. “MASSSET1=6.2,6.2004746,1”
Example
(non AMH set)
Example (AMH
Mass Set)
The mass ID returned by the MASSSETx command is auto determined by the PG7000
based on the order of mass entry. The ID orders masses that have the same nominal
mass. If there are five (5) 10 kg masses, then they are identified as #1 through #5, and
are loaded in this order when defining a pressure.
Typical command:
“”MASSSET1”
Typical reply:
“4.50, 4.5000012, 1, 0”
Typical command:
“”MASSSET”
Typical reply:
“5.00, 5.0000008, 1, 0”
Typical command:
“”MASSSET”
Typical reply:
“5.00, 5.0000014, 2, 0”
Typical command:
“”MASSSET”
Typical reply:
“5.00, 5.0000011, 3, 0”
Typical command:
“”MASSSET”
Typical reply:
“5.00, 5.0000004, 4, 0”
Typical command:
“”MASSSET0”
Typical reply:
“MASSSET0”
Typical command:
“”MASSSET1=6.2,6.201446,1”
Typical reply:
“6.2,6.201446,1,1”
Typical command:
“”MASSSET=6.2,6.200029,1”
Typical reply:
“6.2, 6.200029,2,1”
Typical command:
”MASSSET=0.1,0.100086,0”
Typical reply:
“0.1, 0.100086,1,0”
Typical command:
”MASSSET=0.2,0.200062,0”
Typical reply:
“0.2, 0.200062,1,0”
Typical command:
“”MASSSET0”
Typical reply:
“MASSSET0”
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 150
4. REMOTE OPERATION
Error
See Also
Error
MEDIA(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
MEM
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
MMODE
Purpose
Syntax
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
x mass set # is invalid
ERR #1
The nominal mass value given is invalid
ERR #2
The true mass value not within 10% of the nominal mass
ERR #3
The mass set has not been “opened” yet
ERR #29
You are at the end of the mass set
ERR #30
3.11.1.6, 3.6, 2.3.1.3, MASS, MASSx
ERR #1 Invalid mass load or AMH not active.
Read or set the PG7000 pressurized medium type for DUT head corrections.
“MEDIA=mediaType”
“MEDIA”
“MEDIA=N2
mediaType:
“N2”, “He”, “Air”, “Oil”, “H2O” or user set density value.
You must select one of five (5) available media for use with the PG, of specified a user
defined density. This allows PG7000 to utilize the correct internal calculations for head
corrections.
Typical command:
“MEDIA=Air”
Typical reply:
“Air”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
Media type is invalid
3.9.7 PRINCIPLE, 3.11.3.1
Read the status of the internal data RAM since the last power up.
“MEM”
N/A
N/A
On power up a memory test is run to check the integrity of the internal data RAM. If the
memory has been corrupted then “FATAL MEMORY LOSS” will be displayed to alert the
user. The status memory can be read from a remote computer.
Typical causes of memory fault:
Upgrade of PG7000 software
Connection of a cable to PG7000 when PG7000 is on
Failure of internal memory
Return string:
“MEM=1”
System is OK
“MEM=0”
System memory has been corrupted and the default operating
parameters were loaded into memory
Typical command:
“”MEM”
Typical reply:
“MEM=1”
None
Get or set the PG measurement mode and reference.
“MMODE”
“MMODE=mode”
Mode:
"AATM" Absolute mode with atmospheric reference
"AVAC Absolute mode with vacuum reference
"G" Gauge mode with atmospheric reference
"D" Differential mode (PG7601) or high line differential mode
(PG7102)
This command sets both the unit mode and the measurement reference. This can also
be accomplished using the UNIT and the VAC commands. Differential mode is a
special case depending on the PG7000 model, and requires special conditions to run.
Typical command:
“MMODE”
Typical reply:
“AATM”
ERR #1
Invalid mode specified
ERR #32
Altitude or airspeed unit not allowed with atmospheric reference.
3.9.4, 3.9.3, UNIT, VAC
Page 151
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MRES(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
MROT(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
MR
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Read or set the PG7000 mass loading resolution.
“MRES=massResolution”
“MRES”
“MRES=0.01g
MassResolution:
The mass loading resolution in grams.
You must set the resolution that PG7000 uses to convert user provided pressure
requests into mass loads. PG7000 will calculate the required mass load to the precision
defined by the mass loading resolution. The maximum resolution is 0.001 gram, and the
minimum is 100 g. The mass resolution is automatically set to 100 g whenever an AMH
mass set is made active or AMH is initialized.
Typical command:
“”MRES=.01”
Typical reply:
“MRES=0.010g”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
The resolution given is greater that 100g of less than 0.001 g
3.9.10
Read or set the manual motorized piston rotation status.
“MROT=rotationStatus”
“MROT”
“MROT=0”
Rotation Status:
“ 1” Accelerates the piston rotation.
“-1” Decelerates (brakes) the piston rotation.
“ 0” Aborts current acceleration or deceleration
You may manually control the rotation of the PG7000 piston (with bell installed) instead
of using the auto rotate function (see the “AROT” command). The PG7000 will only
rotate the piston if the bell is installed and the piston position is not close or against the
top or bottom of the piston travel. You should not typically use this command when the
auto-rotate feature is enabled.
Typical command:
“MROT=1”
Typical reply:
“MROT=1”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument given is not “-1”, “0” or a “1”
3.9.13, 3.9.8, AROT
Read the current mass load variables.
“MR”
N/A
N/A
The actual true mass value, main mass nominal value, and trim mass values of the
mass currently loaded are retrieved with this command. The data is provided in the
following comma delimited format:
aa.aaaaaa kg, mm.m kg, t.ttt g
aa.aaaaaa kg:
The actual total true mass value.
mm.m kg:
The total of the main masses nominal values (mass > 0.1 kg).
t.tttg:
The trim mass loaded.
These values are the result of a user provided pressure request or mass request. Since
the actual total true mass value is a result of the true mass values, it’s resolution is not
controlled by the “MRES” command.
Typical command:
“”MR”
Typical reply:
“20.687002 kg, 20.6 Kg, 77.000 g”
None
3.6
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 152
4. REMOTE OPERATION
MS=
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
OHMS
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
To set the nominal main (mass > 0.1 kg) and trim mass to be loaded on PG7000. The
actual mass value used is determined by the true mass values of the selected mass set.
“MS=mm.m Kg, t.ttt g”
N/A
mm.m kg:
The total of the main masses nominal values to be loaded.
t.ttt g:
The trim mass to be loaded.
The user may specify a target for PG7000 in mass or pressure. When a mass target is
given, the selected mass set is used to determine the masses available for loading.
PG7000 starts at the largest value smallest numbered main mass until enough mass
has been found to satisfy the main mass request. The trim mass is then added to the
total of the required true mass values. Then a series of actions may occur:
1.
If auto rotate feature is enabled, the masses are decelerated to a stop.
2.
If the auto generation piston raise feature is enabled, the piston is be lifted.
3.
If an AMH mass handler is active, the appropriate mass is loaded.
4.
If the auto generation is enabled, the external PPC attempts to float the piston.
5.
If the automatic rotation is enabled, the masses are rotated when floating.
6.
The PG7000 achieves a Ready condition at the requested mass load.
This command replies before execution of the steps actually starts. The “PR” command
can be used to monitor the status of these events and determine when the PG7000
measurement is Ready. The “ABORT” command or changing to local front panel
operation using the [ESC] key, the LOCAL command or a GPIB go to local function
stops the operation.
Typical command:
“”MS=5, 50”
Typical reply:
“5.0 kg, 50.000 g”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
If the first argument is invalid
ERR #2
If the second argument is invalid
3.9.12, 3.6, 3.9.11, 3.9.11.1, PR , PS=, ABORT, AROT, PGEN
Read the mounting post and the ambient PRT resistances.
“OHMS”
N/A
N/A
The mounting post and ambient temperature are measured and used for internal
calculations. This command always returns the last measured value using the internal
PRTs. If the current Setup does not specify “INTERNAL” as the measurement source,
this measurement is not made, and the value returned is a measurement made when
the unit was powered up.
Typical command:
“OHMS”
Typical reply:
“109.519 ohms, 110.995 ohms”
The two measurements are comma delimited. The first field is the mounting post PRT
resistance. The second field is the ambient PRT resistance.
None
5.2.1.5
Page 153
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PCTx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
PGEN(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Set or read the source for the mounting post temperature measurement. Also optionally
sets the USER defined measurement.
“PCTx=source, meas”
“PCTx=source”
“PCTx”
20 °C if the source is DEFAULT
x:
The setup number from 1 to 21. See the SETUP command.
Setup is reserved for remote command use only.
Source:
The measurement source. This can be INTERNAL, DEFAULT,
or USER.
Meas:
The current measurement used. This can only be set if the
source argument is USER. If specified, the limit for this
argument is 0 to 40 °C
PG7000 has an internal mounting post PRT sensor whose measurements can be used
as the value of piston-cylinder temperature in calculations. You may also request that
another source be used for this measurement.
The measurement source can be the internal sensor, a user defined fixed value, or the
manufacturer’s fixed default value. The Setup number allows 19 separate configurations
for each sensor. The SETUP command selects which of the 20 to use. Setup number 1
is restricted as INTERNAL only to serve as manufacturer’s fixed Setup, and cannot be
changed.
The meas argument is used to allow the user to define a fixed value if the source is set
to USER. The reply will always include the source and the meas fields.
Typical command:
“PRT2=USER,25”
Typical reply:
“USER,25dC”
Typical command:
“PRT9=INTERNAL”
Typical reply:
“INTERNAL, 21.34 dC”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
The setup number x is invalid
ERR #1
The source argument is invalid
ERR #2
The meas argument is invalid
ERR #3
3.10, 1.2.1.2, SETUP
Set or read the piston float target for automatic piston floating (using an external
pressure generation/control component). Also can turn the automated pressure
generation function OFF and ON.
“PGEN=m.m”
“PGEN”
PGEN=0.0 (off)
N/A
An external pressure generation/control component can be used to automatically float
the PG7000 piston. This command specifies the piston position to which the automated
pressure generation function sets the piston when floating or refloating it. The auto
generation stops pressure control once the piston passes the piston float target and then
does not control again until the piston falls outside of the piston position "Ready" limits
(see PISTONRDY cmd). Setting PGEN to 0 turns OFF automated pressure generation
in the same manner as turning it OFF locally from the PG Terminal.
The pressure generation/control component should be “configured” (see pressure
generation/control component Operation and Maintenance Manual) and the “PGEN”
command should be issued whenever the Device Under Test is changed or the piston is
changed.
Typical command:
“PGEN=1.5”
Typical reply:
“PGEN=1.5mm”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument is invalid
3.9.9, PPC, READYx
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 154
4. REMOTE OPERATION
PISTONRDYx(=)
Purpose
Read or set a piston-cylinder module’s rotation rate limits.
Syntax
“PISTONRDYx=MinRPM, MaxRPM
“PISTONRDYx”
Default
N/A
Argument
MinRPM:
The minimum allowed rotation speed at which the measurement
becomes Ready [rpm]. If autorotate is enabled, this is also the
point at which the rotation system will engage. This does not
apply if the bell is not loaded.
MaxRPM:
The target maximum rotation rate when automated rotation
engages to rotate the piston. This does not apply if the bell is
not loaded.
Remarks
There are a number of conditions to allow the PG7000 measurement to become Ready.
These two piston-cylinder module dependent limits determine when the rotation rate is in
the correct limits.
Example
Typical command:
“PISTONRDY1”
Typical reply:
“10, 50”
Error
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1..2
x invalid first or second argument
See Also
3.4, 3.4.2, 3.11.1.1, READYx
PISTONVARx(=)
Purpose
Read or set a piston-cylinder module’s characteristics.
Syntax
“PISTONVARx=Sn,PCalpha,CylAlpha,DefCoef,Tension,Offset, k (P)”
“PISTONVARx”
Default
N/A
Argument
x:
The piston-cylinder number 1, 2, or 3
Sn:
The piston-cylinder serial number (4 digits max)
Pcalpha:
The piston temperature coefficient
CylAlpha:
The cylinder temperature coefficient
DefCoef:
The piston-cylinder Ae pressure coefficient
Tension:
The surface tension
Offset:
The reference level offset from the mounting post reference
mark
k(P):
The mass to fall rate coefficient for tare piston-cylinders used in
high line differential mode.
Remarks
You may define up to seventeen different piston-cylinder sets to use with PG7000 using
the PISTONx, and the PISTONVARx command is then used to edit the piston-cylinder
set physical information.
Example
Typical command:
“PISTONVAR1”
Typical reply:
225, 5.5000 10-6/dC, 4.5000 10-6/dC, 5.3800 10-6/MPa,
0.0000000N/m, 32.4600mm
Error
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1..7
x invalid first through seventh argument
See Also
3.11.1.1
PISTONx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Read or set a piston-cylinder module’s general information.
“PISTONx=Sn,Area,Mass,Density,CalCert#,CertDate; EditDate”
“PISTONx”
n/a
x:
The piston-cylinder module number 1 through 17
Sn:
The piston-cylinder module serial number
Area:
The piston-cylinder module effective area (mm2)
Mass:
The piston assembly mass (kg)
Density:
The piston assembly apparent density (kg/m3)
CalCert#:
The calibration report number (dd/mm/yy)
CertDate:
The calibration report date (dd/mm/yy)
EditDate:
The date that this data was last edited
You may define up to seventeen different piston-cylinder sets to use with the PG7000
using the PISTONx, and PISTONVARx commands. The PISTONx command is used to
edit the piston-cylinder set general information.
Typical command:
“PISTON1”
Typical reply:
“225, 196.110000 mm2, 0.200000kg, 4233.0Kg/m3, 100,
19990115, 19990120
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1..7
x invalid first through seventh argument
3.11.1, 3.11.1.1, PISTONVARX (=)
Page 155
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PISTON(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
PPC(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
See Also
PPCPR
Purpose
Syntax
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
PPOS
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Read or set the current piston-cylinder module.
“PISTON=n”
“PISTON”
N/A
n:
The piston-cylinder module number 1 through 17.
You may define up to seventeen different piston-cylinder modules to use with PG7000
using the PISTONx and PISTONVARx commands. The PISTON(=) commands are then
used to select the currently active piston-cylinder module. A piston-cylinder module
must be defined before selecting it.
Typical command:
“PISTON”
Typical reply:
“PISTON=1”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
n invalid or specifies a piston-cylinder set that is not defined
3.9.2, 3.11.1.5
Send a command to an external pressure generation/control component connected to
COM3 of the PG7000.
“PPC=xxx”
N/A
N/A
This command allows communications to an external pressure generation/control
component through COM3 of PG7000. COM3 must be previously set up to the correct
settings to match the pressure generation/control component R2323 interface. The
PG7000 auto pressure generation should be disabled before using the PPC(=)
command (see the “PGEN” command) to prevent interference with the PPC’s auto
generation functions. Any reply from the component will be returned until another
command is sent to the PG7000.
Typical command:
“PPC=PR”
Typical reply:
“R
561.0 psi a”
3.9.9, PGEN
Read the most recent pressure measurement from an external PPC pressure controller.
“PPCPR”
The PG7000’s automated pressure generation and control function does not have to be
active to use the PPCPR command. The external PPC’s COM1 port must be connected
into the PG7000’s COM3 port, and the PPC’s COM1 settings and the PG7000’s COM3
settings must match.
If the PG7000 has a previous PPC measurement that is less than 5 seconds old, it will
be replied. Otherwise, a current measurement will be obtained from the PPC for the
reply. The reply is in the active pressure unit of measure.
Typical command:
“PPCPR
Typical reply:
“10.030210”
ERR #13 PPC did not respond.
3.9.9, COM3, PPC=
Read the current piston position rate of vertical movement.
“PPOS”
N/A
N/A
The PG7000 piston position has a total travel of 9 mm. This piston position is
represented from -4.5 mm (all the way down, LSTOP) to 4.5 mm (all the way up,
HSTOP). This measurement is updated every 2 seconds, along with the piston drop
rate which is updated when the system is stable. These two fields are comma delimited.
Typical command:
“PPOS”
Typical reply:
“-3.44 mm, 0.5 mm/min”
None
3.5, 3.9.5, 3.9.5.1
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 156
4. REMOTE OPERATION
PRTPC
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
PR
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Set or read the mounting post PRT temperature sensor calibration data.
“PRTPC=Sn, slope, zero, report number, cal date”
“PRTPC”
1, 0.3896, 100.00, 1, 19880101
Sn:
The serial number from 0 to 9999
slope:
The PRT slope (Ohms/0 °C)
zero:
The PRT resistance at 0 °C
cert number:
The calibration report number
cal date
The calibration date (yyyymmdd)
The mounting post PRT data can be read or set using this command. Care must be
taken to ensure that you do not accidentally overwrite this date.
Typical command:
“PRTPC”
Typical reply:
“103, 0.3896 ohms/dC, 99.999500 ohms, 1001, 19990115
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1..5
If the arguments are missing or invalid
ERR #7
The date is invalid
5.2.1, 5.2.1.5
Read the current calculated pressure value and Ready/Not Ready status.
“PR”
N/A
N/A
The current pressure resulting from the mass loaded is calculated every 2 seconds. It is
displayed in the current pressure units. The data string also contains ready information.
The string is in the format “ssx dddddddd uuuum”.
“ss”: The first two characters indicate the ready status. This is determined by the
piston position, rotation speed, AMH automated mass handler status, and the
pressure generation status:
“R ”
for Ready,
“NR” for Not Ready.
rd
“x”:
This 3 character indicates any ongoing activity by the PG7000 to reach a
Ready condition. Any character except a “ ” (whitespace) will keep the PG
ready status Not Ready (“NR”):
“”
no activity.
“A”
the auto rotate feature is accelerating mass rotation.
“D”
the auto rotate feature is decelerating mass rotation before a mass load
occurs.
“R”
the piston is being raised by a pressure controller before a mass load
occurs.
“L”
AMH automated mass handler is busy loading the required mass load.
“W”
AMH has completed a mass load and is waiting for a “RESUME”
command to continue operations.
“E”
an AMH error has occurred. You can use the “AMHERR” command to
get further AMH error information.
“V”
the PG is in absolute by vacuum mode and waiting to reach the required
vacuum limit before continuing. Current residual pressure exceeds the
vacuum limit.
“dddddddd”: This 8 digit numeric field indicates the current calculated pressure in the
current pressure units. It has 3 leading spaces before it.
“uuuu”: This 4 character field indicates the current pressure unit.(see “UNIT” )
“m”:
This character indicates the measurement mode. (see “MMODE” ).
“PR”
Typical command:
“NR 7.003647 kPa g” (not ready)
Typical reply:
“R
7.003647 kPa g” (ready)
“NRL 7.003647 kPa g” (not ready, busy loading mass)
None
3.4, 3.9.8, 3.9.9, 3.9.11, MS=, PS=, RESUME, AMHERR
Page 157
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PS=
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
READYx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
To set a new PG7000 target pressure.
“PS=targ”
N/A
N/A
The pressure command is interpreted in the current pressure unit of measure. If a
pressure is requested that is not in the range of operation, the pressure request isl not
implemented and an error message is returned. The mass load needed to set the
pressure is calculated using the current mass loading resolution and the measured
pressure resulting from this mass is calculated.
. Then a series of actions can occur:
1.
If the auto rotate feature is enabled, the masses are decelerated to a stop.
2.
If the auto generation piston raise feature is enabled, the piston is lifted.
3.
If an AMH automated mass handler is active, the appropriate mass is loaded.
4.
If an AMH is active and the mass resolution is set to less than 100g, the
PG7000 waits for the “RESUME” command to be sent before proceeding.
This gives the host program the opportunity to instruct the operator to load
trim mass before pressure generation and piston rotation proceed.
5.
If auto generation is enabled, the external PPC attempts to float the piston.
6.
If the automatic rotation is enabled, the masses are rotated when floating.
This command replies before these actions actually start. The “PR” command can be
used to monitor the status of these events and determine when the PG7000
measurement is actually Ready. The “ABORT” command or changing to local front
panel operation using the [ESCAPE] key, the LOCAL command or a GPIB go to local
function will stop the operation.
Typical command:
“PS=100”
Typical reply:
“100.0000 kPa g”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
If target results in an invalid mass load
3.9.12, 3.9.10, 3.9.11, 3.9.3, MS=, PR, UNIT=, RESUME
Set or read the ready criteria for a specific “Setup”
“READYx=USER, RdyBand, RdyVac”
“READYx=DEFAULT” (specifies to use fixed defaults)
“READYx”
“READYx=USER, 2.5mm, 5Paa”
The setup number whose ready criteria are to be accessed
x:
(1 to 20)
RdyBand:
Piston position “ready band” (±mm)
VacLim:
The vacuum ready limit (Paa)
The PG7000 uses the piston position and the vacuum measurement (PG7601 in
absolute by vacuum mode only) to determine if the Ready/Not Ready condition. Other
factors can also keep the PG7000 measurement from being Ready (such as an active
external pressure controller, active rotation system, active AMH automated mass
handler). The piston position must be within the ready band (“RdyBand”) to allow a ready
condition. In absolute by vacuum measurement mode, the vacuum measurement must
also be below the Vacuum Limit (“VacLim”). Each “Setup” defined for the PG7000 can
have a different set of Ready/Not Ready criteria. If the “DEFAULT” conditions are
specified, then these values are fixed and cannot be changed.
The piston position ready limits define the piston position beyond which the GEN
function refloats the piston when GEN is ON.
Piston rotation rate limits are in the individual piston-cylinder file.
Typical command:
“READY2=USER, 3, 10”
Typical reply:
“USER, 3.0mm, 10Paa”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1,2,3,4
Invalid arguments
3.4, 3.11.1.1, SETUP, VACP, PISTONRDYx(=), READYCK(=)
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 158
4. REMOTE OPERATION
READYCK(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
REMOTE
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
RESET
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
RESUME
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
To set or check the ready check flag, or, used to determine if a Not Ready OT READY
condition has occurred.
“READYCK=1”
“READYCK”
READYCK=0
N/A
The internal ready check flag is cleared whenever PG7000 reaches a Not Ready (NR)
condition. The “READYCK” command will return the status of this flag. This flag can be
set only by sending the “READYCK=1” command while PG7000 is in a Ready condition.
If you send the “READYCK=1” command when PG7000 is in a Not Ready (NR)
condition, the reply will be “READYCK=0”.
If you set READYCK=1 when PG7000 achieves a Ready (R) condition, you can use
READYCK later to determine if a Not Ready (NR) condition has occurred. If NR has
occurred READYCK returns “0”. If NR has not occurred READYCK returns “1”.
“READYCK=1”
Typical command:
“READYCK=1” (If PG7000 condition is Ready)
Typical reply:
“READYCK=0” (if PG7000 condition is Not Ready)
Typical reply:
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
If n is not a 1
3.4
To place PG7000 into a remote lock-out mode.
“REMOTE”
N/A
N/A
A REMOTE command deactivates the front panel. All front panel controls will be disabled.
The REMOTE command can only be canceled by a LOCAL command or by turning off
PG7000 power then reapplying it.
Typical command:
“REMOTE”
Typical reply:
“REMOTE”
None
LOCAL
To reset all operating parameters to factory default settings.
“RESET”
N/A
N/A
The reset command can be given to return the PG7000 to a known state.
This command is the same as locally executing a “Reset Sets”.
Typical command:
“RESET”
Typical reply:
“RESET”
None
3.11.9.1
Resume the suspended process of setting a new pressure.
“RESUME”
N/A
N/A
After setting a new target pressure using the “PS=” command the process of setting the
pressure may be suspended after the PG7000 calculates the new target mass load.
This is to allow the host program to instruct the operator to load mass if necessary and
wait for confirmation from the operator that the mass loading operation is complete. The
operator can load the mass without interference from AutoRotate or AutoGen if they are
enabled. The “RESUME” command continues the pressure setting process, starting
AutoRotate and AutoGen again if they are enabled. The activity status field of the “PR”
query can be used to determine when the PG7000 has suspended operation and is
waiting for the “RESUME” command.
Typical command:
“RESUME”
Typical reply:
“RESUME”
None
3.9.11, 3.4, PS=, PR, MR, RESUME(=mode)
Page 159
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RPMx
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
To send a command through PG7000 to a remote DHI RPM connected to the PG7000
COM2 port.
“RPMx,dddd”
“RPMSx,dddd”
N/A
x:
1-99
x is the address of the RPM1. If x is omitted then the default address is 1. Address 99 is a
global address to send a command to all RPM1s that are connected to the COM2 port. You
must have an RPM connected and communicating properly for this command to work
properly.
The RPMS command is used to perform a write to the EPROM of the RPM1. This command
should be used with caution because a given RPM1 register is only guaranteed for 10 000
rewrites. See the RPM1 manual for further information on writing to the EPROM.
A “RPM,DP” command has the same syntax as sending *0100DP to the RPM from a remote computer.
A “RPM,DP=6” has the same syntax as sending *0100EW*0100DP=6 to the RPM from a
remote computer.
The commands available are given in the RPM1 or RPM1 manual depending on the model.
They allow you to change the RPM1 resolution, integration time, etc. The reply will be
whatever the RPM1 returns.
Typical command:
“RPM,DP” or “RPM1, DP”
Typical reply:
“*0001DP=6”
None
3.10, UDD=
RESUME(=mode)
Purpose
Sets the resume “mode”.
Syntax
“RESUME=mode”
Default
“RESUME=1”
Argument
Mode: ‘0’
“RESUME” command is not needed to complete a remote pressure set
operation .
‘1’
“RESUME” command is needed to complete any remote pressure set
operation
Remarks
“RESUME=1” is needed only if it is necessary for PG7000 operation to pause after a
pressure target has been given to allow the operator to load mass. This is the case
when using a manual mass set or when using AMH automated mass handling but
manually loading additional masses to load with resolution higher than the AMH mass
set resolution.
Example
Typical command:
“RESUME=1”
Typical reply:
“RESUME=1”
Error
None
See Also
3.9.11, 3.4, PS=, RESUME
RESUME
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Resume the suspended process of setting a pressure.
“RESUME”
N/A
N/A
When “RESUME=1” using RESUME(=mode), after setting a new target pressure using
the “PS=” command, the process of setting the pressure is suspended after the PG7000
calculates the new target mass load (and loads the if an AMH automatic mass handler is
active). The pause is too allow a host program to instruct the operator to load trim mass
if desired. The RESUME command ends the pause, allowing the auto-rotate and autogenerate functions to execute is enabled. The activity status field of the “PR” field can
be used to determine when the PG7000 has suspended operation and is waiting for the
“RESUME” command.
Typical command:
“RESUME”
Typical reply:
“RESUME”
None
3.9.11, 3.4, PS=, PR=, RESUME(=mode)
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 160
4. REMOTE OPERATION
SETUP(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
SN
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
SPEED
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
TIME(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
UCOEF
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
To change or read the current SETUP to be used.
“SETUP=n”
“SETUP”
“SETUP=1”
N/A
Up to 19 SETUP files can be created by the user to allow quick change from one
configuration of pressure calculation sources to another. Each configuration can specify
the source of the ambient measurements, the gravity, and the Ready/Not Ready criteria.
The “AMBHx”, “AMBPx”, “AMBTx”, “READYx”, “VACP” and “PCTX” commands
reference the SETUP command. The first setup (“SETUP=1”) is reserved for the factory
default setup, and cannot be changed. Setup #21 is reserved for remote access only.
Selecting a setup that references an external device (barometer or vacuum gauge) can
take up to 5 seconds to reply.
Typical command:
“SETUP=2”
Typical reply:
“2”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
If setup is <1 or >21
3.10, AMBHx”, “AMBPx”, “AMBTx”, “READYx”, “VACP”, “PCT
To read the PG7000 serial number.
“SN”
N/A
N/A
Each PG7000 is assigned a serial number. This command reads this number back.
Typical command:
“SN”
Typical reply:
“201”
None
To read the current piston rotation speed and rotation decay (deceleration).
“SPEED”
N/A
N/A
The current piston rotation speed and decay rate are returned separated by a comma.
The decay rate is returned as ‘0’ if there is not enough valid data to calculate the rate.
The speed will also be returned as ‘0’ if the bell is not installed.
Typical command:
“SPEED”
Typical reply:
“44.2 rpm, 2.3 rpm/min
None
3.9.5
To read or set the internal real time clock.
“TIME=HH:MMxp”
“TIME”
N/A
The time is in the HH:MMxp format.
The hour 1 to 12
HH:
The minute 00 to 59
MM:
“am” or “pm”
xp:
The internal time clock is part of the internal calendar. The seconds are always set to
“00” when setting the time.
Typical command:
“TIME=8:31PM”
Typical reply:
“8:31pm”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
If invalid time argument
3.11.4.3
To read the conversion coefficient used to convert Pascal to the current pressure unit of
measure.
“UCOEF”
N/A
N/A
Use this command to read the pressure conversion coefficient used to convert pressure
in Pascal to the displayed pressure units. Pressure in Pascal multiplied by this
coefficient yields the pressure in the PG7000 units.
Typical command:
“UCOEF” (current units are “kPa”)
Typical reply:
“1.000000e-003”
None
7.1.1, 3.9.3, UNIT
Page 161
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UDD(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
UDU(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
To set or retrieve the settings for the user defined external barometer.
“UDD=label,reqstr,skip,coef”
“UDD”
N/A
label:
A user defined barometer label to identify this setup (1 to 3
ASCII char).
Reqstr:
The text string to be sent to the external barometer every
2 seconds to query it for a pressure measurement. It must
consist of up to 20 printable ASCII characters only.
skip:
The number of leading characters to ignore from the external
barometer’s reply.
coef:
The pressure conversion coefficient that PG7000 will multiply
the external barometer reply by to result in a measurement in
Pascal.
An external barometer must be defined first by the user before being selected to be used
as source for atmospheric pressure values instead of the PG7000 internal barometer.
The external barometer must accept the carriage return/line feed terminated request
string every 2 seconds, and reply with a carriage return or carriage return/line feed
terminated reply within the 2 second cycle. The COM2 port must also be setup properly
according to the barometer’s communications settings. After setting up the COM2 port
and defining the device, you must then use the “AMBPx” and “SETUP” commands to
direct PG7000 to use the external barometer if you want this device to be used as the
source of atmospheric pressure values.
Typical command:
“UDD=DEV, PR, 4, 1000” (ext barometer is in kPa)
Typical reply:
“DEV, PR, 4, 1000.000”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
label must not exceed 3 characters
ERR #1
request string must not exceed 20 characters
ERR #2
# of char to ignore must be 1 to 80
ERR #3
user defined coefficient cannot be 0
ERR #4
3.11.5.4, 3.10, AMBPx, SETUP
To set or retrieve the USER DEFINED UNIT (use defined pressure unit of measure).
“UDU=uuuuu,cccccc”
“UDU”
UDU not defined
uuuuu=
User unit label (five characters maximum)
ccccc=
User coefficient (cannot be <=0)
The USER COEFFICIENT (UCOEF) is a value that is used to convert the current
pressure units to Pascal. You may assign up to 4 characters for the unit label. When
selecting the unit to choose using the “UNIT” command, add a trailing ‘a’ to specify an
absolute unit, else the unit will be a gauge unit.
Typical command:
“UDU=MyUn,.0015”
Typical reply:
“MyUn,.0015”
Pressure in Pa = pressure in units/UCOEF
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
uuuuu must not exceed 4 characters
ERR #2
user defined coefficient cannot be 0
3.9.3.1, 7.1.1, UNIT, UCOEF
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 162
4. REMOTE OPERATION
UDV(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
UL(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
To set or retrieve the settings for the user defined external vacuum gauge.
“UDV=label,reqstr,skip,coef”
“UDV”
N/A
label:
A user defined vacuum gauge label to identify this setup (1 to 3
ASCII char).
Reqstr:
The text string to be sent to the external vacuum gauge every
2 seconds to query it for a pressure measurement. It must
consist of up to 20 printable ASCII characters only.
skip:
The number of leading characters to ignore from the external
vacuum gauge’s reply.
coef:
The pressure conversion coefficient that PG7000 will multiply
the external vacumm sensor’s reply by to result in a
measurement in Pascal.
An external vacuum gauge must be defined first by the user before being selected to be
used as a source of vacuum pressure under the PG7601 bell jar instead of the internal
vacuum sensor. The external vacuum gauge must accept the carriage return/line feed
terminated request string every 2 seconds, and reply with a carriage return or carriage
return/line feed terminated reply within the 2 second cycle. The COM2 port must also be
setup properly according to the vacuum gauge’s communications settings. After setting
up the COM2 port and defining the device, you must then use the “VACPx” and
“SETUP” commands to if you want the PG7000 to use the the external vacuum gauge
as the source of values of vacuum in the PG7601 bell jar.
It is also possible to use both an external barometer and an external vacuum sensor
using the PG COM2 port. The barometer must be an RPM3 or RPM4 plugged into the
PG COM2 port, and selected as an active external barometer. The vacuum sensor is
then plugged into the RPM3/RPM4’s COM2 port. The RPM3/RPM4’s COM2 port must
be set to the same settings as the vacuum sensor.
Typical command:
“UDV=DEV, PR, 4, 100” (ext vacuum sensor is in mbar)
Typical reply:
“DEV, PR, 4, 100.0000”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
label must not exceed 3 characters
ERR #1
request string must not exceed 20 characters
ERR #2
# of char to ignore must be 1 to 80
ERR #3
user defined coefficient cannot be 0
ERR #4
3.11.5.5, 3.10, VACPx, SETUP, COM2
Set or read the upper limit of an external pressure generation/control component.
“UL=xxxx”
“UL”
Default N/A.
xxxx=
Controller’s upper limit in the controller’s pressure units
An external pressure controller can have an upper limit set to prevent accidential
overpressure conditions. The controller must be properly initialized prior to using this
command. The reply will be in the controller’s.format Please consult the controller’s
Operation and Maintenance Manual, UL Section, for details about it’s upper limit and
“UL” reply. Note that PCM pressure controllers are always set to the unit kPag
Typical command:
“UL=1000”
Typical reply:
“1000.00 kPa g”
See the controller’s manual for details about it’s “UL” command.
ERR #13 External controller not detected
3.9.9.3, PGEN
Page 163
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNIT(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
VACPx(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
Set or change the current pressure unit of measure and pressure measurement mode.
“UNIT=xxxxx”
“UNIT”
“UNIT=MPa g”
“UNIT=kPa g”
N/A
The units in which PG7000 interprets and executes commands can be changed. The
available units are:
psi d
psi a
psi g
psf d
psf a
psf g
bar d
bar a
bar g
mbard
mbara
mbarg
Pa d
Pa a
Pa g
kPa d
kPa a
kPa g
MPa d
MPa a
MPa g
mmHgd
mmHga
MmHgg
inHgd
inHga
InHgg
inWad
inWaa
InWag
mmWad
mmWaa
MmWag
kcm2d
kcm2a
kcm2g
Mm
(altitude available only with a vac reference)
Ft
(altitude available only with a vac reference)
Xxxxg
xxxxa
Xxxxd
The gauge/absolute/differential trailing designator ‘g’, ‘a’ or ‘d’, always appears in the 5th
character position. The gauge unit trailing designator ‘g’ does not have to be given to
specify a gauge unit.
Typical command:
“UNIT=mbar”
Typical reply:
“mbarg”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
Invalid unit specified
ERR #20
Vacuum must be enabled with absolute unit
3.9.3, 3.9.4, UDU, UCOEF, MMODE
Set or read the source for the vacuum pressure measurement. Also optionally sets the
USER defined measurement. This command is only valid for PG7601.
“VACPx=source, meas”
“VACPx=source”
“VACPx
INTERNAL
x:
The Setup number from 1 to 21. See the SETUP command.
Setup 21 is reserved for remote command use only.
source:
The measurement source. This can be INTERNAL, DEFAULT
(normal), USER, RPM or the user defined vacuum “label”
meas:
The current measurement used in Paa. This can only be set if
the source argument is USER. If specified, the limit for this
argument is 0 to 99 Paa.
PG7601 has an internal vacuum pressure gauge that can be used as the source of values of
reference vacuum under the bell jar used in pressure calculations. You may also request that
another source be used for this measurement. The range of the internal gauge is 0 to 20 Paa.
The measurement source can be the internal gauge, a user defined fixed value, the
manufacturer’s fixed default value, an external DHI RPM or a user defined external vacuum
gauge. If an external RPM or a user defined external vacuum is chosen, you must setup
the COM2 port to the proper settings. It is also advised to set this up prior to selecting the
setup to make the device active. If you specify “RPM” or the user defined barometer “label”
, then all other barometer source setups set to “RPM” or the user defined barometer will
change to this source, as it is a global selection.
The SETUP function allows 19 separate source configurations for the various SETUP
variables to be saved in 19 files. The SETUP command selects which of the files to
make active. The SETUP command selects which of the 19 to use. Setup number 1 is
restricted as INTERNAL only to serve as a manufacturer’s fixed Setup, and cannot be changed.
Typical command:
“VACP2=USER,10”
Typical reply:
USER, 10.0 Paa”
Typical command:
“VACP9=INTERNAL”
Typical reply:
“INTERNAL, 13.2 Paa”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
The setup number x is invalid
ERR #1
The source argument is invalid
ERR #2
The meas argument is invalid
ERR #3
3.10, 3.11.5.5, SETUP, COM2, UDV
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 164
4. REMOTE OPERATION
VAC(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
VENT(=)
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
VER
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
VOL
Purpose
Syntax
Default
Argument
Remarks
Example
Error
See Also
To set or read PG7000 reference mode.
This command is only valid
for PG7601.
“VAC=n”
“VAC”
VAC=0
n = 1:
PG7000 is being operated with a bell jar and vacuum
n = 0:
PG7000 is being operated at atmospheric pressure
You must let PG7000 know when you are operating under vacuum. The reported
PG7000 measured pressure will then reference the vacuum.
Typical command:
“VAC=1”
Typical reply:
“VAC=1”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
If n not set to 1 or 0
3.9.4, MODE
To vent the test pressure to atmosphere if an automated pressure generation/control
component is being used for automatic pressure generation.
“VENT=n”
VENT=0
n = 1:
Activates the vent procedure on an automated pressure
n = 0:
generation/control component
Closes exhaust valve on an automated pressure
generation/control component
When n = 1 the external automated pressure generation/control component test
pressure will quickly decrease to atmospheric.
Typical command:
“VENT=1”
Typical reply:
“VENT=1”
See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1
If n not set to 1 or 0
3.9.9, PPC, PGEN
Read the version number of the internal software.
“VER”
N/A
N/A
The software version of the EPROM can be read.
Typical command:
“VER”
Typical reply:
“DH INSTRUMENTS, INC PG7302 Ver2.00”
None
Read or set the currently active test volume for AutoGen when using a PG7302 or
PG7307 with a PPCH pressure controller
“VOL=cc”
“VOL”
“VOL=30”
cc:
The test volume in cubic centimeters (0 to 300)
This setting only affects operation of a PG7302 or PG7302 (oil operated piston gauge)
when using automated pressure control (AutoGen) with a PPCH pressure controller.
Accurately specifying the test volume improves pressure control for AutoGeneration of
initial piston float and for refloating. It is indispensable if the test volume is greater than
100 cc.
Typical command:
“VOL=50”
Typical reply:
“50”
ERR #1 Invalid argument
3.9.9, 3.9.9.6
Page 165
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4.4
STATUS SYSTEM
The status system includes the status reporting system which reports general PG7000 events. The user
can select which PG7000 events will cause a status change event. These events are then reported to
the status system (bit7 and bit3 of the status byte register), which also must be configured for the STATus
subsystem to generate the service requests described in Section 4.4.1, Status Reporting System.
There are two 16 bit event registers that make up the top layer of the status subsystem. The OPERation
status register handles conditions that are normal for PG7000. The QUEStionable status register
handles events that could cause measurements to be made under questionable conditions.
Other registers layered below these two registers provide the structure necessary to handle the two RPT
channels and to enable the events and event transitions. Bit15 of all of these registers is not used
because Bit15 represents a sign bit on some computer systems.
4.4.1
STATUS REPORTING SYSTEM
The PG7000 status reporting system is used to track and report system status and errors.
The status subsystem is layered under and reports to the status reporting system. It follows
the model of the IEEE Std 488.2 and works for the COM1 and the IEEE-488 port with
slight differences. PG7000 can be programmed to respond to various status conditions by
asserting the SRQ of the IEEE-488 interface. The COM1 port cannot be supported in this
manner, so polling must be used.
4.4.1.1
STATUS BYTE REGISTER
PG7000 contains an 8 bit status byte register that reflects the general status of PG7000.
Table 26. Status Byte Register
OPER
RQS/MSS
ESB
MAV
N/A
ERROR
N/A
RSR
(128)
(64)
(32)
(16)
(8)
(4)
(2)
(1)
This register is affected by the PG7000 reply output queue, the error queue, the
Standard Event Status register, the Ready Event Status register, and the
STATus subsystem.
(“∗STB?” or “∗SRE n”)
OPERation
OPERation summary bit
Bit7 (128)
RQS/MSS
Standard Event Status Register
Bit6 (64)
(“∗ESR?” or “∗ESE n”)
ESB
PON
URQ
CMD
EXE
DDE
QYE
RQC
OPC
Bit5 (32)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
MAV
OUTPUT
Bit4 (16)
QUEUE
N/A
Bit3 (8)
ERROR
ERROR
Bit2 (4)
QUEUE
N/A
Bit1 (2)
N/A
Bit0 (1)
Figure 12. Status Byte Register
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 166
4. REMOTE OPERATION
The status byte register can be read using the “*STB?” query, or by performing a
serial poll on the IEEE-488 bus. If you read this using a serial poll then bit 6 is
the RQS. If the “∗STB?” query is used, then bit 6 is the MSS bit. All of the other
bits are common to both types of query.
Each of these status bits can cause an SRQ to occur. The Service Request
Enable Register (“∗SRE” program message) determines which of these flags are
able to assert the SRQ line. This enabled register has a matching set of bits that
each will enable the designated bit to cause an SRQ, except for the RQS/MSS
bit(s) which cannot cause an SRQ. If you set this register to 20 ($14 hex), an
SRQ will occur if the MAV or the ERROR bit are set. The description of these
bits are given as:
•
OPER: OPERational event register summary bit (Bit 7)
This bit is not supported by PG7000.
•
RQS:
Requested Service (Bit 6)
Indicates that the SRQ line of the IEEE-488 interface has been
asserted by PG7000. This bit is cleared when a serial poll is performed
on PG7000, and is a part of the status byte register when read using
a serial poll. This bit does not apply if the COM1 port is being used.
•
MSS:
Master Summary Status (Bit 6)
Indicates that an event or events occurred that caused PG7000 to
request service from the Host, much like the RQS bit. Unlike the
RQS bit, it is READ ONLY and can be only cleared when the
event(s) that caused the service request are cleared.
•
ESB:
Event Summary Bit (Bit 5)
Indicates if an enabled bit in the Standard Event Status Register
became set. (See the section below.)
•
MAV:
Message Available Bit (Bit 4)
Indicates that at least one reply message is waiting in the PG7000
IEEE-488 output queue.
•
ERR:
Error Queue not empty (Bit 2)
Indicates that at least one command error message is waiting in the
PG7000 IEEE-488 error message queue. Use the “SYSTem:ERRor?”
query to get this message.
4.4.1.2
STANDARD EVENT REGISTER
PG7000 contains an 8 bit Standard Event Register that reflects specific PG7000
events that are not RPT dependent. Enabled events in this register will set or
clear the ESB bit of the status byte register.
Table 27. Standard Event Register
PON
URQ
CMD
EXE
DDE
QYE
RQC
OPC
(128)
(64)
(32)
(16)
(8)
(4)
(2)
(1)
Page 167
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
This register can be read using the “*ESR?” query. Each of these status bits can
set the ESB bit of the status byte register, causing a SRQ to occur IF the ESB bit
is enabled to do so. The Standard Event Status Enable Register (“∗ESE”
program message) determines which of these flags are able to assert the
ESB bit. The description of these bits are given as:
•
PON:
Power On (Bit 7)
Indicates that the PG7000 power has been cycled since the last time
this bit was read or cleared.
•
URQ:
User Request (Bit 6)
Indicates that PG7000 was set to local operation manually from the
front panel by the user (pressing the ESC key).
•
CMD:
Command Error (Bit 5)
Indicates that a remote command error has occurred. A command
error is typically a syntax error in the use of a correct program message.
•
EXE:
Execution Error (Bit 4)
Indicates if a remote program message cannot be processed due to
device related condition.
•
DDE:
Device Dependent Error (Bit 3)
Indicates that an internal error has occurred in PG7000 such as a
transducer time-out.
•
QYE:
Query Error (Bit 2)
Indicates that an error has occurred in the protocol for program
message communications. This is typically caused by a program
message being sent to PG7000 without reading a waiting reply.
•
RQC:
Request Control (Bit 1)
This bit is not supported as PG7000 cannot become the active
controller in charge.
•
OPC:
Operation Complete (Bit 0)
Indicates that PG7000 has completed all requested functions.
4.5
HIGH LINE DIFFERENTIAL MODE PROGRAMMING
EXAMPLES
High line differential measurement mode is only available with a PG7102 or PG7202 piston gauge
(see Section 3.9.4.2).
4.5.1
RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE FOR A HOST PROGRAM TO
REMOTELY SET A NEW HIGH LINE PRESSURE AND
ENABLE HIGH LINE DIFFERENTIAL MODE
Select the desired piston-cylinder and mass set in the reference and tare PG7000s.
Select the desired pressure unit of measure in which to set the line pressure. Ensure that the
reference PG7000 COM2 port and the tare PG7000 COM1 port have identical configurations
and that a valid RS232 connection is made between them. The line pressure setting process
is sequential, following the same steps as local line pressure setting (see Section 3.9.3.2).
The line setting process can be aborted at any time by sending the “ABORT” command.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 168
4. REMOTE OPERATION
Request a new line pressure in the current PG000 pressure unit of measure:
Send: “HLDLINEP=2000” (Request a line pressure of 2 000)
Reply: “2000.0” (The actual nominal line pressure that will be set)
Query for the mass load needed to set the line pressure:
Send: “MR” (Request the mass load for the line pressure)
Reply: “10.600023 Kg, 10.6 Kg, 0.000 g” (Get the mass load)
Display the mass value to load, and instruct the user to load the mass, open the bypass
valve and float the pistons. After this has occurred, the user will select to continue.
A message should then prompt the user to close the bypass valve and set the two
pistons to + 1.0 mm. Also, the piston positions of the reference and tare PG7000s
should be displayed until the user elects to continue:
Send: “HLDPPOS” (Request the reference and tare PG7000 piston positions. Repeat
until user elects to continue)
Reply: “0.4, 0.5” (Reference and tare positions)
When the user indicates ready, the 30 second (or less) natural fall rate measurement
function should be started.
Send: “HLDLINEP=NEXT” (Request the fall rate function to start)
Reply: “BUSY1” (Indicates that the fall rate function is running)
The status of the fall rate step can be monitored by sending the HLDLINEP command
until the reply is no longer “BUSY1”. During this time, the reference and tare piston
positions should also be monitored. So, while using HDLPPOS to monitor piston,
occasionally send HLDLINEP looking for the response OK.
Send: “HLDPPOS” (Request the reference and tare PG piston positions)
Reply: “0.4, 0.5, 0.1” (Reference and tare piston positions)
Send: “HLDLINEP” (Check if the step is completed)
Reply: “BUSY1” (Step is still busy, continue in this loop)
Reply: “OK” (Step is complete; go to next step)
The results of the natural fall rate measurement can now be obtained:
Send: “HLDFALL” (Request the natural fall rate results)
Reply: “-0.1, -0.2“ (Average reference and tare natural fall rates in mm/min)
Reply: “ERR #41” (One of the piston positions had exceeded ± 2.9 mm)
The natural fall rate measurement function can be repeated if the user is not satisfied with
the step, or if one of the piston positions has exceeded ± 2.9 mm, returning to Step (3):
Send: “HLDLINEP=REPEAT” (Request the natural fall rate function to start again)
Reply: “OK”
And then:
Send: “HLDLINEP=NEXT” (Request the natural fall rate function to start again)
Reply: “BUSY1”
To keep the resulting natural fall rate:
Send: “HLDLINEP=NEXT” (Request to save the natural fall rate)
Reply: “OK” (This step just saves the fall rate, so a busy reply is not used)
Reply: “ERR #35” (Current step not complete or failed)
Page 169
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The program should then instruct the user to open the bypass valve, crossfloat the
pistons to within about 150 mg, close the bypass valve, set both pistons to about
+1.0 mm, open the bypass and press ENTER. The piston positions along with the real
time crossfloat fall rate difference (the difference between the current fall rate difference
and the natural fall rate difference) should be displayed and updated until the user elects
to start the crossfloat by pressing ENTER:
Send: “HLDPPOS” (Request the reference and tare PG piston positions)
Reply: “-0.4, -0.5, 10.2” (Reference and tare piston positions, real time crossfloat fall
rate difference)
When ENTER is pressed, start the crossfloat measurement function. Send:
Send: “HLDLINEP=NEXT” (Request the crossfloat function to start)
Reply: “BUSY2” (Indicates that the crossfloat function is running)
The status of the crossfloat step can be monitored by sending the HLDLINEP command
until the reply is no longer “BUSY2”. The reference, tare piston positions and the
crossfloat fall rate should also be monitored:
Send: “HLDPPOS” (Request the reference and tare piston positions)
Reply: “0.4, 0.5, 6.9” (Reference and tare positions, average crossfloat fall rate
difference since the start of this function)
Send: “HLDLINEP” (Check if the step is completed)
Reply: “BUSY2” (Step is still busy, continue in this loop)
Reply: “OK” (Step is still complete; go to next step)
The results of the crossfloat fall rate measurement step can now be obtained:
Send: “HLDXFLT” (Request the crossfloat results)
Reply: “6.9.1, 0.046 g” (Crossfloat fall rate difference and recommended trim mass
adjustment)
Reply: “ERR #41” (One of the piston positions has exceeded ± 2.9 mm)
The crossfloat fall rate measurement function can be repeated if the user is not satisfied
with the step, or if one of the piston positions has exceeded ± 2.9 mm, by returning to
Step (9).
Send: “HLDLINEP=REPEAT” (Request the crossfloat function to start again)
Reply: “OK”
And then:
Send: “HLDLINEP=NEXT” (Request the crossfloat function to start again)
Reply: “BUSY2”
The crossfloat fall rate measurement results can be saved:
Send: “HLDLINEP=NEXT” (Request to save the crossfloat data)
Reply: “OK”
Reply: “ERR #40” (Current step not complete or failed)
You are now in high line differential mode. High line differential target pressures can be
accomplished using the normal PG7000 remote commands “PS” and “MS”, or locally.
The natural fall rate difference and crossfloat piston-cylinder temperatures for the last line
pressure setting sequence (same is the <2view> screens of HL dif mode) can be
reviewed anytime using the “HLDVIEW” command.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 170
4. REMOTE OPERATION
4.5.2
RECOMMENDED SEQUENCE FOR A HOST PROGRAM TO
REMOTELY ENABLE HIGH LINE DIFFERENTIAL MODE
USING THE LAST LINE PRESSURE SETTING
The line pressure must already be established using the steps in the previous example
(recommended sequence for a host program to remotely set a new line pressure and
enable high line differential mode). Use the “HLDVIEW” command to verify whether the
current line pressure is as expected. Ensure that the reference PG7000 COM2 port is
configured identically to the tare PG7000 COM1 port and that the two COM ports are
connected properly.
Change the measured mode to high line differential:
Send: “UNIT=UUUUD” (Request for unit UUUU and high line differential mode)
Reply: “UUUUD” (Unit and measurement mode set complete)
Or
Send: “MMODE=D” (Request for high line differential mode)
Reply: “D” (Measurement mode set complete)
High line differential target pressures can now be accomplished using the normal
PG remote commands “PS” and “MS”, or using local operation. The current line
pressure results can be reviewed using the “HLDVIEW” command.
Page 171
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NO T E S
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 172
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
5.
MAINTENANCE,
ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
5.1
INTRODUCTION
PG7000 was designed for very low maintenance operation. No maintenance is required other than:
•
Adjustment of piston position measurement system (see Section 5.2.2)
•
Cleaning piston-cylinders (see Section 5.3.4)
•
Lubricating piston-cylinder modules (see Section 5.3.5)
•
Emptying oil run off tray (PG7302, PG7202 only) (see Section 5.2.3)
•
Cleaning masses (see Section 5.4.1)
•
Filling piston-cylinder module lubricating liquid reservoir (PG7202 only) (see 5.3.3).
•
Purging mounting post drain (PG7202 only) (see Section 5.2.4)
•
Adjustment/calibration of on-board ambient conditions sensors (see Section 5.2.1)
•
Calibration of piston-cylinder temperature platinum resistance thermometer (PRT) (see Section 5.2.1.5)
•
Calibration of reference vacuum sensor (PG7601 only) (see Section 5.2.1.6)
•
Calibration of piston-cylinder modules and mass set (see Sections 5.3.2, 5.4.2)
•
Drive belt replacement (see Section 5.2.54)
This section provides information on maintenance, adjustment and calibration procedures and certain
repair procedures.
Calibration, maintenance and repair services for PG7000 are offered by authorized DHI Authorized
Service Providers (see Table 32).
PG7000 is a sophisticated measuring instrument with advanced on-board features and functions.
Before assuming that unexpected behavior is caused by a system defect or breakdown, use this manual and
other training facilities to become thoroughly familiar with PG7000 operation. For rapid assistance in specific
situations, see Section 6, Troubleshooting.
PG7000 is covered by a limited 1 year warranty (see Section 7.4). Unauthorized service or repair during
the warranty period is undertaken at the owner's risk and may cause damage that is NOT covered under
product warranty and/or may void the product warranty.
Page 173
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5.2
PLATFORM
5.2.1
CALIBRATION/ADJUSTMENT OF ON-BOARD
MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS
5.2.1.1
PRINCIPLES
The PG7000 Platform includes sensors and systems to measure ambient and
instrument conditions. These sensors and systems may need calibration or
adjustment. The calibration and/or adjustments are performed using functions
accessed by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting <7cal>.
The on-board measurement functions that can be adjusted or calibrated include:
•
Barometric pressure sensor
•
Relative humidity sensor
•
Ambient temperature sensor
•
Piston-cylinder module temperature sensor
•
Piston position measurement system
•
Reference vacuum gauge (PG7601 only)
The ambient conditions sensors and the vacuum gauge are generally verified
and adjusted relative to a reference without being removed from the platform.
The measurement uncertainty specification of the on-board sensor should be
taken into consideration when selecting a reference relative to which to adjust
them (see Section 1.2.1.2). The ambient pressure, temperature and relative
humidity sensors, in particular, do not require a high level reference.
The PG7000 CAL function supports a user defined adder and multiplier that are
used to offset and, if necessary, adjust the slope of the sensors output. The adder
and multiplier adjust the sensor output as follows:
Corrected Output = (Measured Output X Multiplier) + Adder
Where:
•
Corrected output, measured output and adder are in the current unit of
measure of the sensor
•
Multiplier is dimensionless
[SPECIAL], <7cal> provides capabilities to view internal sensor outputs and edit
their Adders and Multipliers. The CAL view function provides an additional digit
of resolution relative to other displays of internal sensor outputs. To calibrate
or adjust the on-board sensors, compare their outputs to a reference and
adjust the corresponding Adder and/or Multiplier as needed to arrive at
acceptable agreement.
5.2.1.2
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR
PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the on-board barometric sensor.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 174
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION

OPERATION
To view the output of the barometric pressure sensor, press [SPECIAL] and
select <1atmp>, <1view>. The display is:
1.
Current reading of the barometric sensor in
current pressure unit of measure.
2.
Indication that this is a barometric pressure
sensor display.
3.
Current value of the Pressure Multiplier
applied to the barometric pressure sensor
reading.
4.
100.0031 kPa
PA 101 Pa
atmP
PM0.99999
Current value of the Pressure Adder (always
in Pascal [Pa]) applied to the barometric
pressure sensor reading.
To adjust the values of PA and/or PM press [SPECIAL] and select <1atmP>,
<2cal> to access a screen in which the values of PA and PM can be edited.
From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <1atmP>, <1view> to view the
barometric sensor reading with the edited calibration coefficients applied.
See Section 5.2.1.1 for an explanation of Adders and Multipliers and their use
in adjusting internal sensors.
5.2.1.3

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the on-board ambient temperature sensor.
The ambient temperature sensor and piston-cylinder module temperature
sensor are of the same technology and read in the same manner. However, their
recommended calibration procedures differ reflecting the different measurement
uncertainty specifications of the two measurements. See Section 5.2.1.5 for
recommended calibration procedure on the piston-cylinder module temperature
sensor, which is used to measure temperature with much lower uncertainty.
The ambient temperature sensor is housed in the temperature - humidity (TH)
Probe along with the humidity sensor. Each sensor maintains it’s own calibration.
See Section 5.2.1.4.

OPERATION
To view the output of the ambient temperature sensor, press [SPECIAL] and
select <2ambT>, <1view>. The display is:
1.
Current reading of the ambient temperature sensor.
2.
Indication that this is an ambient temperature
display.
3.
Current value of the Temperature Multiplier applied
to the ambient temperature sensor reading.
4.
Current value of the Temperature Adder (always in
°C) applied to the ambient temperature sensor
reading.
20.51 °C
ambT
TA 0.1 °C PM 0.99997
To adjust the values of TA and/or TM press [SPECIAL] and select <2ambT>,
<2cal> to access a screen in which the values of TA and TM can be edited.
Page 175
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <2ambT>, <1view> to view the ambient
temperature sensor reading with the edited calibration coefficients applied.
See Section 5.2.1.1 for an explanation of Adders and Multipliers and their use
in adjusting internal sensors.
5.2.1.4
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR
PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the on-board relative humidity sensor.
The relative humidity sensor is housed in the temperature - humidity (TH)
Probe along with the ambient temperature sensor. Each sensor maintains it’s own
calibration. See Section 5.2.1.3.
OPERATION
To view the output of the relative humidity sensor, press [SPECIAL] and select
<3%RH>, <1view>. The display is:
1.
Current reading of the relative humidity
sensor.
2.
Indication that this is a relative humidity
display.
3.
Current value of the Humidity Multiplier applied
to the relative humidity sensor reading.
4.
Current value of the Humidity Adder (always in %RH) applied to the relative humidity sensor
reading.
43.2 %RH
HA 5 %RH HM
amb%RH
0.99984
To adjust the values of HA and/or HM press [SPECIAL] and select <3%RH>,
<2cal> to access a screen in which the values of HA and HM can be edited.
From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <3%RH>, <1view> to view the relative
humidity sensor reading with the edited calibration coefficients applied.
See Section 5.2.1.1 for an explanation of Adders and Multipliers and their use
in adjusting internal sensors.
5.2.1.5
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the on-board piston-cylinder module
temperature sensor.
PRINCIPLE
Piston-cylinder module temperature is measured by a platinum resistance
thermometer (PRT) built into the PG7000 mounting post. The resistance of the
PRT is read by PG7000's internal ohmic measurement system and temperature
is calculated as follows:
Temperature = (Measured resistance - resistance at 0 °C)/slope
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 176
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
The PRT is a 10052 4-pole type following DIN Norm 43760. The current
supplied to the PRT is 1 mA and the slope of resistance relative to temperature
over the valid temperature range of 0 to 40 °C is 0.3896 Ω/°C. The uncertainty
specification is ± 0.1 °C (± 0.02 Ω) with a resolution of 0.01 °C.
The ohmic measurement system in PG7000 is self-calibrated using on-board
100 and 110 Ω reference resistors.
The normal calibration procedure of the PRT is to remove it from the PG7000
mounting post and determine its offset (actual resistance at 0 °C) by calibration.
To remove the PRT from the PG7000 mounting post, follow the instructions
provided in Section 5.2.1.5, Mounting Post PRT Removal.
The value of resistance at 0 °C and the slope, if desired, can be edited to reflect
the new calibration by pressing [SPECIAL] and select <4PCT>.
Though the ambient temperature sensor and piston-cylinder module
temperature sensor are of the same technology and read in the same manner, the
recommended calibration procedures differ reflecting the difference in measurement
uncertainty needed.
The ambient temperature sensor (whose measurement
uncertainty is ± 1 °C) is calibrated by simple offset relative to an external reference
measurement (see Section 5.2.1.3).
OPERATION
To view the output of the piston-cylinder module temperature sensor, press
[SPECIAL] and select <4PCT>, <1view>. The display is:
1.
Current reading of the piston-cylinder module
temperature sensor converted to degrees
Centigrade.
2.
Indication that this is a piston-cylinder
module temperature display.
3.
Current value of the resistance slope relative
to temperature.
4.
Current value of the offset at 0 °C in ohm.
19.951 °C
RZ100.003 Ω
PCT
S0.3896
To adjust the values of RZ and/or S, press [SPECIAL] and select <4PCT>, <2cal>
to access a screen in which the values of RZ and S can be edited.
From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <4PCT>, <1view> to view the pistoncylinder module temperature reading with the edited calibration coefficients applied.
Mounting Post PRT Removal
To remove the mounting post PRT:
Remove the piston-cylinder module from the mounting post and replace with
the ORANGE storage plug.
Disconnect the PG7000 Platform from the PG7000 Terminal.
Invert the PG7000 Platform so that the bottom of the platform is up.
Support the platform so that it does not tip over. A simple solution is to place
the platform upside down on a sturdy box which is smaller than the outside
platform dimensions and is also tall enough to allow the mounting post to
be suspended.
Remove the six socket head screws (3 mm) around the perimeter of the
platform.
Lift the platform up and carefully disconnect the sensor leads at their board
connections, noting their locations.
Page 177
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
For PG7607 and PG7601, loosen - but do not remove - the four socket head
screws (3 mm) located on the PRT/cable pass through plate. The plate is
located on the inside of the base.
For all other PG7000 models, loosen knurled nut securing PRT by hand. It is
not necessary to remove the knurled nut.
The PRT is able to be removed by gently grasping the shaft (not the wires)
and sliding out in a straight motion.
Slide the PRT out of the mounting post.
After reinstalling the PRT and tightening the four socket head screws,
reassemble in the reverse order. Thermal grease may be applied lightly to
the PRT, if available. If the sensor lead locations were not noted correctly,
follow Table 28.
Reconnect the PG7000 terminal to the PG7000 Platform using the
cable supplied.
Power up PG7000 and verify proper operation of all on-board sensors.
Table 28. Mounting Post Wire Colors, Description and Location
WIRE COLORS
Black/Yellow/White
DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION
RPM (P4)
Black/Black/Black/Black
Vacuum Sensor (center raised micro board)
White/White/Yellow/Yellow
Mounting Post PRT (P2)
Purple/Blue/Red
Motor Solenoid (J2)
Gray/Orange/Green/Brown
LVDT (P1)
5.2.1.6
REFERENCE VACUUM GAUGE (PG7601 ONLY)
PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the on-board reference vacuum gauge
(PG7601 only).
OPERATION
To view the output of the reference vacuum gauge, press [SPECIAL] and select
<6vac>, <1view>. The display is:
1.
Current reading of the vacuum gauge in
Pascal. Reads < > 20 > whenever the
current reading is greater than 20 Pa.
2.
Indication that this is a vacuum display.
6.52 Pa
3.
Current value of the Vacuum Multiplier
applied to the vacuum gauge reading.
VA 0.5
4.
Current value of the Vacuum Adder (always
in Pa) applied to the vacuum gauge reading.
vac
VM 0.99984
To adjust the values of VA and/or VM press [SPECIAL] and select <6vac>,
<2cal> to access a screen in which the values of VA and VM can be edited.
From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <6vac>, <1view> to view the vacuum
gauge reading with the edited calibration coefficients applied.
See Section 5.2.1.1 for an explanation of Adders and Multipliers and their use
in adjusting internal sensors.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 178
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
5.2.2
PISTON POSITION DETECTION ADJUSTMENT
PURPOSE
To adjust the piston position measurement system.
PRINCIPLE
The PG7000 piston position measurement operates on the LVDT principle. There are coils
mounted on either side of the piston-cylinder module mounting post and a ring on the inside
of the mass loading bell acts as the sensor element. As the bell moves, the LVDT signal
changes proportionally to bell position, and therefore piston position. The signal is translated
into relative position in the ± 4.5 mm stroke of the piston (see Section 3.5). The piston
position and fall rate can be viewed in the [SYSTEM] run screen (see Section 3.9.5).
The piston position indication system can be realigned by an automated on-board routine.
This routine sets and records the LVDT output at the piston hi and lo stop positions.
When an AMH mass set is used, it is important to follow a specific procedure to adjust the
piston position detection system. See Special Considerations When Using an AMH Mass Set in
the
OPERATION Section below.
OPERATION
Refer to piston stroke schematic Figure 8.
If the PG7000 Platform is equipped with an AMH mass set, be sure to see Special
Considerations When Using an AMH Mass Set.
To automatically adjust the PG7000 piston position indication system, load the mass bell only
on the piston. Then press [SPECIAL], <7cal>, <5Pposition>, <2cal>.
The prompt <Hold piston at max down stop> appears. Place the piston in the fully down
position (be sure to compress the springs so that the piston is truly at the low stop position by
pressing down firmly on the piston or loading at least 5 more kg of mass). Press [ENTER].
The prompt <Hold piston at max up stop> appears. Place the piston in the fully up position
(be sure to compress the springs so that the piston is truly at the high stop position by
applying pressure underneath the piston that is the equivalent to at least 5 kg greater than
the pressure required to float the piston with the current load). Press [ENTER].
Pressing [SPECIAL] and select <7cal>, <5Pposition>, <1view> allows current piston
position and fall rate (see Section 3.9.5.1) to be viewed on the bottom line of the display.
Position is on the left and fall rate is on the right.
Special Considerations When Using an AMH Mass Set
The tubular binary masses of an AMH mass set have some influence on the piston position
detection system so it is important to adjust the piston position detection system with all the
binary masses loaded.
Page 179
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
To adjust the PG7000 piston position system when an AMH mass set is being used, proceed
as follows:
Vent pressure.
Select [SPECIAL], <8AMH>, .<2control>, <2discreet> and load all of the binary
masses and none of the main masses (see Section 3.11.8.2).
Press [SPECIAL], <7cal>, <5Pposition>, <2cal>.
The prompt <Hold piston at max down stop> appears. Check that the pressure under
the piston is really vented and press [ENTER].
The prompt <Hold piston at max up stop> appears. Without changing the mass load,
generate a pressure under the piston great enough to insure that the piston will go
completely to the top stop. This requires a pressure equivalent to a mass load of 18 kg
with an AMH-100 or 12 kg with an AMH-38. For example, if the mass handler is an
AMH-100 and the piston is a 2 MPa/kg, generate 36 MPa or if the mass handler is an
AMH-38 and the piston is a 10 kPa/kg, generate 120 kPa. Press [ENTER].
Process is complete. Use [SPECIAL], select <7cal>, <5Pposition>, <1view> to verify
that piston position is <+4.5 mm> when fully up and <-4.5 mm> when fully down.
5.2.3
EMPTYING OIL RUN-OFF TRAY (PG7202 AND PG7302 ONLY)
In PG7302, small quantities of oil escape from beneath the piston-cylinder during the air
purge process when installing a piston-cylinder module (see Section 2.3.2). In both PG7202
and PG7302, very small quantities of oil leak out of the top of the gap between the piston and
cylinder when pressure is applied.
Excess oil is collected and runs down the mounting post, and out through a transparent tube
on the right side of the PG7202/PG7302 Platform to an oil run-off tray under the platform.
To empty the oil run-off tray, proceed as follows:
Using a paper towel or cloth to catch oil drops, gently pull the transparent tube out of the
oil run-off tray.
Grasp the run-off tray by its protruding handle and slide it completely out and away from
the PG7202/PG7302 Platform.
Empty the oil run-off tray by shaking it out or removing the screws on the top plate.
Clean the oil run-off tray. Discard any accumulated oil.
Slide the oil run-off tray back into the PG7202/PG7302 Platform. Push it in beyond the
holding stops until it seats firmly.
Reinsert the transparent oil run-off tube into the hole in the run-off tray handle.
5.2.4
PURGE MOUNTING POST LIQUID RUN OFF (PG7202 ONLY)
In PG7202, minute quantities of the liquid that lubricates the gap between the piston and the
cylinder flow out of the bottom of the gap. A passage in the mounting post (see Figure 13),
channels this liquid directly to a low point drain. A DRAIN port on the rear of the PG7202
Platform (see Figure 3) allows the drain to be purged. The drain should be purged
approximately once a day when PG7202 is being used extensively or before using PG7202
any time it has been idle with a piston-cylinder module installed for an extended period.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 180
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
To purge the mounting post liquid drain, proceed as follows:
Apply approximately 700 kPa (100 psi) to the
mounting post using the normal gas pressure
generation/control component.
Cover the weep hole on the top of the DRAIN
port fitting with a paper towel. Then loosen the
DRAIN port DH500 gland slowly. A wrench for
the DRAIN port gland is supplied in the PG7202
accessories.
Wait for all of the pressure to escape.
Repeat
through
paper towel.
until no oil is visible on the
Retighten the DH500 gland (torque to 15 Nm
(12 ft.lb).
Figure 13. PG7202 Mounting Post Drain
5.2.5
DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT
Periodic replacement of the drive system belts may be necessary to retain maximum
performance of the rotational engagement system. Due to specific material properties of the
drive belts, it is important that only genuine DHI replacement parts be used.
A set of spare drive belts is included in the accessories delivered with the PG7000
Platform.
To remove the drive belts:
Using a 2.5 mm Allen tool, remove the three screws on the outer diameter of the
pulley plate. Do not remove the screws on the inner diameter. The pulley plate is
located directly around the mounting post.
Remove the two drive belts and replace them with the new ones.
Realign the notched pulley with the pins on the drive motor.
Replace the pulley plate and three screws.
Engage the drive system to ensure proper operation.
Page 181
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5.3
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES
5.3.1
DISASSEMBLY, CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE
PURPOSE
To disassemble and reassemble piston-cylinder modules and clean the piston-cylinder
elements when necessary.
PRINCIPLE
PG7000 piston-cylinders are high precision metrological assemblies. The annular gap
between the piston and the cylinder is adjusted to be less than 1 micron, and in some cases,
less than 0.5 micron. In normal operation, this space is lubricated by the pressurized medium
(except PC-7200 in which the piston-cylinder modules are gas operated but the space is
lubricated with a liquid). If the space becomes contaminated, usually due to foreign matter
carried by the pressurized medium, PG7000 performance can be affected. Symptoms of
contamination of the space (a dirty piston-cylinder) include:
•
Difficulty rotating piston:
piston rotation.
•
Decay in rotation rate is more rapid than normal: Piston rotation slows down too
quickly, especially at low mass loads.
•
Poor sensitivity: Very small mass changes do not have usual effect.
•
Noisy pressure: The pressure defined when the piston is floating is not a stable as it
usually is.
The motorized rotation system is unable to start
If any of these symptoms are present, they may be caused by a dirty piston-cylinder.
The piston-cylinder module should be disassembled and the piston-cylinder cleaned. See
Section 5.3.2.1 for instructions and disassembly and cleaning of gas operated, gas lubricated
piston-cylinders (PC-7100 and PC-7600), Section 5.3.2.2 for gas operated, liquid lubricated
piston-cylinders (PC-7200) and Section 5.3.2.3 for oil operated piston-cylinders (PC-7300).
Gas lubricated piston-cylinders (PC-7100 and PC-7600) are highly sensitive to
contamination, much more so than liquid lubricated piston-cylinders (PC-7200 and PC-7300). When
using gas lubricated piston-cylinders, if symptoms of contamination develop rapidly with
operation after cleaning, there is almost certainly a source of contamination within the PG7000
system. This source must be identified and eliminated to reduce piston-cylinder cleaning
frequency. Very often, the source of contamination is the test gas supply itself (which contains
humidity or lubricating oil) or it is the return from unclean gas operated DUTs that are connected
to the PG7000 system.
Gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinders (PC-7200) can exhibit behavior similar to
that of a dirty piston-cylinder when they are operated without lubricating liquid in the pistoncylinder module reservoir. Before disassembling a PC-7200 piston-cylinder module for cleaning
due to poor performance, try filling the lubricating liquid reservoir (see Section 5.3.3).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 182
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
The PG7000 piston-cylinder module design affords maximum protection to the pistoncylinder element assuring that it is protected during routine piston-cylinder handling. Cleaning
the piston-cylinder requires disassembly of the module and exposure of the piston-cylinder to
possible damage. These risks include damage to the critical working surfaces for all pistoncylinder sizes and chipping or breaking, especially for small diameter piston-cylinders. Only
qualified personnel should undertake piston-cylinder disassembly and reassembly and the
instructions and recommendations contained in this manual should be followed carefully
throughout the operation.
5.3.2
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
5.3.2.1
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY OF GAS
OPERATED, GAS LUBRICATED
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES (PC-7100/7600)
The PG7000 piston-cylinder module design affords maximum protection to
the piston-cylinder element assuring that it is protected during routine pistoncylinder handling. Cleaning the piston-cylinder requires disassembly of the module
and exposure of the piston-cylinder to possible damage. These risks include damage
to the critical working surfaces for all piston-cylinder sizes and chipping or breaking,
especially for small diameter piston-cylinders. Only qualified personnel should
undertake piston-cylinder disassembly and reassembly and the instructions and
recommendations contained in this manual should be followed carefully throughout
the operation.
NEVER touch the lapped surfaces (polished appearance) of the piston or
cylinder with your bare hands. Body oils and acids can permanently etch the surfaces.
The piston assembly (piston + piston head + adjusting mass + piston cap +
piston cap retaining screw) is part of the PG7000 mass load. Its mass has been
measured and is reported in the calibration report. Use caution when handling these
parts, to avoid changing their mass by swapping parts, contaminating them or
leaving parts out in reassembly. Out of tolerance pressure definitions could result.
Page 183
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10 and 20 kPa/kg Gas Piston-Cylinder Module
When installing the piston cap during
reassembly, remember to reinstall the adjustment
mass (3).
Remove the main module housing (4) by
sliding it upward leaving the piston-cylinder
assembly behind.
Step 6 applies only to 20 kPa/kg:
Reinstall the piston cap (2) directly onto the
piston head (6). Using the cap as a handle,
slide the piston out of the cylinder. Take care
not to cock the piston in the cylinder at the
point at which it leaves the cylinder.
Steps 7, 8, and 9 apply only to 10 kPa/kg:
Reinstall the piston cap (2) directly onto the
piston head (5).
Place the 10 kPa/kg piston insertion tool (see
Figure 15) on the work surface with the large
diameter down. DO NOT TOUCH the white
plastic centering ring of the insertion tool.
Figure 14. 10 and 20 kPa/kg Gas
Piston-Cylinder Module (Expanded View)
Place the piston-cylinder module upside down
on a clean stable surface (piston cap (2) down).
Using the sleeve nut tool (see Figure 16), remove
the sleeve nut (9). The sleeve nut tool is a
spanner that fits into the two holes on the
sleeve nut.
The sleeve nut for 10 and 20 kPa/kg modules has
a left hand thread so it is loosened by turning clockwise.
Remove the O-ring assembly (8). Then, being
sure to support the cylinder (7) so it doesn’t fall
out, turn over the remaining assembly so that
the piston cap (2) is up.
While firmly holding down the cap (2), use a 5 mm
Allen tool, to loosen the socket head cap
retaining screw (1). The cap retaining screw
will not fully disengage from the piston cap due
to the adjustment mass (3). Gently remove the
cap and screw from the assembly.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 184
Holding the cylinder (7) to prevent it from falling
out, place the piston-cylinder assembly onto the
tool sliding the hollowed end of the piston (6)
onto the tool shaft. Carefully allow the cylinder
to drop down over the white plastic centering
ring. Holding the cylinder, gently remove the
piston (6) from the tool. Finally, remove the tool
from the cylinder.
In reassembly, the end of the cylinder marked
with the serial number must enter the main module
housing first.
The orientation of the piston on the cylinder is
important. The end of the cylinder that is marked with
the serial number should go into the sleeve and/or main
module housing first. The piston enters the end of the
cylinder that is marked with the serial number.
Installing the cylinder with the wrong orientation may
lead to out of tolerance measurements.
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
Figure 15. 10 kPa/kg
Piston Insertion Tool
Figure 16. Gas Piston-Cylinder Module
Sleeve Nut Tool
Page 185
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
50, 100 and 200 kPa/kg
Piston-Cylinder Modules
Reinstall the piston cap (2) directly onto the
piston head (6). Using the cap as a handle,
slide the piston out of the cylinder. Take care
not to cock the piston in the cylinder at the
point at which it leaves the cylinder.
Turn over the cylinder sleeve (7) so that the
sleeve nut (10) is facing up.
‘
Using the sleeve nut tool (see Figure 16),
remove the sleeve nut (5). The sleeve nut tool
is a spanner that fits into the two holes on the
sleeve nut.
The 50, 100 and 200 kPa/kg sleeve nuts have a
right hand thread so they are loosened by turning
counter-clockwise.
Holding the cylinder (9) in the open end of the
cylinder sleeve (7), turn the cylinder sleeve
over and then allow the cylinder to gently
slide out.
In reassembly, verify that the cylinder
O-ring (8) is still located in the top of the cylinder
sleeve (7). It is recommended that a thin film of vacuum
grease (Krytox®) be applied to the top outside edge of
the cylinder sleeve (7) where it mates with the main
module housing (4). This must be applied before the
sleeve is inserted into the housing. The end of the
cylinder marked with the serial number must enter the
main module housing first.
Figure 17. 50, 100 and 200 kPa/kg Gas
Piston-Cylinder Modules (Expanded View)
Place the piston-cylinder module on a clean
stable surface with the piston cap (2) up.
Using a 3 mm Allen tool, loosen the two sleeve
retaining socket head screws (5) from the
opposing sides of the main module housing (4).
In reassembly, after the two sleeve retaining
screws (5) are installed, the sleeve (7) must still have a
small amount of freedom to move and rotate within the
main module housing (4).
While firmly holding down the cap (2), use a
5 mm Allen tool to loosen the socket head cap
retaining screw (1). The cap retaining screw will
not fully disengage from the piston cap due to
the adjustment mass (3). Gently remove the cap
and screw from the assembly.
When installing the piston cap during
reassembly, remember to reinstall the adjustment
mass (3).
Remove the main module housing (4) by
sliding it upward leaving the piston-cylinder and
sleeve assembly behind.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 186
The two sleeve retaining screws (5)
MUST be reinstalled before pressure is applied to the
piston-cylinder module. Damage to equipment and
injury to personnel may result from pressurizing the
piston-cylinder module without the sleeve retaining
screws installed.
The orientation of the piston on the cylinder is
important. The end of the cylinder that is marked with
the serial number should go into the sleeve and/or main
module housing first. The piston enters the end of the
cylinder that is marked with the serial number.
Installing the cylinder with the wrong orientation may
lead to out of tolerance measurements.
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
5.3.2.2
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY OF GAS
OPERATED, LIQUID LUBRICATED
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES (PC-7200)
The PG7000 piston-cylinder module design affords maximum protection to
the piston-cylinder element assuring that it is protected during routine pistoncylinder handling. Cleaning the piston-cylinder requires disassembly of the module
and exposure of the piston-cylinder to possible damage. These risks include damage
to the critical working surfaces for all piston-cylinder sizes and chipping or breaking,
especially for small diameter piston-cylinders. Only qualified personnel should
undertake piston-cylinder disassembly, cleaning and reassembly. The instructions
and recommendations contained in this manual should be followed carefully
throughout the operation.
NEVER touch the lapped surfaces (polished appearance) of the piston or
cylinder with your bare hands.
Body oils and acids can permanently
etch the surfaces.
In normal use, always maintain PC-7200 gas operated, liquid lubricated pistoncylinder modules vertical with the O-ring assembly down. Tilting or inverting the
assembly can cause the liquid in the modules reservoir to run out. Inverting the
assembly can allow liquid to run up into the piston head into the adjustment mass
and cap. Liquid contamination of the piston head and cap changes the mass of the
piston assembly and could lead to out of tolerance pressure definitions at low mass
loads. If liquid contaminates the adjustment mass and cap, disassemble the module
and clean it (see Section 5.3).
Page 187
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
All Gas Operated, Liquid Lubricated
Piston-Cylinder Modules
While firmly holding down the cap (2), use a 5 mm Allen
tool, to loosen the socket head cap retaining screw
(1). Turning the screw (1) pushes the piston head
(6) straight out of the piston cap (2) ensuring that no
sideways torque is applied to the piston (7). The
cap retaining screw will not fully disengage from the
piston cap due to the adjustment mass (3). Gently
remove the cap and screw from the assembly.
Take care to be sure the piston head is out of the
cap so as NOT to apply torque to the piston (7) when
removing the cap.
In reassembly, when installing the piston cap, be sure
the adjustment mass (3) is still in place on the screw. Take
great care to slip piston cap (2) straight onto the piston
head (6) and not to apply torque to the piston (7).
Unscrew the main module housing (4) from the
bullet case leaving the piston-cylinder and sleeve
assembly behind in the bullet case base. Holding
piston head (6) and taking care not to apply
sideways torque on the piston (7), slide the piston
straight out of the cylinder (13).
Stop here if you are doing a simple cleaning of the
piston-cylinder (see Section 5.3.4). Do not proceed with this
step of disassembly if you do NOT have a new set of O-rings
(11, 12, 14) to use in reassembly. It is imperative that new Orings be used in reassembly.
Figure 18. Gas Operated, Liquid Lubricated
Piston-Cylinder Module (Expanded View)
Before disassembling a gas operated, liquid
lubricated piston-cylinder module, empty the
lubricating liquid reservoir (see Section 5.3.3). After
reassembling, fill the reservoir before using the
piston-cylinder module again.
Gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinders
can usually be cleaned by simply removing the piston,
cleaning it and running it in and out of the cylinder
several times. Do not completely disassemble the pistoncylinder module beyond removing the piston (step )
unless it is absolutely necessary.
Screw the piston-cylinder module into the base of
its bullet case (Acetal shipping and storage case)
and place the base and module on a clean stable
surface with the piston cap (2) up.
Using a 3 mm Allen tool, loosen the two socket
head sleeve retaining screws (5) from the opposing
sides of the main module housing (4).
In reassembly, after the two sleeve retaining screws
(5) are installed, the sleeve (9) must still have a small
amount of freedom to move and rotate within the main
module housing (4).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 188
Using a 3 mm Allen tool, unscrew and remove the four
reservoir cover retaining screws (8). Lift off the reservoir
cover (9a). The small O-ring (12) stays with the reservoir
cover. Remove the large O-ring (11) and its anti-extrusion ring
(10) taking care not to deform the extrusion ring
(PC-7200-100 and PC-7200-200 do not have an antiextrusion ring). Note: Anti-extrusion ring needs to be
installed with beveled edge facing down.
Remove the reservoir assembly with the cylinder in
it from the bullet case base.
Turn over the
assembly and place it on the sturdy surface with the
bottom O-ring (15) up.
Push the cylinder (13) out of the reservoir through
the hole in the bottom of the reservoir and remove
it. Remove the small O-ring (14) from the bottom of
the reservoir.
Continued on next page --->
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
The sleeve retaining screws (5) MUST be reinstalled
before pressure is applied to the piston-cylinder module.
Damage to equipment and injury to personnel may result
from pressurizing the piston-cylinder module without the
sleeve retaining screws installed.
5.3.2.3
The orientation of the piston on the cylinder is
important. The end of the cylinder that is marked with the
serial number should go into the sleeve and/or main module
housing first. The piston enters the end of the cylinder that
is marked with the serial number. Installing the cylinder with
the wrong orientation may lead to out of tolerance
measurements.
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY OF OIL
OPERATED, OIL LUBRICATED
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES (PC-7300)
The PG7000 piston-cylinder module design affords maximum protection to
the piston-cylinder element ensuring that it is protected during routine pistoncylinder handling. Cleaning the piston-cylinder requires disassembly of the module
and exposure of the piston-cylinder to possible damage. These risks include damage
to the critical working surfaces and chipping or breaking, especially for small
diameter pistons, in particular the PC-7300 5 MPa/kg. Only qualified personnel
should undertake piston-cylinder disassembly, cleaning and reassembly. The
instructions and recommendations contained in this manual should be followed
carefully throughout the operation.
NEVER touch the lapped surfaces (polished appearance) of the piston or
cylinder with your bare hands. Body oils and acids can permanently etch
the surfaces.
In normal use, always maintain PG7302 oil piston-cylinders vertical with the Oring assembly down. Do not invert the assembly and allow oil to run up into the
piston head into the adjustment mass and cap. Oil contamination of the piston
head and cap changes the mass of the piston assembly and could lead to out of
tolerance pressure definitions at low mass loads. If oil contaminates the
adjustment mass and cap, disassemble the module and clean it (see Section 5.3).
Page 189
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
All Oil Operated Piston-Cylinder Module
Gently remove the cap and screw from the
assembly. Use caution to be sure the piston head
is out of the cap so as NOT to apply sideways force
to the piston (7) when removing the cap.
When installing the piston cap during reassembly,
remember to reinstall the adjustment mass (3). Take great
care to slip the piston cap (2) straight onto the piston head
(6) and not to apply torque to the piston (7).
Unscrew the main module housing (4) from the
bullet case leaving the piston-cylinder and sleeve
assembly behind in the bullet case base. Carefully
reinstall the piston cap (2) onto the piston head (6)
taking care not to apply sideways torque on the
piston (7). Using the cap as a handle, slide the
piston straight out of the cylinder. NOTE: Do not
twist the piston or apply sideways force to it. It
can easily be snapped.
Remove the cylinder and sleeve assembly from the
bullet case base. Turn over the assembly and
place it on the sturdy surface with the O-ring
assembly (10) up.
Using a 3 mm Allen tool, loosen the two O-ring
assembly retainer screws (12). The screws are
captive so they will not disengage completely.
Remove the O-ring retainer (11) with the retainer
screws. Remove the O-ring assembly (10).
There are low pressure and high pressure oil pistoncylinder modules, which are identical except for the size of the
O-ring assembly. The low pressure assembly has a large,
below).
In
single diameter and is shorter (see
reassembly, take care to ensure that a low pressure O-ring
assembly is never installed on a high pressure module as
excessive force and damage under pressure could result.
Figure 19. Oil
Piston-Cylinder Module (Expanded View)
Screw the piston-cylinder module into the base of
its bullet case (Acetal shipping and storage case)
and place the base and module on a clean stable
surface with the piston cap up.
Using a 3 mm Allen tool, loosen the two socket
head sleeve retaining screws (5) from the opposing
sides of the main module housing (4).
In reassembly, after the two sleeve retaining screws
(5) are installed, the sleeve (8) must still have a small
amount of freedom to move and rotate within the main
module housing (4).
While firmly holding down the cap (2), use a 5 mm Allen
tool, to loosen the socket head cap retaining screw
(1). Turning the screw pushes the piston head (6)
straight out of the piston cap (2) ensuring that no
sideways force is applied to the piston (7). NOTE:
Small diameter pistons can be snapped by
excessive sideways force. The cap retaining
screw will not fully disengage from the piston cap
due to the adjustment mass (3).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 190
Holding the cylinder (9) in the open end of the
cylinder sleeve (8), turn the cylinder sleeve over.
Allow the cylinder to gently slide out. The end of
the cylinder marked with the serial number must
enter the module housing first.
Before reinstalling the piston in the cylinder, make
sure that the piston is lubricated with a light film of oil .
The sleeve retaining screws (5) MUST be reinstalled
before pressure is applied to the piston-cylinder module.
Damage to equipment and injury to personnel may result
from pressurizing the piston-cylinder module without the sleeve
retaining screws installed.
Continued on next page --->
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
NEVER install a low pressure O-ring assembly (11 in
Figure 14) on a high pressure oil piston-cylinder module. High
pressure piston-cylinder modules are PC-7300-1, -2 and -5. The
low pressure O-ring assembly has a single diameter and is
shorter than a high pressure O-ring assembly. Operating a high
pressure oil piston-cylinder module with a low pressure O-ring
assembly installed could cause excessive force and damage
the module.
Low Pressure
High Pressure
O-ring Assembly
5.3.3
The orientation of the piston on the cylinder is
important. The end of the cylinder that is marked with the
serial number should go into the sleeve and/or main module
housing first. The piston enters the end of the cylinder that
is marked with the serial number. Installing the cylinder with
the wrong orientation may lead to out of tolerance
measurements.
O-ring Assembly
FILLING OR EMPTYING GAS OPERATED, LIQUID LUBRICATED
PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE RESERVOIR WITH LIQUID
PURPOSE
To fill or empty the reservoir that holds the liquid used to lubricate the piston-cylinder gap in
PC-7200 piston-cylinder modules.
PRINCIPLE
PC-7200 gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder modules include a reservoir, which
holds the liquid used to lubricate the gap between the piston and the cylinder
(see Figure 3.1.1). If this reservoir is allowed to go empty, the piston-cylinder module will not
operate properly. Symptoms of lack of lubricating liquid are poor piston sensitivity, excessive
piston drop rate and/or excessive rotation decay rate.
To avoid running out of lubricating liquid, it is recommended that the piston-cylinder module
liquid reservoir be refilled approximately once a week when the module is being used
extensively or if the module has not been used for an extended period of time.
The reservoir may also be emptied for shipping or disassembly.
OPERATION
To fill the reservoir of a PC-7200 gas operated, liquid lubricated piston-cylinder module,
proceed as follows (see Figure 5.3.3). To empty the reservoir, uses steps and only.
Place the piston-cylinder module horizontally with one of the liquid fill holes facing up.
Some liquid may come out of the hole. This indicates that the reservoir is not empty.
Use a syringe supplied with the piston-cylinder module. Empty the syringe and insert it
snugly into the fill hole. Draw back the syringe plunger and withdraw the remaining liquid
from the reservoir until air begins to enter the syringe.
Dispose of the contents of the syringe and wipe off any liquid residue in the bottom of the
module and around the fill hole.
Fill the syringe with 8 cc of fresh liquid. With the piston-cylinder module still in the
horizontal position, inject the full 8 cc of liquid into the fill hole. Be sure to use the correct
fluid for the piston-cylinder module (PC-7200-100, -200 and use Synturion 6; PC-7200-500,
-1 and -2 use Sebacate, see Section 1.2.2.2).
Simultaneously, remove the syringe and hold the module in the vertical position. Let any
liquids run off and wipe off the inside bottom of the module, if necessary, with a lint free wipe.
The module is ready to be reinstalled in the PG7202 Platform (see Section 2.3.2).
Page 191
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Figure 20. Filling Gas Operated, Liquid Lubricated
Piston-Cylinder Module Reservoir (PC-7200)
When refilling piston-cylinder modules, if the quantity of liquid withdrawn in step
less than 2 cc, you should fill the module more frequently.
above is
In day to day use, always keep gas operated, liquid lubricated modules in the vertical
position when handling them to avoid having liquid escape from the fill holes.
5.3.4
CLEANING PISTON-CYLINDERS
Water/Detergent Method
Of the two cleaning methods, the water/detergent method is more time consuming but it is
also more thorough.
DO NOT undertake piston-cylinder module disassembly without familiarizing yourself
with Section 5.3.1 of this manual. Incorrect disassembly may damage or destroy the pistoncylinder element.
Disassemble the piston-cylinder module following the instructions given in Section
5.3.2.1 for PC-7100/7600 modules, Section or Section 5.3.2.2 for PC-7200 modules or
Section 5.3.2.3 for PC-7300 modules.
Reinsert the piston (with cap installed) into the cylinder.
Create a bath of water and mild liquid dishwashing detergent. Distilled water is
acceptable. De-ionized water is best. Detergent must be free of additives (i.e., lotions
or softening agents which may leave a residue after cleaning). To avoid undesired
thermal effects, bring the bath to room temperature.
Holding the piston-cylinder assembly by the outside of the cylinder and the piston cap,
submerge the assembly in the bath. Using a rotating motion, thoroughly work the
detergent into the piston-cylinder assembly.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 192
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
With the piston-cylinder still assembled, thoroughly rinse the assembly in a bath of
water only. Use the same rotating motion as in the previous step.
Remove the piston from the cylinder and thoroughly dry all areas of the assembly using
a lint free towel. DO NOT touch the critical lapped surfaces of the piston or the cylinder
with anything other than the drying towel. Only use one side of the towel during this
process as the other side will become contaminated by contact with the operator’s
hands. Dry thoroughly.
Reassemble the metrological assembly in reverse order.
If the assembly temperature was elevated during cleaning, it may be necessary to wait
to allow the temperature of the assembly to return to ambient temperature before the
assembly will operate normally.
To avoid static build up on the 35 mm ceramic piston surface, do not excessively rub or buff
the surface after it has been dried. After cleaning ceramic elements, it is recommended that they
be discharged to remove any possibility of static charge. This can be accomplished by running a
clean, grounded wire (typically from an ESD pad) across the inner and outer surfaces of the
piston and cylinder.
Quick Method
Of the two cleaning methods, the quick method is less demanding but it is less thorough.
DO NOT undertake piston-cylinder module disassembly without familiarizing yourself with
Section 5.3.1 of this manual. Incorrect disassembly may damage or destroy the piston-cylinder.
Disassemble the piston-cylinder module following the instructions given in Section 5.3.2.1
for PC-7100/7600 modules, Section or Section 5.3.2.2 for PC-7200 modules or Section
5.3.2.3 for PC-7300 modules. Note, it is frequently adequate to clean only the piston of PC7200 and PC-7300 modules which avoids complete disassembly of the module.
If you have not already done so, reinstall the cap on the piston.
Apply a small amount of Dow Corning® OS-20 or glass cleaner to a lint free wipe. If
glass cleaner is used, slightly dilute the cleaner using distilled or de-ionized water to help
ensure that no residue will be left behind. Wipe the lapped surfaces (polished
appearance) of both the piston and cylinder.
Using a separate, clean, lint free wipe, wipe the surfaces again to remove any remaining
moisture. If canned air is available, blow the surfaces off with a slow flow of air.
Reassemble the piston-cylinder assembly in reverse order.
To avoid static build up on the 35 mm ceramic piston surface, do not excessively rub or buff the
surface after it has been dried. After cleaning ceramic piston, it is recommended that it be discharged
to remove any possibility of static charge. This can be accomplished by running a clean, grounded wire
(typically from an ESD pad) across the inner and outer surfaces of the piston and cylinder.
Page 193
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5.3.5
LUBRICATING PISTON-CYLINDER MODULES
The purpose of piston-cylinder module lubrication is to minimize wear to components of the
piston-cylinder module. The proper long term functioning of the module requires that specific
areas of certain components be properly lubricated, especially after they have been cleaned.
Lubricant
Vacuum Grease: DuPont Krytox GPL-205/6 is the recommended lubricant. Krytox is
selected because it is a non-reactive, nonflammable, oxygen service safe grease. Very small
amounts are used.
Krytox is made of perfluoropolyether (PFPE) thickened with
polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE). Users should avoid contact with eyes and skin.
A tube of Krytox GPL-205/6 is included in the PG7000 Platform accessory kit.
Where to Lubricate
The lubrication charts in Figures 21, 22 and 23 depict the areas that require application of
vacuum grease. A thin film (i.e. just enough lubricant to fully cover the area indicated)
applied to these areas is all that is necessary. Lubrication with more than a thin film will
increase the cost of lubrication and may result in contamination of the piston and/or cylinder.
Areas not indicated for lubrication should be kept free from vacuum grease.
Lubricating O-Rings
O-rings identified for lubrication should be lubricated prior to installation. During service Orings may be left in place and a thin film of vacuum grease applied to the outside diameter.
Vacuum grease may be applied by placing a drop (3-4mm diameter - approximately 1530mg) of grease between the thumb and forefinger and then rolling the O-ring between the
thumb and forefinger to apply a thin film over the entire o-ring (use of gloves is
recommended). An alternate method is to place a drop (3-4mm diameter - approximately 1530mg) of vacuum grease in a small zip closure plastic bag (just large enough to fit the largest
O-ring). Place the O-ring in the bag, close the bag, and then gently work the vacuum grease
over the entire O-ring.
Spring Carrier Lubrication
The spring carrier is lubricated at DHI. Under normal conditions it is not necessary for the
user to remove the spring carrier for lubrication. In the event that lubrication is necessary,
use caution during disassembly. Remove the clip, spacer, spring carrier and springs (qty 6).
Lubricate the spring carrier as shown in the lubrication chart. Reassemble, using care to
install the springs, spacer and clip in the reverse order of disassembly.
Pistons and Cylinders
Pistons and cylinders should be kept free from vacuum grease and any other contaminant
(see Section 5.3.4). Vacuum grease or other contaminants on the piston or cylinder will
adversely affect the piston-cylinder module’s performance.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 194
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
Figure 21. Gas Operated, Gas Lubricated Piston-Cylinder Module Lubrication Chart
Page 195
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Figure 22. Gas Operated, Liquid Lubricated Piston-Cylinder Module Lubrication Chart
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 196
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
Figure 23. Oil Operated Piston-Cylinder Module Lubrication Chart
Page 197
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5.3.6
RECALIBRATION
PRINCIPLE
Piston-cylinders and mass sets are recalibrated by redetermining the effective area of the
piston-cylinder and the true mass values of the masses. It is recommended that
piston-cylinders and mass sets be recalibrated at the end of their first and second years
of operation. Then, based on their observed stability, a longer calibration interval can usually
be assigned. Though other organizations may be able to perform these calibrations, it is
recommended that a DHI Calibration Service be used, if possible.
The recalibration process may find values for piston-cylinder effective area, pressure
coefficient and mass values that are different from the previous values. The PG7000
piston-cylinder and/or mass set files must be changed to reflect the new values (see
Sections 5.3.2.1 and 5.4.2.1).
5.3.6.1
UPDATING PISTON-CYLINDER MODULE FILES
See Section 3.11.1.2 for information on editing a piston-cylinder module file to
reflect new calibration data.
5.4
MASS SETS
5.4.1
CLEANING
Care should always be taken with all PG7000 masses, including the piston assembly and the
mass loading bell, to avoid contaminating them with liquids or particles. They should never
be handled with bare hands.
Over time, or by an accidental incident, masses may become soiled. In these cases, they
can be cleaned.
Masses should be cleaned with a non-abrasive general purpose cleaner (such as glass
cleaner) and wiped dry with lint free paper towels.
5.4.2
RECALIBRATION
PRINCIPLE
Piston-cylinders and mass sets are recalibrated by redetermining the effective area of the
piston-cylinder and the true mass values of the masses. It is recommended that
piston-cylinders and mass sets be recalibrated at the end of their first and second years of
operation. Then, based on their observed stability, a longer calibration interval may be
assigned. Though other organizations may be able to perform these calibrations, it is
recommended that a DHI Calibration Service be used, if possible.
The recalibration process may find values for piston-cylinder effective area, pressure
coefficient and mass values that are different from the previous values. The PG7000
piston-cylinder and/or mass set files must be changed to reflect the new values (see Sections
5.3.2.1 and 5.4.2.1).
5.4.2.1
UPDATING MASS SET FILES
See Sections 3.11.1.7 and 3.11.1.12 for information on editing mass set and
mass loading bell files to reflect new calibration data. The mass of the piston
assembly is included in the piston-cylinder module file (see Section 3.11.1.2).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 198
5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION
5.5
RELOADING EMBEDDED SOFTWARE INTO PG7000
FLASH MEMORY
PG7000 uses FLASH memory. This allows the embedded software that controls PG7000 operations and
functions to be loaded into PG7000 over its COM1 port from a computer with a simple FLASH loading
utility program.
To replace corrupted software or upgrade your software, access the DHI worldwide web site at
www.dhinstruments.com and go to embedded located under software. A Flash loading utility and the
latest PG7000 software are available for download at no charge. If you do not have access to the web or
have difficulty downloading or loading software, contact your DHI representative or a DHI Authorized
Service Provider for assistance.
If you believe you have discovered an error or “bug” in PG7000 software, please report it with complete
details by email to [email protected] or submit an on-line Quality Feedback Report at
www.dhinstruments.com.
The DHI flash software loading utility and PG7000 embedded software are available for download from
the SOFTWARE section of DHI’s worldwide web site at www.dhinstruments.com.
5.6
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY OF PG7000
5.6.1
PLATFORM
See Section 5.2.1.5, Mounting Post PRT Removal.
5.6.2
TERMINAL
To open the PG7000 Terminal proceed as follows:
 Disconnect power.
 Remove the pop-off screw covers on the bottom of the case.
 Remove the four case screws.
 Lift OFF the cover. Be careful not to over stress the ribbon cables connecting the display
and keypad in the cover to the printed circuit board in the base.
 Disconnect the cover to base ribbon cables at the connectors on the base printed
circuit board. Be aware that the connectors are locking connectors.
 To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
5.6.3
AMH AUTOMATED MASS HANDLER REMOVAL
See the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Page 199
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 200
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1
OVERVIEW
PG7000 is a sophisticated pressure measuring instrument with advanced on-board features
and functions. Before assuming that unexpected behavior is caused by a system defect or breakdown,
the operator should use this manual and other training facilities to become thoroughly familiar with
PG7000 operation. This troubleshooting guide is intended as an aid in identifying the cause of
unexpected PG7000 behavior and determining whether the behavior is due to normal operation or an
internal or external problem.
Identify the symptom or unexpected behavior you are observing from the SYMPTOM list below.
A PROBABLE CAUSE is provided and a SOLUTION is proposed including references to manual
sections that provide information that may be of assistance.
See the AMH-38/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual for troubleshooting the operation of an
AMH automated mass handler.
Table 29. PG7000 Troubleshooting Checklist
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
Will NOT power up.
Blown fuse.
Front panel keys seem to be disabled.
“REMOTE” command has been sent from Send “LOCAL” command from host
a host computer.
computer or cycle PG7000 power. 4.3.4.2
Replace fuse in PG7000 Terminal.
Front panel display is dim.
Screen saver option has been activated.
Press any key to resume full screen power,
adjust activation time if desired. 3.11.4.1
Keypad presses make
sounds or no sounds.
undesired Keypad sound settings are incorrect.
Cannot access
Display shows:
functions. User Level setting restricts access to Change User Level or consult system
those functions.
manager. 3.11.8
certain
Use sounds function to set keypad sounds
as desired. 3.11.42
<ACCESS RESTRICTED>.
Cannot establish communication over Computer and/or PG7000 interface not Check and correct interface configurations
interface.
correctly configured; incorrect or bad and cables if necessary. Run COM port test.
3.11.5, 3.11.5.3, 4.2
interface cable.
Displays
<FATAL
<FATAL FAULT>.
ERROR>
Display <TOUT> or <TIME-OUT>.
or Encountered unresolved internal software Cycle power to clear.
Please record
conflict.
conditions leading up to the event, including
the numbers displayed when enter is
pressed and report the information to a DHI
Authorized Service Provider.
PG7000 is having a communications Check setup and communications with
barometer
or
pressure
problem with an external barometer or external
generation/control component. 3.11.5.4
pressure generation/control component.
Displays <******> or <OVERFLOW> Number to be displayed is too large for Check settings that may be causing an out of
where a numerical value should be.
allocated space.
Usually due to an limit high measurement and adjust if
erroneous
setting
or
measurement necessary. 3.9.3
causing an out of limit high value to be
calculated.
The PG Terminal constantly displays The PG Terminal is unable to establish Check that the PG Terminal to Platform
<Searching …. >.
communications
with
the
PG7000 cable is installed correctly. If still unable to
get beyond <Searching …. >, contact a DHI
Platform.
Authorized Service Provider. 2.3.1.1
The run screen is not the normal MAIN You are in the SYSTEM or AMBIENT run Operation
run screen.
screen.
3.8
Page 201
is
normal.
Press
[ESCAPE]
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
Displays of ambient conditions values The reference to which the ambient
are not accurate.
condition values are being compared is
not accurate or the specifications of the
ambient conditions sensors are not being
evaluated correctly.
Check the specifications and operation of the
reference being used for ambient conditions.
Consider the specifications of the ambient
conditions measurements. 1.2.1.2
On power up, PG Terminal displays TH Probe is not connected
<RH Sensor ERR#xx> or PRT or RH
field displays flashing <ERR>
Turn power off.
Check TH
connection. Turn power on. 2.3.1.1
Piston drop rate is excessive.
Piston drop
(PG7202).
rate
is
Probe
There is a leak in the pressurized system Correct leak.
or the device under test itself.
excessive Liquid lubrication reservoir is empty and gas Refill piston-cylinder liquid lubrication reservoir.
is escaping through piston-cylinder gap.
5.3.3
Piston rotation rate decay is excessive Liquid lubrication reservoir is empty so Refill piston-cylinder liquid lubrication reservoir.
(PG7202).
piston-cylinder gap is not properly 5.3.3
lubricated.
Piston rotation rate decay
excessive.
rate is Piston position detection is out of Adjust piston position detection. 5.2.2
adjustment is piston is in spring zone, not
floating freely.
Motorized rotation will not engage.
Motorized rotation system recovering from Wait 25 seconds for system to recover.
overload or measurement made is 3.9.13, 3.9.8
absolute by vacuum and reference
vacuum is not under ready limit.
Automated motorized rotation is not Automated motorized rotation is OFF.
operating.
Press [ROTATE]. 3.9.8
Manually activated motorized rotation Motorized rotation has overloaded or Operation is normal. Wait 25 seconds for
system to recover from overload or wait until
cutoff while the [
] was still pressed. maximum rotation rate was reached.
rotation rate is below maximum. .9.8
Automated motorized rotation is not Current mass
engaging even though rotation rate is load of 3 kg.
less than minimum Ready rotation
rate.
load
is
under
Motorized rotation unable to start Piston-cylinder dirty.
piston rotation.
cutoff Operation is normal. 3.4.2
Clean piston-cylinder. 5.3.1
The piston deceleration function starts Operation is normal but can be modified Turn off the PRE-DECEL function. 3.9.8.1
immediately when [ENTER/SET P] is so that deceleration does not occur if it is
not needed.
pressed.
piston-cylinder,
level
PG7000
Piston-cylinder dirty, PG7000 Platform not Clean
level, PG7000 subjected to excessive Platform, adjust piston position indication,
remove sources of vibration. 2.3.1.1, 5.2.2,
Piston rotation rate slows down too vibration.
5.3.1
quickly; motorized rotation engages
too frequently.
Piston position indication is not properly Calibrate piston position indication system.
calibrated and piston is not floating when 5.2.2
rotation engages.
The mass value loading instruction Mass entries are in nominal mass and Operation is normal. Familiarize yourself
with PG7000 mass protocol. 3.6
resulting from a pressure entry and the MAIN run screen displays actual mass.
mass value displayed in the MAIN run
screen are not the same.
The resolution of mass loading The mass loading resolution setting is set Use [RES] to set mass loading resolution as
instructions doesn’t seem correct.
incorrectly.
desired. 3.9.10
Piston
position
incorrect.
readings
seem Piston position reading system needs to Execute piston position reading adjustment
be adjusted; mass bell is not loaded so procedure, load mass bell. 5.2.2
piston position indication is not operating.
Pressure defined by PG7000 is grossly Active piston-cylinder module and/or mass Select correct piston-cylinder module and
incorrect.
set are not those that are in use, the mass set; check mass load accounting. 3.6,
3.9.2, 3.11.1.10
correct mass value is not loaded.
Pressure defined by PG7000 is PG7000 is in absolute measurement mode Use [MODE] to select correct measurement
incorrect by roughly 100 kPa (14.5 psi).
when it should be in gauge measurement mode. 3.9.4
mode or vice-versa.
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 202
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
Pressure defined by PG7000 is A pressure head is applied incorrectly or Check and correct if necessary. 3.9.7, 3.10,
incorrect by relatively small amounts.
inadvertently, the value of gravity used by 2.4.11, 3.11.1
the SETUP file is incorrect, the PG7000
Platform is not level, information in the
piston-cylinder module and/or mass set file
is incorrect.
Pressure
incorrect.
defined
by
PG7000
is Piston is in spring zone although piston Adjust piston position measurement system.
position indicates it is floating freely.
5.2.2
Cannot set a hydraulic pressure >110 PG7202 believes a gas piston-cylinder Install and select an oil (PC-7300-x) pistonMPa (16 000 psi) with PG7202.
(PC-7200-x) is in operation and gas cylinder.
piston-cylinder modules cannot be used
above 110 MPa (16 000 psi).
When using automated pressure Pressure
control pressure generation stopped LIMIT.
and the controller is beeping.
reached
controller’s
UPPER Check [GEN] UPPER LIMIT and adjust if
desired. 3.9.9.3
When using AMH automated mass Mass loading resolution is set to finer than Adjust mass loading resolution to 0.1 kg,
handler, PG7000 still prompts for 0.1 kg and prompts are to load trim mass, initialize AMH mass set by selecting it.
3.9.10, 3.11.1.10
AMH mass handler did not initialize.
manual mass loads.
The pressure controller TOLERANCE Adjust the tolerance setting, adjust the
function setting is too small or the volume volume setting (PG7302/PG7307 only).
setting (PG7302/PG7307 only) is incorrect. 3.9.9.4, 3.9.9.6
Automated pressure control (GEN) is Piston position detection system is not
overshooting the pressure at which the properly calibrated and piston is not
floating as expected.
piston floats.
With a PG7302 at low pressure there may
be excessive air in the test system.
Calibrate piston position indication system.
5.2.2
Purge the test system of air prior to operating
the PG7302. Use the PPCH prime and
purge function. PPCH Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Automated pressure control (GEN) is The test volume is too large or the volume Reduce the test volume and/or, if possible,
extremely slow or never floats the setting is incorrect (PG7302/PG7307 only). make the tolerance setting smaller, adjust
the volume setting (PG7302/PG7307 only).
pistons.
3.9.9.4, 3.9.9.6
Automated pressure control (GEN) is Pressure or vacuum supply on
not increasing or decreasing pressure pressure controller is not adequate.
as expected.
Automated pressure control (GEN) is
not starting after setting a target and
loading mass AND measurement
mode is absolute by vacuum.
the Provide correct pressure and vacuum
supplies to pressure controller. See the
pressure
controllers
Operation
and
Maintenance Manual.
In absolute by vacuum measurement Wait for vacuum to reach less than 20 Pa,
mode,
fefore
automated
pressure check and correct vacuum supply if
generation begins, the reference vacuum inadequate.
must be below 20 Pa.
Page 203
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NO T E S
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 204
7. APPENDIX
7.
APPENDIX
7.1
CONVERSION OF NUMERICAL VALUES
PG7000 performs all internal calculations in SI units. Numerical values input or output in other units are
converted to SI immediately after entry and back to other units just before output as needed.
The tables below provide the conversion coefficients used by PG7000 to convert numerical values
expressed in SI units to corresponding values expressed in other units.
7.1.1
PRESSURE
Table 30. Pressure Unit of Measure Conversions
TO CONVERT FROM PA TO
Pa
Pascal
1.0
mbar
millibar
1.0 E-02
kPa
kilo Pascal
1.0 E-03
bar
Bar
1.0 E-05
mmWa @ 4°C
millimeter of water
1.019716 E-01
mmHg @ 0°C
millimeter of mercury
7.50063 E-03
psi
pound per square inch
1.450377 E-04
psf
pound per square foot
1.007206 E-06
inWa @ 4°C
inch of water
4.014649 E-03
inWa @ 20°C
inch of water
4.021732 E-03
inWa @ 60°F
inch of water
4.018429 E-03
inHg @ 0°C
kcm
7.2
MULTIPLY BY
2
inch of mercury
2.953 E-04
kilogram force per centimeter square
1.019716 E-05
Torr
Torr (mmHg @ 0°C)
7.50063 E-03
mTor
milli Torr (micron Hg @ 0°C)
7.50063
user
User
User defined coefficient
DEFINED PRESSURE CALCULATIONS
Sections 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 document the calculations used by PG7000 piston gauges to obtain the defined
pressure.
Table 31 defines the pressure calculation variables used in Sections 7.2.1 and 7.2.2.
Page 205
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 31. PG7000 Defined Pressure Calculation Variables
VARIABLE
Αθ , P /π
A20,0
DEFINITION
Piston radius
pressure P
at
UNITS
θ and
temperature
Piston effective area at 20°C, Patm
m
SOURCE OF VALUE
Calculated.
mm
2
2
Piston-cylinder module file (3.11.1.3).
Aθ,P
Piston effective area at temperature θ,
pressure P
G
Local gravity
m/s
KN
Nominal mass to pressure conversion
coefficient for a given piston-cylinder size
Pa/kg
M
Mass load
PA
Absolute pressure
Paa
Calculated.
Patm
Atmospheric (ambient) pressure
Paa
Internal measurement, user entered value
or standard as specified by SETUP file
(3.10).
PG
Gauge pressure
Pa
Calculated.
PHA
Fluid head correction in absolute mode
Pa
Calculated using device heights and
medium (7.2.3.2, 3.9.7, 3.11.3).
PHG
Fluid head correction in gauge mode
Pa
Calculated using device heights and
medium (7.2.3.2, 3.9.7, 3.11.3).
PHD
Fluid head correction
differential mode
Pa
Calculated using device heights and
medium (7.2.3.2, 3.9.7, 3.11.3).
PL
Line Pressure
Pa
High line differential mode only (3.9.4.2).
Pnom
Nominal pressure
Pa
In pressure to mass mode Pnom=Preq
In mass to pressure mode Pnom=M·KN
Poffset
Difference between PG7601 and RPM at
the static pressure of differential mode
Pa
Determined experimentally in PG7601
differential mode operation (see Section
3.9.4.1, Selecting Differential Mode, Setting
Static Pressure, Finding RPM Offset).
PRPM
Current static pressure reading
reference pressure monitor
Paa
Read automatically from external atm P
source specified by SETUP file. Used in
PG7601 differential mode only (3.10, 3.9.4.1).
ΔPD
Differential pressure
Pa
Calculated. PG7601 differential mode only
(3.9.4.1).
ΔPHLD
High line differential pressure
Pa
Calculated. High line differential mode only
(3.9.4.2).
ΔPnom
Nominal differential pressure in high line
differential mode
Pa
In pressure to mass mode ΔPnom=ΔPreq
In mass to pressure mode
ΔPnom=(MR - MRX)·KN.
Γ
Surface tension coefficient
N/m
Piston-cylinder module file (3.11.1.3).
αC
Cylinder linear thermal expansion coefficient
°C
-1
Piston-cylinder module file (3.11.1.3).
αP
Piston linear thermal expansion coefficient
°C
-1
Piston-cylinder module file (3.11.1.3).
λ
Piston-cylinder pressure coefficient
Pa
-1
Piston-cylinder module file (3.11.1.3).
θ
Temperature of piston-cylinder
ρa
Air density
kg/m
3
Calculated from standard air density
corrected for actual atmospheric pressure,
ambient temperature and relative humidity
(atm p, humidity and temp source are
specified by SETUP file) (3.10).
ρm
Mass density
kg/m
3
Mass set file (3.11.1.8).
m
2
kg
in
high
line
from
( )P+ΔP
Line pressure + differential
(reference piston-cylinder)
pressure
( )R
Reference
-
( )RX
Reference, at time of cross float
-
( )T
Tare
-
( )TX
Tare, at time of cross float
Page 206
-
Local, standard or user as specified in
current SETUP file (3.10).
Calculated from A20,0 and standard
conditions.
Current mass loading instruction (3.6,
3.9.11).
°C
Subscripts specific to high line differential mode (see Section 3.9.4.2).
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Calculated from A20,0 in piston-cylinder
module file (3.11.1.3).
Internal measurement, user entered value
or standard as specified by SETUP file
(3.10).
7. 10BAPPENDIX
7.2.1
PG7102, PG7202 AND PG7302
PG7102, PG7202 and PG7302 perform mass to pressure and pressure to mass calculations
as follows:
•
Gauge pressure:
⎛
ρ ⎞
Mg ⎜⎜1 − a ⎟⎟ + 2πΓ
ρm ⎠
⎝
PG =
Aθ ,P
Αθ,P
π
+ PΗG
Aθ,P = A20,0 ⋅10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + α C )](1 + λPnom )
•
Absolute pressure by addition of atmosphere reference:
⎛
ρ ⎞
Mg ⎜⎜1 − a ⎟⎟ + 2πΓ
ρm ⎠
⎝
PA =
Aθ,P
Aθ,P
π
+ PHA + Patm
Aθ,P = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + αC )](1 + λPnom )
•
High line differential pressure:
⎛
ΔPHLD =
(M R − M RX )g ⎜⎜1 −
⎝
Aθ , P + ΔP
ρa ⎞
⎟
ρm ⎟⎠
[(
)
(
[
(
Aθ,P + ΔP = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ 1 + (θ R − 20 ) α PR + α C R
PL = PG RX
)
]
+ PL α PR + α C R (θ RX − θ R ) − α PT + αCT (θ TX − θ T ) + PΗD
⎛
⎜ Mg ⎛⎜1 − ρa ⎞⎟ + 2πΓ
⎜
⎜
ρm ⎟⎠
⎝
=⎜
Aθ ,P
⎜
⎜⎜
⎝
Page 207
Αθ,P
π
)] [1 + λ(P
L
+ ΔPnom )]
⎞
⎟
⎟
+ PΗG ⎟
⎟
⎟⎟
⎠ RX
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7.2.2
PG7601
PG7601 performs pressure to mass and mass to pressure calculations as follows:
•
Gauge mode:
⎛
ρ ⎞
Mg ⎜⎜1 − a ⎟⎟ + 2πΓ
ρ
m ⎠
⎝
PG =
Aθ ,P
Αθ,P
π
+ PΗG
Aθ,P = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + α C )](1 + λPnom )
•
Absolute pressure by adding atmospheric pressure:
⎛
ρ ⎞
Mg ⎜⎜1 − a ⎟⎟ + 2πΓ
ρ
m ⎠
⎝
PA =
Aθ,P
Aθ,P
π
+ PHA + Patm
Aθ,P = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + α C )](1 + λPnom )
•
Absolute pressure with vacuum reference:
Aθ,P
Mg + 2πΓ
PA =
π
Aθ,P
+ PHA + Pvac
Aθ,P = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + αC )](1 + λPnom )
•
Differential pressure (differential mode):
Mg + 2πΓ
ΔPD =
Aθ,P
π
Aθ,P
+ PHA + Pvac − PRPM − Poffset
Aθ,P = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + α C )](1 + λPnom )
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 208
7. 10BAPPENDIX
7.2.3
FLUID HEADS
7.2.3.1
FLUID HEAD COMPONENTS
PG7000
supports
three
different
fluid
head
components
(see
Sections 3.11.3, 3.9.7): DUT head, ATM head and Piston head. The three
components are combined to create the overall head correction for each PG7000
measurement mode (see Section 7.2.3.2).
DUT head: Calculates and applies a fluid head correction to predict the defined
pressure at a level other than the PG7000’s reference level (see Section 3.9.7).
The DUT head is calculated following:
PH DUT = (ρ f − ρ a )gh D
Where:
PH DUT
, DUT head [Pa]
=
fluid head correction applied to the defined pressure
calculated at the PG7000 reference level.
ρ f, fluid density [kg/m ]
=
density of the pressurized medium (oil density = 916 kg/m3,
3
water density = 998.2321 kg/m , gas densities are calculated
for N2, He or air dependent on current pressure and
temperature).
ρ a, air density [kg/m3]
=
density of ambient air calculated using current ambient
pressure, temperature and relative humidity (values as
specified in the active SETUP file, see Section 3.10).
Assumed to be zero when operating in absolute with a
vacuum reference mode. Calculated using static pressure
density measured by RPM in PG7601 differential mode.
g, gravity [m/s2]
=
acceleration due to gravity (value as specified in the active
SETUP file, see Section 3.10).
hD, DUT height [m]
=
Height of DUT above PG7000 reference level. Value is
negative if below reference level.
3
ATM head: Calculates and applies a fluid head correction to internal or external
barometer readings to correct the atmospheric pressure value to the PG7000’s
reference level if the barometer is reading at a different level (see Section 3.11.3.3).
The ATM head is calculated following:
PH atm = ρas gh B
Where:
PH atm
, ATM head [Pa]
=
fluid head correction applied to the internal or external
barometer reading.
ρas, air density [kg/m3]
=
standard air density of 1.2 kg/m3.
g, gravity [m/s2]
=
acceleration due to gravity (value as specified in the active
SETUP file, see Section 3.10).
hB, barometer height [m]
=
Height of the internal or external barometer above the
PG7000 reference level. Value is negative if below
reference level.
Page 209
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PISTON head: Calculates and applies a fluid head correction to compensate for
the difference between the current piston position and the PG7000’s reference
level (see Section 3.11.3.4).
The DUT head is calculated following:
PH P = (ρ f − ρa )ghP
Where:
PH P , Piston head [Pa]
=
fluid head correction applied to calculate defined pressure.
ρ f, fluid density [kg/m3]
=
Density of test fluid at current pressure.
ρ a, air density [kg/m3]
=
density of ambient air calculated using current ambient
pressure, temperature and relative humidity (values as
specified in the active SETUP file, see Section 3.10).
Assumed to be zero when operating in absolute with a
vacuum reference mode. Calculated using static pressure
density measured by RPM in PG7601 differential mode.
g, gravity [m/s2]
=
acceleration due to gravity (value as specified in the active
SETUP file, see Section 3.10).
hP, piston height [m]
=
Height of the current piston position above PG7000
reference level.
7.2.3.2
OVERALL FLUID HEAD CORRECTION
The overall fluid head correction for each PG7000 mode results from combining
the three head components. In general, overall head correction is given by:
PH = − PH DUT − PH atm + PH P
Gauge mode:
PHG = −(ρ f − ρ a )gh D +(ρ f − ρ a )ghP
Absolute mode by adding atmospheric pressure: Air density is zero for all
components except for the ATM head which is used to compensate for
barometer height.
PHA = − ρ f gh D − ρ as ghB + ρ f ghP
Absolute mode with vacuum reference: Air density is zero for all terms and
no barometer is used.
PHA = − ρ f gh D + ρ f ghP
High line differential mode: Subtraction of tare head correction from reference
gives total differential head correction, assuming both tare and reference
PG7000 levels are at the same height. Note that (P+ΔP) represents fluid
properties evaluated at line pressure plus differential pressure. Also note that
the barometer head corrections cancel out.
(
)
(
)
PHD = PHG R − PHGT = − ρ f P + ΔP − ρ f P g h D + ρ f P + ΔP hPR − ρ f P hPT g
Differential mode: Head correction is the same as for absolute mode with
vacuum reference. Head correction for the height of the RPM is unnecessary
through the use of the RPM offset.
PHA = − ρ f gh D + ρ f ghP
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 210
7. 10BAPPENDIX
7.3
GLOSSARY
Absolute
As in absolute pressure. Pressure expressed relative to vacuum.
Absolute by vacuum,
avac
Absolute pressure determined by defining pressure relative to vacuum in an evacuated bell jar
(PG7601 only).
Absolute by
atmosphere, aatm
Absolute pressure determined by adding atmospheric pressure to gauge pressure.
Adder
A value added to internal sensor readings to offset the readings (pressure adder, temperature
adder, humidity adder, vacuum adder) for calibration adjustment.
Ae
Piston-cylinder effective area.
AMH
Optional automated mass handling system.
ATM Head
Pressure head correction to the barometer measurement to take into consideration the
difference between the actual barometer level and the PG7000 reference level.
Crossfloat
Process of comparison of two piston cylinders in which they are connected together under
pressure and the mass of one is adjusted so that both pistons float together at a common
pressure. Used to set the line pressure in high line differential measurement mode.
Differential
As in differential pressure. Pressure expressed relative to atmospheric or another static
pressure determined by subtracting the static pressure from absolute by vacuum (differential
measurement mode).
DUT (Device Under
Test)
The device being tested or calibrated.
DUT Head
Fluid head correction to the pressure defined by PG7000 to predict the pressure at the level of
the DUT, which may be different from the PG7000 reference level.
FS (Full Scale)
The full scale value is the maximum value or the span of a measurement range. Limits and
specifications are often expressed as % FS.
g, gl
Acceleration due to gravity (g). Acceleration due to gravity at location of use (gl).
Gauge
As in gauge pressure. Pressure expressed relative to atmospheric pressure.
He
Helium gas.
Head
Fluid head, a pressure difference due to a difference in height. See also ATM head, DUT head
and PISTON head.
High Line Differential
As in high line differential pressure measurement mode. Pressure expressed relative to a line
pressure greater than atmospheric pressure. Defined by using two piston gauges.
HSTOP, LSTOP
High stop and low stop, piston maximum end of stroke positions.
InHg
Pressure unit of measure, inches of mercury.
InWa
Pressure unit of measure, inches of water.
2
kcm
Pressure unit of measure, kilogram per centimeter square.
Line Pressure
Pressure on the low side in high line differential pressure measurement mode. Pressure relative to
which the differential pressure is defined.
Measurement Mode
Mode in which PG7000 is defining pressures. These include gauge (pressure relative to
atmospheric pressure), absolute by atmosphere (pressure relative to vacuum determined by
adding atmospheric pressure to gauge pressure), absolute by vacuum (PG7601 only) (pressure
relative to absolute vacuum determined by establishing a vacuum around the mass load),
differential (PG7601 only) (pressure relative to atmospheric or another static pressure
determined by subtracting the static pressure from absolute by vacuum).
MS (Mass Set)
A group of masses composed for use with a PG7000 piston gauge.
Mass Bell
The sleeve loaded onto the piston to carry other masses.
Mass Entry Mode
(mass to pressure)
Operating mode in which the user enters the mass loaded on the piston and the PG7000
calculates the defined pressure. See also Pressure Entry Mode.
Medium, pressurized
The pressurized fluid.
Multiplier
A value by which internal sensor readings are multiplied to change their slope (pressure multiplier,
temperature multiplier, humidity multiplier, vacuum multiplier) for calibration adjustment.
N2
Nitrogen gas.
Nominal Mass
The mass loaded on the piston in terms of the nominal values written on the individual masses.
See also True Mass.
Normal
A conventional or standard value.
Page 211
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PC
Piston-cylinder, piston-cylinder module.
Pressure Entry Mode
(pressure to mass)
Operating mode in which the user enters the pressure to be defined and PG7000 calculates the
mass to load. See also Mass entry mode.
PISTON head
Fluid head correction based on the difference between the piston’s current position and the
reference level.
PRT
Platinum Resistance Thermometer. The element used in the piston-cylinder mounting post to
measure temperature.
Ready/Not Ready
Indication of when conditions are present to make in tolerance pressure definitions based on
specific criteria for each condition.
Reference Level
Height at which pressures are defined. PG7000 defines pressures at its reference level. Fluid head
corrections correct the pressure relative to the reference level.
Reference PG7000
The PG7000 used on the reference side (high side) in high line differential pressure mode (see also
Tare PG7000).
SETUP file
File specifying the source of values for the variables used by PG7000 to calculate defined pressure.
Static Pressure
Pressure on the low side in PG7601 differential mode.
Tare PG7000
The PG7000 on used on the tare side (low side) in high line differential pressure mode (see also
Reference PG7000).
True Mass
The actual mass loaded on the piston using the measured value of each mass. See also
Nominal Mass.
User Level
Level of security that can be set to limit access to certain PG7000 functions
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 212
7. 10BAPPENDIX
7.4
WARRANTY STATEMENT
Except to the extent limited or otherwise provided herein, DH Instruments, a Fluke Company, (DHI)
warrants for one year from purchase, each new product sold by it or one of its authorized distributors,
only against defects in workmanship and/or materials under normal service and use. Products which
have been changed or altered in any manner from their original design, or which are improperly or
defectively installed, serviced or used are not covered by this warranty.
DHI and any of its Authorized Service Providers’ obligations with respect to this warranty are limited to
the repair or replacement of defective products after their inspection and verification of such defects. All
products to be considered for repair or replacement are to be returned to DHI, or its Authorized Service
Provider, freight prepaid, after receiving authorization from DHI or its Authorized Service Provider. The
buyer assumes all liability vis-à-vis third parties in respect of its acts or omissions involving use of the
products. In no event shall DHI be liable to purchaser for any unforeseeable or indirect damage, it being
expressly stated that, for the purpose of this warranty, such indirect damage includes, but is not limited to,
loss of production, profits, revenue, or goodwill, even if DHI has been advised of the possibility thereof,
and regardless of whether such products are used individually or as components in other products.
Items returned to DHI under warranty claim but determined to not have a defect covered under warranty
or to not have a defect at all are subject to an evaluation and shipping charge as well as applicable repair
and/or calibration costs.
The provisions of this warranty and limitation may not be modified in any respect except in writing signed
by a duly authorized officer of DHI.
The above warranty and the obligations and liability of DHI and its authorized service providers exclude
any other warranties or liabilities of any kind.
Table 32. DHI Authorized Service Providers
DH INSTRUMENTS, A FLUKE COMPANY
AUTHORIZED SERVICE PROVIDERS
COMPANY
TELEPHONE,
FAX & EMAIL
ADDRESS
NORMAL SUPPORT
REGION
DH Instruments, a Fluke
Company
4765 East Beautiful Lane
Phoenix AZ 85044-5318
USA
Tel 602.431.9100
Fax 602.431.9559
[email protected]
Worldwide
Minerva Meettechniek B.V.
Chrysantstraat 1
3812 WX Amersfoort
NETHERLANDS
Tel 31 33 46 22 000
Fax 31 33 46 22 218
[email protected]
European Union
Ohte Giken Inc .
Technology Center
258-1, Nakadai
Kasumigaura-machi,
Niihari-Gun,
Ibaraki 300-0133
Tel 81/29.840.9111
Fax 81/29.840.9100
Japan/Asia
National Institute of Metrology
Heat Division
Pressure & Vacuum Lab
NO. 18, Bei San Huan Donglu
Beijing 100013
PR CHINA
Tel 010-64291994 ext 5
Tel 010-64218637 ext 5
Fax 010-64218703
[email protected]
DHI Products Technical
Service Division
[email protected]
Page 213
Peoples Republic of China
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
PG7000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NO T E S
© 1998-2009 DH Instruments, a Fluke Company
Page 214